Home

CONTRACT N40085-08-B-0050 NAVFAC SPECIFICATION NO. 05

1. x SS 45 amp C WWIII oar C9 v 0U cp oO de D o Oe N OO 352 50 D D do Pe qe P Pe Te a OD OQ OO ON O0 Ob MEM iN RN ON N fe SECTION 23 03 00 Page 8 x5 AAAA i 1 f i Ir EE LILIL n Ll ILI EE ue 555451235 B i SE OME OL N ose RSD EM 4 Dd s i UOC ILIL TL JC JE XCICIE asa 6588 e a Les AN A D Od TM M C C NON 2 100 ary r1 v W E m d d ES Se i pope py rnm Pu pP 2 A LL dt d ud UC ove se lt t ILI Pe Y ON qe og HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 06 05 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Requirements of the General and Supplemental Conditions apply to all Work in this Section Division 15 Section Mechanical General Requirements applies to this Section with the additions and modifications specified herein 1 2 SUMMARY A This Section includes testing adjusting and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives including the following 1 Balancing airflow an
2. 120 00 Scheduleofprices 30 00 List of contact personnel 14 132 16 33 00 Submittal register 1 4 35 29 Crane Critical Lift Plan t Crane Work Plan Crane Operators LT Monthly Exposure Reports 1 Regulatory Citations and 1 14 Crane Reports t14 213 277 2 SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY T SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T C T R L A A O S R A cis S T M S P 1 A T F R E MAILED T C N TO T A G4 CONTR YL S R T E DESCRIPTION A I V DATE DATE C P F D F olo T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR JREVIEWERJREVIEWER ACTION REMARKS e AR wo co A 2 a fo 5 A 2 a A AJA AJ a A 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a cus pp S S Eq
3. Safety Nets If safety nets are used as the selected fall protection system on the project they shall be provided at unguarded workplaces leading edge work or when working over water machinery dangerous operations and or other surfaces where the use of ladders scaffolds catch platforms temporary floors fall arrest systems or restraint positioning systems are impractical Safety nets shall be tested immediately after installation with a drop test of 181 4 kg 400 pounds dropped from the same elevation a person might fall and every six months thereafter 3 5 Existing Anchorage Existing anchorages to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be certified or re certified by a qualified person for fall protection in accordance with ANSI 7359 1 Exiting horizontal lifeline achorages shall be certified or re certified by a registered professional engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems 3 6 Horizontal Lifelines Horizontal lifelines shall be designed installed certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 29 CFR 1926 500 3 7 Guardrail Systems Guardrails shall consist of top and mid rails post and toe boards The top edge height of standard railing must be 42 inches plus or minus 3 inches above the walking working level When mid rails are use
4. _ Pump Sump _ Chiller Water Cooled Screw Regulator Temperature __ Compressor Control Air __ Tank Hot Water Storage Compressor Industrial Air Tower Cooling Dryer Refrigerated Air Unit Air Handling __ Exchanger Heat Unit AC Condensing __ Evaporator Freezer __ Unit Freezer Condensing __ Evaporator Refrigerator Unit Refrigerator Condensing __ Fan Exhaust Unit Fan Coil _ Generator Unit TAB Attach Room No List Heater Space __ Unit Attach Room No List Heater Unit Valve Pressure Reducing Heat Pump Geo Thermal Valve Steam Pilot Water Heater Demolished Removed Equipment Maximo no or Ser no New Equipment Manufacturer Model no Ser no Type Elec Oil LP Gas Gas _ Steam Water AL Motor Data HP Volts____ Phase RLA RPM Frame Tons of Motors no of Belts Belt size s KW Refrig type Refrig Qty Filter Size s SECTION 23 03 00 Page 7 i i i i Eion i EN I i Hr Or Fr r3 E ar ri T rpuru p LILI IL ILL ALL I E TE EM i we 094 Be OO Qo M 92 5 Yo st Sox sf 23 e 09 B X 7 one prp perte 5 v Od 9 ouo D o E e PM S xt q Bos s EM NON Co C 0 dO 59 dO dn c 6 d S
5. O N 2 ie 2 n 4 NEN Oo 2 EEG es N 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a cus pp S S Eq ie NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E E i NEN En E on el SS 2200 CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 5 T P C N S 5 C D T E 015719 Permitto transport hazardous 14 3 l 1 ll L weed Ip gar sp qd up pm g Hazardous waste certification 144 TT f
6. J Electrical Generators i Locate a b c d e STEAM DISTRIBUTION K Boiler Il Locate a b c d e H wo p bu L Fitting 05080050 Sub Station ID Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Sub Meter GPS Drawing Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD LEJEUNE electrical generator point GPS and collect the following attributes Generator ID Disposition Type KVA KW Rate Voltage Fuel Type Manufacture Model Serial Number Circuit ID MAL etc X Coordinates Y Coordinates Facility ID Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Data Source Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing RG2 51 ASL FC2 Collect GPS data survey grade LEJEUNE heat cool boiler site GPS and collect the following attributes Date Acquired Year Disposition Type Capacity Heat Capacity Units Building ID Resides X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Facility Number where Boiler LEJEUNE heat cool fitting point 1 Georeference fitting data and collect the following attributes SECTION 01 77 00 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 a Subtype ID Anchor Cap Elbow Joint Tank b Date Acquired Year c Fitting Type d Material e Size
7. A A A N 2 60 ie 2 WIN N N O Oo 2 00 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a cus pp S S Eq ie NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E E i NEN En E on el SS 2200 CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR SCHEDULE DATES APPROVING AUTHORITY gt z o 2 MAILED TO R A N S M T A CONTRI L 2Z20 HAO gt DESCRIPTION DATE lt gt 20 lt L A 5 5 T Oz lt lt gt IVUSFADOFrAYrV F D F ACTION CONTR REVIEWER JREVIEWER ACTION ITEM SUBMITTED SUBMIT REMARKS f 6 20 00 Circuit breakers 2 5 831 76 Wiring Diagrams 6 Fire alarm control pane 19 SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION
8. S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a cus pp S S Eq ie NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E E i NEN En E on el ie ee CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 _ N 8 3176 Operation and Maintenance O amp M Instructions Instruction of Government Employees Cd 31 23 00 00 20 SD 06 Test Reports backfill Densitytests Cd 2 92 19 Fertilizer 2 ISD 07 Certificates N CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY T SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T C T R L A A O S R A cis S T M S P 1 A T F R E MAILED T C N TO T A G4 CONTR YL S R T E DESCRIPTION A I V DATE DATE NIN C P F D F olo T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR JREVIEWERJREVIEWER ACTION REMARKS 283176 NJN W N N w A 2 00 33 71 02 50 02 Shop Drawings Medium voltage cable Medium voltage cable joints IN 5 O1 Medium voltage cable 2 1 terminations Cableendcaps 600 volt wires and cables
9. 2 1 2 2 Energy Recovery Wheel Energy recovery wheel shall be in cassette form mounted on slide out track and include a total energy recovery wheel for sensible and latent energy recovery wheel drive motor with permanently sealed ball bearings and electrical disconnect The total enthalpy wheel shall be constructed of a SECTION 23 73 33 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 light weight polymer material in removable sections with a permanently bonded silica gel desiccant coating The unit shall not require a condensation pan Sensible only energy recovery devices are not acceptable 21 243 Exterior Installations Unit shall be of internal frame type construction of G90 galvanized steel All panels exposed to the weather shall be a minumum of 20 gauge galvanized Steel Where top panels are joined there shall be a standing seam to insure peositive weather protection Provide weather hoods of the same finish as the unit Supply weather hood shall be louvered to stop wind driven rain and incorporate a moisture eliminator and bird screen Exhaust hood shall include an automatic back draft damper and bird screen 1 2 4 Cooling and Heating Coils Chilled water cooling coil and hot water reheating coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins Cooling coils shall have insulated stainless steel drain pans piped to the exterior of the unit 21 25 Controls Provide DDC type microprocessor with all sensors and de
10. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions strainers and check valves Optional PVC Fitting Covers At the option of the Contractor premolded one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape SECTION 23 07 00 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape adhesive seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers Seams in the cover and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal 2 3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines General Requirements All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted shall be insulated per Table 2 This includes but is not limited to the following a Hot water heating Insulation shall be covered in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations with a factory applied Type I jacket or field
11. Order documents from Superintendent of Documents U S Government Printing Office GPO 732 North Capitol Street NW Washington DC 20401 Ph 202 512 1800 Fax 202 512 2104 E mail contactcenter gpo gov Internet http www gpoaccess gov End of Section SECTION 01 42 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 45 10 QUALITY CONTROL 09 01 PART 1 GENERAL L 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 880 1996 Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Organizations for Examination and Inspection of Steel Stainless Steel and Related Alloys ASTM C 1077 1998 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation ASTM D 3666 2000 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Bituminous Paving Materials ASTM D 3740 1999c Agencies Engaged in the Testing and or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction ASTM E 329 2000a Agencies Engaged in the Testing and Inspection of Materials Used on Construction ASTM E 543 1999 Evaluating Agencies that Perform Nondestructive Testing 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 11
12. requirements 3 Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system 4 Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation 5 Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations 6 Library of application software 7 Operation and maintenance manuals 10 KEYS Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical Provide not less than six keys of each type required All keys and locks shall be mastered to a Single key as required by the local SECTION 28 31 76 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 A GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to UL Standard 2017 or equal shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration if the software programming features can not provide a listed interface control If field modification such as adding equipment such as relays then the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand of manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor The installing contractor shall as part of his submittal documents provide this information 22 SYSTEM OPERATION The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification S
13. 1 4 2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register Update the following fields in the government furnished submittal register program or equivalent fields in program utilized by contractor Column b Transmittal Number Contractor assigned list of consecutive Column j Action Code k Date of action used to record contractor s review when forwarding submittals to QC Column 1 List date of submittal transmission Column q List date approval received 1 4 3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register Update the following fields in the government furnished submittal register program or equivalent fields in program utilized by contractor Column b Column 1 List date of submittal receipt Column m through p Column q List date returned to contractor 1 4 4 Contractor Action Code and Action Code Entries used will be as follows others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form NR Not Received AN Approved as noted A Approved RR Disapproved Revise and Resubmit 1 4 5 Copies Delivered to the Government Deliver one copy of submitted register updated by contractor to government with each invoice request Deliver in electronic format unless a paper copy is requested by contracting officer SECTION 01 33 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 l5 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS 1451 Reviewing Certifying Approving Authority QC organization shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying tha
14. Flexible Steel Conduit UL 467 1993 R 2001 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 486A 1997 R 2001 Bul 2002 2003 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors UL 486C 2000 R 2002 Splicing Wire Connectors UL 489 2002 R 2002 Bul 2003 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures UL 50 1995 R 1999 Bul 2001 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL 508 1999 R 2002 Bul 2003 Industrial Control Equipment UL 510 1994 R 1998 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape UL 514A 1996 R 2001 Bul 2002 Metallic Outlet Boxes UL 514B 1997 R 2002 Bul 2002 Fittings for Cable and Conduit UL 6 2000 Bul 2001 2002 Rigid Metal Conduit Steel Lh 551 1995 R 2002 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 67 1993 R 2002 Panelboards UL 797 2000 Bul 2002 Electrical Metallic Tubing SECTION 26 20 00 Page 2 HVAC 1 2 Section 26 00 00 REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 83 845 869A 870 943 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 05080050 1998 R 2001 Bul 2002 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 1995 R 2002 Bul 2003 Motor Control Centers 1998 Bul 2002 Reference Standard for Service Equipment 1995 R 1999 Bul 2002 Wireways Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings 1993 R 2002 Bul 2002 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
15. Reports Accident Reports Monthly Exposure Reports Regulatory Citations and Violations Crane Reports SD 07 Certificates Confined Space Entry Permit Certificate of Compliance Crane Third Party Certification of Barge Mounted Mobile Cranes Submit one copy of each permit certificate attached to each Daily Report 1 3 DEFINITIONS a Associate Safety Professional ASP An individual who is currently SECTION 01 35 29 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals b Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician CHST An individual who is currently certified as a CHST by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals c Certified Industrial Hygienist CIH An individual who is currently certified as a CIH by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene d Certified Safety Professional CSP An individual who is currently certified as a CSP by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals e Certified Safety Trained Supervisor STS An individual who is currently certified as an STS by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals f Competent Person for Fall Protection A person who is cabable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof as well as their application and use with related equipment and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of fallin
16. a Bridge ID Facility Number b Number of Lanes c Bridge Material Type d Bridge Type e Capacity f Installation Date g Drawing Number h Drawing Type i Contract Number j Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing J Pedestrian Sidewalks LEJEUNE pedestrian sidewalk area 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a Material b Use Residential General Pedestrian etc c Installation Date d Status e Drawing Number f Drawing Type g Contract Number h Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing SECTION 01 77 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 K Fence Walls Gates LEJEUNE general improvement feat line 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a Subtype ID FENCE GATE WALL b Material CHAIN LINK WOOD etc Containment Type AST Parking lot Pumping Station Pond Well etc d Feature Height e Units of Measure f Drawing Number g Drawing Type h Contract Number i Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing L Recreation Trails LEJEUNE recreation trail centerline 1 GPS and collect the following attributes Subtype MULTI PURPOSE RIDING etc Trail Description PAVED UNPAVED DIRT etc Paved YES NO Date Acquired Year Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Sur
17. b The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products installation procedures and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types c The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products systems installation procedures equipment and test methods 4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 12 47 kV primary three phase three wire 60 Hz and 480Y277 volts secondary three phase four wire Final connections to the power distribution system at sectionalizer switch cabinet 12 shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer SUBMITTALS Submittals required in the sections which refer to this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and to the following additional requirements Submittals shall include the manufacturer s name trade name place of manufacture catalog model or number nameplate data size layout dimensions capacity project specification and technical paragraph reference Submittals shall also include applicable federal military industry and technical society publication references and years of satisfactory service and other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item to be provided
18. ie NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E E i NEN En E on el SS 222 CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 135 29 14 7 Barge Mounted Mobile Cranes 45 10 y t 14535 SD 07 Certificates SpecialInspector Quality AssurancePlan 50 00 Traffic control pan 7 1622 SD 03ProductData _Backflow preventers 2 D 06 Test Reports Backflow Preventer Tests 3 50 07 Certificates 0 00 Backflow Tester Certifications 1 Backflow Preventers Certificate 1 57 19 Environmental protection plan 1 Preconstruction survey 16 ISD 11 Closeout Submittals Solid waste disposal permit 1 Disposal permitforhazardous 1 waste Environmentaltraining f4 documentation SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 2 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY T SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T C T R L A A O S R A cis S T M S P 1 A T F R E MAILED T C N TO T A G4 CONTR YL S R T E DESCRIPTION A I V DATE DATE NIN C P F D F olo T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR JREVIEWERJREVIEWER ACTION REMARKS 013529 014510 e ma cx AO
19. 1 7 4 Drawings Because of the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required The Contractor shall carefully investigate the mechanical electrical and finish conditions that could affect the work and shall furnish all work necessary to meet such conditions 1 7 4 1 List of Drawings Provide a list of drawings 1 7 4 2 List of Symbols and Abbreviations Used on Drawings Provide an index of symbols and abbreviations used on the drawings 1 7 4 3 List of I O Points For each input and output physically connected to a digital controller provide on a controller by controller basis provide the following a Point description for example mixed air temperature supply fan start stop etc b Point type AO AI DO or DI C Point range d Sensor range associated with point range e Software name s associated with point if any f Point connection terminal number 1 7 4 4 Equipment Components List Submit a listing of controllers and connected devices shown on control system schematic List the following a Control system schematic name SECTION 23 09 54 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Description c Manufacturer of controller d Controller s name e Equipment part numbers f for valves g For actuators 1 Motive force such as pneumatic or electric 2 Normal position 3 Nominal operating range such as 3 to 7 psi 4 to
20. 50 06 TestReports 2 Acceptance checks and tests 50 07 Certificates Cable splicer qualifications Medium voltage cable tests N eo 9 2 Co N O1 a 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a eae S S Eq 2712 NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E E i NEN En E on el SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 11 OF 11 PAGES HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Lz 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST ANSI 7359 1 1992 R 1999 Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems Subsystems and Components ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B30 3 1996 Construction Tower Crane
21. A list of Contractor and subcontractor personnel on the work site their trades employer work location description of work performed and hours worked e A list of job safety actions taken and safety inspections conducted Indicate that safety requirements have been met including the results on the following 1 Was a job safety meeting held this date If YES attach a copy of the meeting minutes 2 Were there any lost time accidents this date If YES attach a copy of the completed OSHA report 3 Was crane manlift trenching scaffold hv electrical high work hazmat work done If YES attach a statement or checklist showing inspection performed 4 Was hazardous material waste released into the environment If YES attach a description of incident and proposed action f A list of safety actions taken today and safety inspections conducted g A list of equipment material received each day that is incorporated into the job h A list of construction and plant equipment on the work site including the number of hours used idle and down for repair i Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received problems encountered during construction work progress and delays conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications field changes safety hazards encountered instructions given and corrective actions taken delays encountered and a record of vis
22. ASPRS Accuracy Standards for Large Scale Maps and Interim Accuracy Standards for Large Scale Maps ASPRS 1991 F Geospatial Data Structure 1 GIS Data Sets The Contractor should have a working knowledge of the most current version of the Spatial Data Standards for SECTION 01 77 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Facilities Infrastructure and Environment SDSFIE also known as the National Committee for Information Technology Standards G The following attributes shall be collected for each Infrastructure data class 1 Infrastructure Collect GPS data for all features listed with Sub Meter accuracy A Structures LEJEUNE structure existing area 1 GPS Structure and collect the following attributes a Subtype ID Structure Canopy Pavilion Shed Towers Carport and Dugouts etc b Building ID Facility Number Structure Status existing structure portable etc d Number of Levels e Structure Use 2 Populate Residential if Structure is a residential unit f Material Brick Vinyl etc g Drawing Number h Drawing Type i Contract Number j Date Acquired Year k Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing B Floor Outline Lejeune building floor outline Polyline All new buildings will be required to have a clean floor plan for each floor that will be delivered in GIS and AutoCAD format The floor pl
23. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer microprocessor or microcontroller based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified b Provide Style B initiating device circuits C Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for each floor d Provide Style Z notification appliance circuits The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized e Provide electrical supervision of the primary power AC supply presence of the battery battery voltage and placement of system modules within the control panel SECTION 28 31 76 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 f Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a Single break or open condition or ground fault The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power AC supply absence of a battery supply low battery voltage or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall Silence the audible trouble signal without affecting the visual indicator After the system returns to normal operating conditions the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged g Provide a notification appliance silencing switch that when activated will silence the audible signal appliance but will not affect the visual alarm indicator the liquid crystal display or the automatic notification of the central station service This
24. Apparatus Coil Test Reports For apparatus coils include the following Coil Data Include the following System identification Location Coil type Number of rows Fin spacing in fins per inch Make and model number Face area in sq ft Tube size in NPS Tube and fin materials Circuiting arrangement Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Airflow rate in cfm Average face velocity in fpm Air pressure drop in inches wg Outside air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Return air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Entering air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Leaving air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Water flow rate in gpm Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig Entering water temperature in deg F Leaving water temperature in deg F H Fan Test Reports For supply return and exhaust fans include the following 1 Fan Data Include the following a System identification b Location c Make and type d Model number and size e Manufacturer s serial number f Arrangement and class g Sheave make size in inches and bore h Sheave dimensions center to center and amount of adjustments in inches 2 Motor Data Include the following a Make and frame type and size b Horsepower and rpm c Volts phase and hertz d Full load amperage and service factor e Sheave
25. Atlanta GA 30329 Ph 800 527 4723 or 404 636 8400 Fax 404 321 5478 E mail ashrae ashrae org Internet http www ashrae org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING ASSE 901 Canterbury Suite A Westlake OH 44145 Ph 440 835 3040 Fax 440 835 3488 E mail info asse plumbing org Internet http www asse plumbing org AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver CO 80235 Ph 800 926 7337 Fax 303 347 0804 Internet http www awwa org AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY AWS 550 N W LeJeune Road Miami FL 33126 Ph 800 443 9353 305 443 9353 Fax 305 443 7559 E mail infoGaws org Internet http www aws org ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME Three Park Avenue M S 10E New York NY 10016 Ph 212 591 7722 or 800 843 2763 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Fax 212 591 7674 E mail infocentralGasme org Internet http www asme org ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES AEIC 600 North 18th Street P O Box 2641 Birmingham AL 35291 Ph 205 257 2530 Fax 205 257 2540 Internet http www aeic org ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM 100 Barr Harbor Drive P O Box C700 West Conshohocken PA 19428 2959 Ph 610 832 9500 Fax 610 832 9555 E mail service astm org Internet http www astm org FM GLOBAL FM 1301 Atwood Avenue P O Box 7500 Johnston RI 02919 Ph 401 275 3000 Fax 401 275 3029 E mail infor
26. C contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system The Control Panel for the Voice Notification System shall be independent of the Fire alarm system and shall be capable of autonomous operation The system shall be housed in same panel with the fire alarm system Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice Notification System Messages shall utilize a male voice and shall be similar to the following 1 1000 Hz tones 1 sec on 1 2 second off 1 second on 1 2 second off 1 second on May I have your attention please May I have your attention please A fire has been reported that may affect your floor Please walk to the nearest exit and evacuate the building Provide a 2 second pause May I have your attention please repeat the message 2 1000 Hz tones 1 sec on 1 2 second off 1 second on 1 2 second off 1 second on May I have your attention please May I have your attention please A fire emergency has been reported in the building Please leave the building by the nearest exit or exit stairway Do not use the elevators Provide a 2 second pause May I have your attention please repeat the message 3 1000 Hz
27. Class 2 maximum surface temperature 400 degrees F 3 pcf average one inch thick Type IA IB Il ILLI and IV 2821122 Blanket Insulation Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553 Type 1 Class B 3 3 4 pcf nominal 2 0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be used 2 350 Duct Insulation Jackets 243 2 1 All Purpose Jacket Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer s standard reinforced fire retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service In exposed locations provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting 2u 322 2 Metal Jackets a Aluminum Jackets ASTM B 209 Temper H14 minimum thickness of 27 gauge 0 016 inch with factory applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger Provide stainless steel bands minimum width of 1 2 inch 2 2 2 3 Vapor Barrier Weatherproofing Jacket Vapor barrier weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white black and embossed or greater than 8 ply minimm 2 9 mils adhesive heavy duty white or natural 253 3 Weatherproof Duct Insulation Provide ASTM C 591
28. Intermediate Metal Conduit 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein 1 3 DEFINITIONS a In the text of this section the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning In the text of this section medium voltage cable splices and medium voltage cable joints are used interchangeably and have the same meaning 1 4 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Medium voltage cable Medium voltage cable joints Medium voltage cable terminations Cable end caps 600 volt wires and cables SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests Identify each cable for 600 volt and medium voltage cable tests When testing grounding electrodes and systems identify each electrode and system for each test as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurement were made SD 07 Certificates Cable splicer qualifications Medium voltage cable tests 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Each cable splicer may be required to make an approved dummy splice in the presence of the Contracting Officer in accordance with cable manufacturer s instructions The Contractor shall furnish the material for dummy splices 1 5 1 Cable Splicer Qualifications a In ord
29. Main bus shall be copper silver plated enclosed in isolated compartment at top of each vertical section Main bus shall be isolated from wire troughs starters and other areas 2 14 1 2 Vertical Bus Vertical bus shall have continuous current rating of 300 amperes and shall be copper silver plated Vertical bus shall be enclosed in flame retardant polyester glass sandwich 2 14 1 3 Ground Bus Copper ground bus shall be provided full width of motor control center and shall be equipped with necessary lugs 2 14 2 Motor Disconnecting Devices and Controllers Shall comply with paragraph entitled Combination Motor Controllers 2 14 3 Combination Motor Controllers UL 508 and other requirements in paragraph entitled Motor Controllers Controller shall employ fusible switch with clips for Class R type fuses for branch circuit protection Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall be 43 000 rms symmetrical amperes SECTION 26 20 00 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 15 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT UL 467 Ground rods shall be copper clad steel with minimum diameter of 3 4 in and minimum length of 10 ft 2 16 NAMEPLATES Provide as specified in Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2 17 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping 2 18 WIREWAYS UL 870 Materia
30. Remove at the completion of work 8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES Provide adequate sanitary conveniences of a type approved for the use of persons employed on the work properly secluded from public observation and maintained in such a manner as required and approved by the Contracting Officer Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance Upon completion of the work remove the conveniences from the premises leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance Dispose of sewage through connection to a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system Where such systems are not available use chemical toilets or comparably effective units and periodically empty wastes into a municipal district or station sanitary sewage system or remove waste to a commercial facility Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors 29 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS Locate these where indicated 294 Maintenance of Temporary Facilities Suitably paint and maintain the temporary facilities Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal SECTION 01 50 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 d 9 2 Trailers or Storage Buildings Trailers or storage buildings will be permitted where space is available subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer The trailers or buildings shall be in good condition free from visible damage rust and deterioration and meet all applicable
31. SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 Ts 1 SUMMARY de Government Furnished Information Submittal register database and submittal management program will be delivered to the contractor by contracting officer on 3 1 2 inch disk Register database will have the following fields completed to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage Column c Lists specification section in which submittal is required Column d Lists each submittal description SD No and type e g SD 04 Drawings required in each specification section Column e Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements Do not consider entries in column e as limiting project requirements Column f Indicate approving authority for each submittal The Contracting Officer is approving authority for all submittals The database and submittal management program will be extractable from the disk furnished to contractor for operation on contractor s IBM compatible personal computer with 640kb RAM a hard drive and 3 1 2 inch high density floppy disk drive 2 DEFINITIONS Submittal Shop drawings product data samples and administrative submittals presented for review and approval Contract Clauses FAR 52 236 5 Material and Workmanship paragraph b and FAR 52 236 21
32. Waste 40 CFR 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 263 Transporters of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 264 Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities 40 CFR 265 Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facilities 40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan 49 Crk 273 General Information Regulations and Definitions 49 QPR 172 Hazardous Materials Tables and Hazardous Materials Communications Regulations 49 CFR 178 Shipping Container Specification SECTION 01 57 19 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 s 2 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection Contractors shall complete and provide environmental training documentation for training required by Federal State and local regulations 459 DEFINITIONS Sediment Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind iu Solid Waste Rubbish debris garbage and other discarded solid materials except hazardous waste as defined in paragraph entitled Hazardous Waste resulting from industrial commercial and agricultural operations and from community activities 2343 Sanitary Wastes Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage 3 4 Rubbish Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper boxes glass crockery metal lumber cans and bones 234 5 Debris Combustible and noncombu
33. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed in order to obtain the specified ground resistance the provisions of the contract covering Changes shall apply Sed TI Grounding Electrodes Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded Sd Grounding Connections Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or compression connector as Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer s written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire Grounding Conductors Grounding conductors shall be stranded bare copper conforming to ASTM B 8 Class B for sizes No 6 AWG and larger and shall be solid bare copper conforming to ASTM B 1 for sizes No 8 and smaller Cable sheaths cable shields conduit and equipment shall be grounded with No
34. applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein 1 3 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Panelboards Motor control centers Wireways SD 03 Product Data Receptacles Circuit breakers Switches Combination motor controllers Manual motor starters SD 06 Test Reports 600 volt wiring test Grounding system test Ground fault receptacle test SD 07 Certificates Fuses SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data SECTION 26 20 00 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Electrical Systems Data Package 5 Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data and as specified herein 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Fuses Submit coordination data as specified in article entitled FUSES of this section Tes MAINTENANCE 12541 Electrical Systems Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building This shall include a Single line diagram of the as built building electrical system b Schematic diagram of electrical control system other than HVAC covered elsewhere Manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materia
35. be fire rated As a minimum factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150 Factory insulated items no jacket installed indoors and which are located in air plenums in ceiling spaces and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84 Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material Jackets facings and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 8 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS SERVICES 8 1 Temperature Controls Chiller control packages shall be fully coordinated with and integrated into the temperature control system specified in Section 23 09 54 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer s published diagrams recommendations and equipment warranty requirements Where equipment is specified to conform to the requirements of ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dland ASME BPVC SEC IX the design fabrication and installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC V
36. black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied PVC jacketing requires no factory applied jacket beneath it however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3 SECTION 23 07 00 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 24 1 Aluminum Jacket The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o clock positions Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un insulated surface joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder 3 2 4 2 Insulation for Fittings Flanges unions valves fittings and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water permeable to air recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape emb
37. construction such as cooling towers placed beyond the 5 foot line 4 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS In conjunction with the Contract Clause DFARS 252 236 7000 Modification Proposals Price Breakdown and where actual ownership and operating costs of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting records equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions SECTION 01 20 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 ds 1 of the COE EP 1110 1 8 5 CONTRACTOR S PAYMENT REQUEST 5 1 Proper Payment Request A proper request for payment invoice shall comply with all requirements specified in this Section and the contract payment clauses If any invoice does not comply with these requirements it shall be returned with a statement of the reasons why it was not a proper invoice A proper payment request invoice includes the following information completed forms and number of copies indicated Upon request the Contracting Officer will furnish copies of Government forms a Contractor s Invoice on NAVFAC Form 7300 30 which shall show the basis for arriving at the amount of the invoice Submit one original and two copies b Contractor s Monthly Estimate for Voucher LANTNAVFACENGCOM Form 4 4330 110 Submit original and two copies c Payment Certification Furnish as specified in FAR Clause 52 232 5 c Payments under Fixed Price Construction Contracts Submit one original d QC I
38. discovery until directed by the Contracting Officer to resume work The Government retains ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources 29 NOISE Make the maximum use of low noise emission products as certified by the EPA Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted without written permission from the Contracting Officer and then only during designated times 4 RESTRICTIONS ON EQUIPMENT 24 1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression a Electric motors must comply with MIL STD 461 relative to radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference A test for electromagnetic interference will not be required for motors that are identical physically and electrically to those that have previously met the requirements of MIL STD 461 An electromagnetic interference suppression test will not be required for electric motors without commutation or sliprings having no more than one starting contact and operated at 3 600 revolutions per minute or less b Equipment used by the Contractor shall comply with MIL S 16165for internal combustion engines and MIL STD 461 for other devices capable of producing radiated or conducted interference Conduct tests for electromagnetic interference on electric motors and Contractor s construction equipment in accordance with MIL STD 461 and MIL STD 462 Test location shall be reasonably free from radiated and conducted interference Furnish testing equipment instrumen
39. experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturer s catalogs or brochures Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer s factory tests can be shown Products shall be supported by a service organization as specified in the Submittals paragraph System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations 22 NAMEPLATES Major equipment including chillers compressors compressor drivers condensers liquid coolers receivers refrigerant leak detectors heat exchanges fans and motors shall have the manufacturer s name address type or style model or serial number and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life and made of stainless steel Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts 23 ELECTRICAL WORK Electrical equipment motors motor efficiencies and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Electrical SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motors motor starters and controls Electrical characteristic
40. for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures 2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 07 Certificates Special Inspector Certification attesting that the Special Inspector is qualified by knowledge and experience to perform the specified Special Inspections Information which provides evidence of the knowledge and experience necessary to qualify a person as a Special Inspector for the category of work being certified will accompany the qualification Quality Assurance Plan A copy of the Quality Assurance Plan covered by a certificate indicating that the plan meets the content specified in this section 3 SPECIAL INSPECTOR A Special Inspector shall be used to perform Special Inspections required by this section The Special Inspector is a person employed by the Contractor and approved by the Government as being qualified by knowledge and experience to perform the Special Inspection for the category of work being constructed Special Inspectors shall perform their duties independent from the construction quality control staff employed by the Contractor More than one Special Inspector may be required to provide the varied knowledge and experience necessary to adequately inspect all of the categories of work requiring Special Inspection 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN A quality assurance plan shall be developed containing the following SECT
41. from the FCCCHR USC Listing of the particular make model design and size in the current FCCCHR USC will be acceptable as the required proof 4 6 Valves for Steam 100 psig and Greater Provide piping to and including the main steam pressure regulating valves bypass valves safety relief valves and high pressure traps within each building under this section a Gate valves globe valves angle valves and check valves ASME ANSI B16 34 steel body minimum of ASME Class 150 Provide swing check valves b Steam pressure regulating valves Steel body minimum of ASME Class 150 except as modified herein Valve seats and disc shall be of replaceable heat treated stainless steel Valves shall be single seated seat tight under dead end conditions and move to the closed position in the event of pressure failure of the operating controlling medium Provide strainer in inlet from external operating controlling medium Valves shall be controlled by pilot valve with strainer at inlet from external pressure sensing piping Valves shall be internally or externally Steam traced for freeze protection Valves shall be piston operated type or spring loaded diaphragm operated type with stainless steel springs Safety relief valves Minimum of ASME Class 150 with test lever Valves shall have steel or copper alloy body Valves shall have flanged inlet and outlet connections or threaded connections attached to threaded ASME Class 150 flang
42. include requirements for safeguarding excavations An activity requiring an AHA shall not proceed until the AHA has been accepted by the Contracting Officer s representative and a meeting has been conducted by the Contractor to discuss its contents with everyone engaged in the activity including on site Government representatives The Contractor shall document meeting attendance at the preparatory initial and follow up phases of quality control inspection The AHA shall be continuously reviewed and when appropriate modified to address changing site conditions or operations The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activity s safety and health controls The AHA list will be reviewed periodically at least monthly at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures scheduling or hazards change Activity hazard analyses shall be updated as necessary to provide an effective response to changing work conditions and activities The on site superintendent site safety and health officer and competent persons used to develop the AHAs including updates shall sign and date the AHAs before they are implemented The activity hazard analyses shall be developed using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed Any activities listed on the project schedule will require an AHA The AHAs will be developed by the contractor su
43. termination numbers and the associated point names 1 4 1 5 Communication Architecture Schematic Submit a schematic showing communication networks used for all DDC system controllers workstations and field interface devices 1 5 SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturers specification sheets for each type of equipment to show compliance with the project specification For each type of equipment highlight each compliance item and reference each item to the relevant specification paragraph number Submit sufficient manufacturers information to allow verification of compliance by the reviewing SECTION 23 09 54 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 authority Equipment and software for which specification compliance data shall be submitted includes but is not limited to the following SD 02 Shop Drawings List of Symbols and Abbreviations Used on Drawings List of I O Points Equipment Components List AC Power Table Control system schematic Ladder diagrams Component wiring diagrams Terminal strip diagrams Communication architecture schematic After initial submittal and approval submit the following Drawing of operating program in the un compiled form Copy of the graphic pages of the operating interface program SD 03 Product Data DDC hardware DDC capabilities Variable frequency drive hardware Workstation software Input devices Output devices Surge and transient protection Hand held terminal Smoke detectors Pneumatic tubin
44. work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible Personnel shall not be lifted with a line hoist or friction crane j A fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 10BC and a minimum nominal capacity of 51b of extinguishing agent shall be available at all operator stations or crane cabs Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected maintained and recharged as specified in NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers k All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads SECTION 01 35 29 Page 21 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 l A weight handling equipment operator shall not leave his position at the controls while a load is suspended m The Contractor shall use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers n The crane hook block must be positioned directly over the load Side loading of the crane is prohibited O A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from entering the counterweight swing tail swing area of the crane p A substantial and durable rating chart containing legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane and securely mounted onto the crane cab in a location allowing easy reading by the operator while seated in the control station q Certification records which include the date of inspection Signature of the person performing the inspection and the serial number or other identifier of the
45. 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Lz 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USACE COE EP 1110 1 8 1995 Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating Expense Schedule 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Schedule of prices SCHEDULE OF PRICES 221 Data Required Within 15 calendar days of notice of award prepare and deliver to Contracting Officer a schedule of prices construction contract on the forms furnished by the Government Provide a detailed breakdown of the contract price giving quantities for each of the various kinds of work unit prices and extended prices therefor Schedule of prices shall be separated by individual building numbers with subtotals for each building 1942 Schedule Instructions Payments will not be made until the schedule of prices has been submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer Identify the cost for site work and include incidental work to the 5 foot line Identify costs for the building s and include work out to the 5 foot line Workout to the 5 foot line shall include construction encompassed within a theoretical line 5 feet from the face of exterior walls and shall include attendant
46. 00 10 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 73 33 HEATING VENTILATING AND COOLING SYSTEM 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE ARI ARI 430 1999 Central Station Air Handling Units ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B16 3 1998 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ASME B16 5 1996 B16 5a Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1 2 Through NPS 24 ASME B16 9 2001 Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings ASME B16 11 2001 Forged Fittings Socket Welding and Threaded ASME B16 23 1992 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV ASME ANSI B16 34 1996 Valves Flanged Threaded and Welding End ASME ANSI B16 39 1998 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions ASME B31 1 2001 Power Piping ASME ANSI B31 5 2001 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING ASSE ASSE 1003 2001 Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 53 A 53M 1999b Pipe Steel Black and Hot Dipped SECTION 23 73 33 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM PERE MSS MSS MSS MSS MSS MSS MSS NFPA A 106 A 193 A 193M A 194 A 194M A 525
47. 11 PAGES CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 3 09 54 Equipment Components List 7 4 4 AC Power Table Control system schematic PIN alo Ladder diagrams Data AJAJAJA 5 fo 2 353 Joo JN JN JN JN JN IN Je ie AO 00 AJN n w N 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T S S pup emi NEED ERES pui duc S S E E gn ops D DE L S ery HN a eae S S Eq 2712 O1 EE NES NEN E ri NEN E on pom d aa pr Es NEN n E E
48. 22 3 Rock Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges or the use of backhoe mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers also large boulders buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production 3 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 06 Test Reports Fill and backfill test Density tests test Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials 5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING Base bids on the following criteria a Surface elevations are as indicated b Pipes or other artificial obstructions except those indicated will not be encountered f Hard materials and rock will not be encountered g Suitable backfill and bedding material in the quantities required is available at the project site SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 1 h Blasting will not be
49. 23 73 33 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 d 2 4 4 Buried utility warning tape Provide detectable tape for warning of buried piping Steel Piping Systems Provide steel piping for the following piping systems as b 2 4 4 1 Steam and condensate piping Dual temperature water piping Chilled water piping Hot water piping Steel Pipe Provide ASTM A 53 A 53M Type E or Type S or ASTM A 106 steel pipe Provide Weight Class STD or Schedule No 40 black steel pipe for welding end connections Provide Weight Class XS or Schedule No 80 black steel pipe for threaded end connections and for condensate piping 2 4 4 2 Steel Pipe Fittings Provide ASME B16 3 or ASME B16 11 threaded fittings and ASME ANSI B16 39 threaded unions Provide ASME B16 9 buttwelding fittings of the same material and weight as the piping in which fittings are installed provide backing rings compatible with piping materials being buttwelded Provide ASME B16 11 socket welding fittings 2 4 4 3 Steel Pipe Unions Provide ASME ANSI B16 39 Class 150 unions with threaded end connections on one side of threaded valve in steel piping systems 2 4 4 4 Steel Pipe Flanges Provide ASME B16 5 Class 150 welding neck flanges Extend bolts no less than two full threads beyond the nut with the bolts tightened to the required torque a 2 4 5 Gaskets Provide one piece factory cut gaskets suitable for t
50. 3 4 pcf attached as per MICA standards Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F ducts shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct 2524 Duct Test Holes After duct systems have been tested adjusted and balanced breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired 5325 Duct Exposed to Weather Installation Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building After the above is accomplished the insulation shall then be further finished as detailed in the following subparagraphs uibs Round Duct Laminated self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed vapor barrier weatherproofing jacket Less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white black and embossed or greater than 8 ply heavy duty white and natural membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed see manufacturer s recommended installation instructions Aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped SECTION 23 07 00 Page 21 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential laps and at not m
51. 3 inch minimum width color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length Warning and identification to read CAUTION BURIED intended service LINE BELOW or similar wording Color and printing shall be permanent unaffected by moisture or soil Warning Tape Color Codes Yellow Electric Yellow Gas Oil Dangerous Materials Orange Telephone and Other Communications Blue Water Systems Green Sewer Systems White Steam Systems Gray Compressed Air 23d Warning Tape for Metallic Piping Acid and alkali resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width color and printing requirements specified above Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0 003 inch Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise with a maximum 350 percent elongation 2435 2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non Metallic Piping Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width color and printing requirements specified above Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0 004 inch Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires foil backing or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep Encase metallic element of
52. 54 Page 34 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 shall not be greater than one minute The contractor shall provide a printer at the job site for printing graphed trends The printer shall remain on the job site throughout Performance Verification Testing to allow printing trends 3 4 TRAINING Submit a training course schedule syllabus and training materials 14 days prior to the start of training Furnish a qualified instructor to conduct training courses for designated personnel in the maintenance and operation of the HVAC and DDC system Orient training to the specific system being installed under this contract Use operation and maintenance manual as the primary instructional aid in contractor provided activity personnel training Base training on the Operations and Maintenance manuals and a DDC training manual Manuals shall be delivered for each trainee with two additional sets delivered for archiving at the project site Training manuals shall include an agenda defined objectives and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson Furnish audio visual equipment and all other training materials and supplies A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom or lab instruction including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time Monday through Friday during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility For guidance the Contractor should assume the attendees will have a high school education and are famil
53. 6 AWG 3 1 11 4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in Structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement Use stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across such separations SECTION 33 71 02 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 1 12 Earthwork for Utilities Section 31 23 00 00 20 Excavation and Fill 3 1 13 Reconditioning of Surfaces 32141321 Unpaved Surfaces Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct or direct burial cable Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area re seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding FIELD QUALITY CONTROL As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract notify the Contracting Officer 5 working days prior to each tests Furnish labor equipment and incidentals required for testing except that the Government will provide electric power required for the tests Correct defects in the work provided by the Contractor and repeat tests until the work is in compl
54. 67 31 2 High Efficiency Single Phase Motors Unless otherwise specified single phase fractional horsepower alternating current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11 26 322 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors Unless otherwise specified polyphase motors except motors integral to equipment with a total efficiency rating shall be selected based on premium efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed SECTION 23 03 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 in NEMA MG 10 Additionally polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12 6C of NEMA MG 1 1 6 4 Three Phase Motor Protection Provide controllers for 3 phase motors rated one horsepower 75 kilowatts and larger with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay 1 7 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL When specified in other sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance including pertinent safety requirements of the specified equipment or system Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the ins
55. 8 mA 1 7 4 5 AC Power Table Submit a table listing each controller and the circuit breaker number panel box number and physical location of each controller s source of AC power 1 7 5 Contractors Qualifications a The Contractor or subcontractor performing the work shall have completed at least three DDC systems installations of a similar design and have successfully operated a similar sequence of operation for at least three years 17 6 Training Course Documentation Training course documentation shall include a manual for each trainee plus two additional copies and two copies of audiovisual training aids if used Documentation shall include an agenda defined objectives for each lesson and detailed description of the subject matter of each lesson 1 7 7 Service Organizations Qualified service organization list that shall include the names and telephone numbers of organizations qualified to service the HVAC control systems 1 7 8 Contractor Certification Provide certification that the installation of the control system is complete and meets the technical requirements of this section 1 7 9 Controls and HVAC System Operators Manual Provide two copies of a Control and HVAC Systems Operators Manual Provide in a 3 ring binder with a minimum of the following 7 sections Use tabs to divide each section a Description of HVAC Systems Provide a description of the HVAC System components and control system Include sequence of opera
56. A 653 A 653M B 306 C 2072 05080050 Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless 1999el Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service 2001b Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service 2001a Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service 1991 Rev B Steel Sheet Zinc Coated Galvanized by the Hot Dip Process 2001a Steel Sheet Zinc Coated Galvanized by Hot Dip Process Lock Forming Quality 1999 Copper Drainage Tube DWV 2000 Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH FCCCHR HE USC 2002 List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS SP 58 67 SP 69 SP 70 Beard SP 80 SP 85 1993 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials Design and Manufacture 2002 Butterfly Valves 2003 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application 1998 Cast Iron Gate Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends 1997 Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends 1997 Bronze Gate Globe Angle and Check Valves 1994 Cast Iron Globe amp Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code SECTION 23 73 33 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp
57. ASTM D 1140 No 200 sieve 2 1 6 Topsoil Natural friable soil representative of productive well drained soils in the area free of subsoil stumps rocks larger than one inch diameter brush weeds toxic substances and other material detrimental to plant growth Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5 5 to 7 2 2 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600 Type 4 except as specified herein Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows a Class I Angular 0 25 to 1 5 inches graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral slag cinders crushed stone and crushed shells b Class II Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 5 inches including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines generally granular and noncohesive either wet or dry Soil Types GW GP SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 2 3 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic faced acid and alkali resistant polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines Provide tape on rolls
58. CERTIFICATIONS Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR USC University of Southern California attesting that the design size and make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable 1 3 1 Backflow Preventers Certificate The Contractor shall submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours or training in backflow preventer installations The certificate must be current 1 4 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 12451 Availability of Utility Services a The Contract clause related to utilities applies Reasonable amounts of water and electricity from the nearest outlet will be provided free of charge for pursuance of work within a facility under this contract If the nearest available outlet cannot be utilized by the Contractor because of improper voltage insufficient current improper pressure incompatible connectors etc it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide temporary utilities as required b Reasonable amounts of utilities for contractor trailers and storage buildings will be made available to the Contractor when available The Contractor shall be responsible for providing transformers electrical service poles and drops for electrical services and backflow preventer devices on connections t
59. Closeout Submittals Quality Control Plan QC PLAN Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award SECTION 01 45 10 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 153 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER Deliver the following to the Contracting Officer a Combined Contractor Production Report Contractor Quality Control Report 1 sheet Original and 1 copy by 10 00 AM the next work ing day after each day that work is performed b QC Specialist Reports and Test Results Originals and 1 copy by 10 00 AM the next working day after each day that work is per formed C Testing Plan and Log 1 copy at the end of each month d QC Meeting Minutes 1 copy within 2 calendar days of the meeting e Rework Items List 1 copy by the last working day of the month and f QC Certifications As required by the paragraph entitled QC Certifications 1 4 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section The QC program consists of a QC Organization a QC Plan attending a QC Plan meet ing attending a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conducting QC meetings performing three phases of control performing submittal review ensuring testing is performed and preparing QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials equipment workmanship fabrication construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this Contract T
60. DDC design For each type of output used on high level controllers provide at least one similar spare output point per controller a Analog Outputs Provide controllers with a minimum output resolution of 10 bits Output shall be 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 psig Each pneumatic output shall have feedback for monitoring of the actual pneumatic signal b Digital Outputs Provide contact closure with contacts rated at a minimum of 1 ampere at 24 volts 2220 PID Control Provide controllers with proportional integral and derivative control capability Terminal controllers are not required to have the derivative component sd Digital Controller Networking Capabilities The upper level digital controllers shall be capable of networking with other similar upper level controllers Upper level controllers shall also be capable of communicating to the Site Building Controller SECTION 23 09 54 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 Communications Ports a Controller to Controller LAN Communications Ports Controllers in the building DDC system shall be connected in a communications network Controllers shall have controller to controller communication ports to both peer controller upper level controllers and terminal controllers lower level controllers Network may consist of more than one level of local area network and each level may have multiple drops Communications network shall permit sharing inform
61. E i NEN En E on el SS 222 SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 4 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q 2 2 2 z CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 3 09 54 Controls and HVAC System Operators Manual DDC Manufacturer s Hardware and Software Manuals D 11 Closeout Submittals raining course documentation ervice organizations Contractor certification 02 Shop Drawings awings 03 Product Data Refrigeration System pare Parts Posted Instructions Verification of Dimensions anufacturer s Multi Year Compressor Warrant stem Performance Tests emonstrations 07 Certificates Refrigeration System ervice Organization 10 Operation and Maintenance a N x CIN 3 64 00 00 1 5 N Ir 0 Oo e e e e e o g Oo o z 42 0 Co 3 peration and Maintenance Manuals N LU LUU BRENNEN KEEN BN E HA
62. GPS and collect the following attributes SECTION 01 77 00 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Meter ID Date Acquired Year Type Installation Type Installed on a Service Line YES NO Building ID Facility Number If attached to Building X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing WU H Q Fh FF Water Tank LEJEUNE water tank point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes Tank ID Facility Number Date Acquired Year Disposition permanent abandoned in place Tank Use potable raw water Tank Status Elevated Ground Tank Width Tank Length Tank Diameter Ground Elevation Units of Measure Tank Volume Unit of measure in Gallons Top Elevation Overflow Elevation Pressure High Pressure Low Source Water Plant Facility Number X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing PAUP 0 n MU tt ta ES c 0HQ 0oBH8 Sc GG Water Valve LEJEUNE water valve point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Date Acquired Year b Disposition AIP In Use etc c Use Valve d Valve Statu
63. HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 C H Q Fh 1 m n p Manhole Yes No Total Number of Laterals Flow Rate Flow Units Building ID Facility Number on associated Building X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Water Distribution Collect GPS data survey grade CC Waste Lines LEJEUNE water line 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Date Acquired Year b Use of Line abandoned inactive pipe fire protection main line raw water line building facility service sprinkler head c Disposition Permanent AIP etc d Material e Size f Size Units g Pipe Length h Unit for Length Dimension i Taped Yes No j Source Treatment Plant Facility Number or Water Tank Facility Number k Contract Number 1 Drawing Type m Drawing Number n Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing DD Demolished Line LEJEUNE demolished water line I Existing attribute information will be copied into the demolished feature class Please add the following attribute data once updated a Date b Drawing Number c Drawing Type d Contract Number e Data Source Existing GIS Data Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing EE Water Meter LEJEUNE water meter point 1 Locate
64. If basket grip type cable pulling devices are used to pull cable in place cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating 1 6 Cable Lubricants Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables Lubricant shall not be deleterious to the cable sheath jacket or outer coverings 5577 Cable Pulling Tensions Tensions shall not exceed the maximum pulling tension recommended by the cable manufacturer 2128 600 Volt Cable Splicing and Terminating Provide splices and terminations to protect 600 volts insulated power and lighting cables from accidental contact deterioration of coverings and moisture Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set 221259 Medium Voltage Cable Terminations Provide terminating devices and materials to protect medium voltage cable terminations from accidental contact deterioration of coverings and moisture Make terminations by using materials and methods specified herein and as designated by the written instruction of the cable manufacturer and termination kit manufacturer Termination for high voltage cables shall be rated and be capable of withstanding test voltages in accordance with IEEE Std 48 Terminations of si
65. Levi Analog 1013 95 Return Fan Amps Input BAC LL1SLOAD Lower Levi Analog 1014 95 Supply Fan Amps Input BAC LL2 DA Lower Lev2 Analog 1016 95 Supply Air Temp Input BAC OCCMD Chilled water Binary 1017 95 System Enable Output BAC CHWSSP Chilled Water Analog 1018 95 Supply Setpoint Output 2 4 Workstation 2 4 1 Hardware a Provide laptop computer necessary software and direct connection cable to communicate with all digital controllers and smart thermostats when directly connected 2 5 Maintenance Personnel Interface Tools Provide a handheld terminal if required to communicate directly with the Terminal control Units TCU If the workstation laptop is not capable or is not set up to communicate with TCUs except through the DDC LAN a handheld terminal is required SECTION 23 09 54 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 2 2 6 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE 6 1 Field Installed Temperature Sensors and Transmitters 6 1 1 Thermistors Precision thermistors may be used in temperature sensing applications below 200 degrees F Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0 36 degree F or less between the range of 32 to 150 degrees F Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0 25 degree F cumulative Sensor element and leads shall be encapsulated Bead thermistors are not allowed A D conversion resolution error shall be kept to 0 1 degree F Total error for a thermistor circu
66. M mv N oja cC N A2 X x N NJN e i e e A Packaged Air Handling Units ake up Air Units umps ire dampers 11 Closeout Submittals Air filter inventor D 02 Shop Drawings Equipment Requirements 03 Product Data uipment Requirements Contractor Designed Bracing 02 Shop Drawings Layout and location drawings 03 Product Data round rods rounding and bonding connectors Grounding and bonding conductors D 06 Test Reports acceptance checks and tests Ground resistance tests 00 6 05 48 00 1 2 00 2 2 ie 6 06 00 o SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 7 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 6 08 00 4 4 6 12 19 10 4 D 06 Test Reports 4 6 6 5 6 6 20 00 Panelboads 10 SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 8 OF 11 PAGES 3 1 ie A dV N N
67. Photographs of existing installations are unacceptable and will be returned without approval 5 1 Manufacturer s Catalog Data Submittals for each manufactured item shall be current manufacturer s descriptive literature of cataloged products equipment drawings diagrams performance and characteristic curves and catalog cuts Handwritten and typed modifications and other notations not part of the manufacturer s preprinted data will result in the rejection of the submittal Should manufacturer s data require supplemental information for clarification the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified for certificates of compliance 25 22 Drawings Submit drawings a minimum of 14 by 20 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1 8 inch per foot Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings SECTION 26 00 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices 1 5 3 Instructions Where installation procedures or part of the installation procedures are req
68. Provide insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized load break connectors on parking stands g Protective caps IEEE Std 386 200 amperes 15 kV Class Provide insulated protective caps not shipping caps for insulating and SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 sealing out moisture from unused bushing well inserts and insulated standoff bushings 2 2 1 2 Low Voltage Low voltage compartment shall contain low voltage bushings with NEMA spade terminals accessories metering stainless steel or laser etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate and ground pad a Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device fill plug pressure relief device liquid level gage pressure vacuum gage and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator 2 222 Transformer a Oil insulated two winding 60 hertz 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient self cooled type b Transformer shall be rated 750 kVA 95 kV BIL c Transformer voltage ratings 12 470 V 480Y 277 V d Tap changer shall be externally operated manual type for changing tap setting when the transformer is de energized Provide four 2 5 percent full capacity taps two above and two below rated primary voltage Tap changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use e Minimum tested impedance shall not be less than 5 0 percent at 85 degrees C f Audible sound levels shall
69. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise 2 GROUNDING NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 except that grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms 224 Grounding Electrodes Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 Underground Transmission and Distribution Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors 2 2 Pad Mounted Transformer Grounding Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance the provision of the SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 contract covering Changes shall apply 3 2 3 Connections Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 Underground Transmission and Distribution 3 2 4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 467 except as indicated or specified otherwise 34 3 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING Provide a 4 0 bare copper ground girdle around transformer Girdle shall be buried one foot deep and placed 3 feet laterally from the transformer enclosure Connect girdle to enclo
70. Provide sunshields to from direct sunlight 3 1 4 Damper Actuators Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream 125 Thermometers Provide thermometers at locations indicated Mount thermometers to allow reading when standing on the floor 3 1 6 Pressure Sensors 3 1 6 1 Differential Pressure a Duct Static Pressure Sensing Locate duct static pressure tip approximately two thirds of distance from supply fan to end of duct with the greatest pressure drop b Pumping Proof with Differential Pressure Switches Install high pressure side between pump discharge and check valve c Steam Pressure Sensing Install snubbers and isolation valves on steam pressure sensing applications 3 127 Pressure Gages Pneumatic output lines shall have pressure gages mounted near the digital controllers SECTION 23 09 54 Page 31 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 21 8 Pneumatic Tubing Run concealed tubing in finished areas and run exposed tubing in unfinished areas such as mechanical equipment rooms For tubing to be enclosed in concrete provide rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit Provide tubing parallel and perpendicular to building walls throughout Maximum spacing between tubing supports shall be 5 feet With the compressor turned off test each tubing system pneumatically at 1 5 times the working pressure with a maximum pressure drop of 1 psig Correct leaks Caulking of joints will not be permit
71. Provide under Section 26 20 00 Interior Wiring Systems Provide control wiring under Section 23 09 54 Direct Digital Control Systems lt 3 METAL DUCT SYSTEMS Provide shop fabricated zinc coated steel ducts conforming to ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 653 A 653M coating designation G60 Fabricate construct brace reinforce install support and seal ducts and accessories and test ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds and SMACNA Leakage Test Mni Cover duct transverse joints with single component synthetic rubber type compound suitable for use with passivated coating on zinc coated steel Lap joints in direction of flow Provide ducts straight and smooth on inside with neatly finished airtight joints Provide air supply and return openings in ducts with air diffusers registers or grilles 231 Flexible Duct Connectors Provide airtight flexible duct connectors at duct connections to each air conditioning unit air handling unit exhaust fan and ventilating fan Support connectors at each end with metal angle frame bands securely bolt in place Provide not less than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with neoprene 2342 Turning Vanes Provide fabricated tees and square elbows with turning vanes in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds for vanned elbows Turning vanes shall be single wall with trailing edges 2 343 Dampers Provide factory manufactured opposed blade adjustable manual dampers
72. Public Works GIS Specialist and functional area subject matter experts to review the data deliverables ona Windows 2000 compatible system 3 The data will be analyzed for discrepancies in subject content correct format in accordance with these specifications and compatibility with the existing IGIR system 4 The Contractor shall incorporate review comments to data and text prior to approval of the final submittal 12 255 General References 1 Copies of the SDSFIE may be obtained from the CADD GIS Technology Center s Internet homepage at http tsc wes army mil or by contacting Director U S Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station CADD GIS Technology Center Attn CEWES IM DA Smith 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180 6199 2 Copies of the ASPRS Accuracy Standards can be obtained on the Internet at http www asprs org or by contacting American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing 5410 Grosvenor Lane Suite 210 Bethesda MD 20814 2160 3 Copies of the FGDC metadata standard can be obtained on the SECTION 01 77 00 Page 24 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Internet at http www fgdc gov or by contacting FGDC Secretariat c o U S Geological Survey 590 National Center Reston Virginia 22092 703 648 5514 14235246 Ownership All digital working and final files to include raw GPS data files final hard copy products source data acquired for this project and related materials includ
73. Segment Paved Center Marks yes no Divided yes no Number of Lanes Installation Date Surface Type Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing F Curb line LEJEUNE curb line 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a b c d e g Date Built Curb Material Description Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing G Driveways LEJEUNE vehicle driveway area SECTION 01 77 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a Driveway ID Building that is associated with this feature b Paved or Unpaved c Surface Material d Installation Date e Lighting yes no f Drawing Number Drawing Type h Contract Number i Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing H Parking Lots LEJEUNE vehicle parking area GPS and collect the following attributes a Parking ID Building that is associated with this feature Paved or Unpaved Total Spaces Lighting yes no Installation Date Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing I Bridge LEJEUNE road bridge area 1 GPS and collect the following attributes
74. Specifications and Drawings for Construction paragraphs d e and f apply to all submittals 2 2 Types of Submittals All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph Submittal Descriptions SD Submittals also are grouped as follows a Shop drawings As used in this section drawings schedules diagrams and other data prepared specifically for this contract by contractor or through contractor by way of subcontractor manufacturer supplier distributor or other lower tier contractor to illustrate portion of work b Product data Preprinted material such as illustrations standard SECTION 01 33 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 schedules performance charts instructions brochures diagrams manufacturer s descriptive literature catalog data and other data to illustrate portion of work but not prepared exclusively for this contract c Samples Physical examples of products materials equipment assemblies or workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work illustrating portion of work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both d Administrative submittals Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract documents 1 23 Submittal Descriptions SD SD 01 Precon
75. Type I polyurethane or polyisocyanate board insulation minimum density of 1 7 pcf and weatherproofing as specified in manufacturer s instruction SECTION 23 07 00 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 2 4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5 outside locations provide insulation 1 2 inch thicker than specified Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth exterior surface PART 3 EXECUTION 3 5 1 APPLICATION GENERAL Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists studs columns ducts hangers etc The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period any insulation found to pull apart after one hour shall be replaced d Installation Except as otherwise specified material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer s written instructions Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of this specification are completed Material such as rust scale dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation Insulation shall be kept clean and dry Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to u
76. a pre outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock out tag out procedures for worker protection No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist 343 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards The program shall include company policy identify responsibilities education and training requirements fall hazard identification prevention and control measures inspection storage care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and escape procedures SECTION 01 35 29 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 ed Training The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training Training requirements shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 section 21 A 16 322 Fall Protection Equipment The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and or AHA at all times when an employee is on a surface 1 8 m 6 feet or more above lower levels Fall pr
77. acceptance and QC s Signature blank until project is accepted for beneficial occupancy Tag shall show the following information EQUIPMENT PRODUCT WARRANTY TAG Type of Equipment Product Warranty Period From To Contract No Inspector s Signature Date Accepted Construction Contractor Name Address Telephone Warranty Contact Name Address Telephone STATION PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE 4 MECHANICAL TESTING AND BALANCING All contract requirements of Section 23 09 54 Direct Digital Control Systems shall be fully completed including all testing prior to contract completion date addition all contract requirements of Section 23 09 53 HVAC Testing Adjusting Balancing shall be fully completed including testing and inspection prior to contract completion date The time required to complete all work and testing as prescribed by Section 23 09 54 is included in the allotted calendar days for completion 29 CLEANUP Leave premises broom clean Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view remove temporary labels stains and foreign substances polish transparent and glossy surfaces vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces SECTION 01 77 00 Page 26 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition Clean filters of operating equipment Clean debris from roofs gutters downspouts and drain
78. adjusted repayment to the Government upon demand for overpayments made to the Contractor Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in Contract Clause FAC 5252 236 9310 Record Drawings NC State tax certified statement and report in accordance with FAR 52 229 2 labor payrolls in accordance with FAR 52 222 6 as built drawings in accordance with Section 01 45 10 Quality Control warranties and O amp M manuals and any other requirements in the contract PRODUCTS Not used SECTION 01 20 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 20 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 1 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 03 07 GENERAL Lel SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with the Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals List of contact personnel le2 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Procure and maintain during the entire period of performance under this contract the following minimum insurance coverage a b ey Comprehensive general liability 500 000 per occurrence Automobile liability 200 000 per person 500 000 per occurrence 20 000 per occurrence for property damage Workmen s compensation as required by Federal and State workers compensation and occupational disease laws Employer s liability coverage of 100 000 e
79. all coil connection grommets and Sleeves Coils shall be removable through side and or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit 1 Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header joint strength and inherent flexibility Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements SECTION 23 73 33 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2s Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0 0075 inch aluminum plate construction Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous Surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to Secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins Coil tubes shall 5 8 inch OD seamless copper 0 025 inch nominal tube wall thickness expanded into fins brazed at joints Soldered U bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of 025 inches 4 Coil connections shall be carbon steel NPT threaded connection Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on th
80. allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices B Status Reports As Work progresses prepare reports to describe completed procedures procedures in progress and scheduled procedures Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors 3 2227 FINAL REPORT A General Typewritten or computer printout in letter quality font on Standard bond paper in 3 ring binder tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems B Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer 1 Include a list of the instruments used for procedures along with proof of calibration C Final Report Contents In addition to the certified field report data include the following Pump curves Fan curves Manufacturers test data Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers Other information relative to equipment performance but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data HOT MU D General Report Data In addition to the form titles and entries include the following data in the final report as applicable Title page Name and address of testing adjusting and balancing Agent Project name Project location Architect s name and address Engineer s name and addr
81. and maintain the equipment and systems 12355 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation maintenance and repair of components 1 3 5 8 Testing and Performance Data Include completed prefunctional checklists functional performance test forms and monitoring reports Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms 1 3 5 9 Contractor Information Provide a list that includes the name address and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment or system For each item also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer s representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project Site Provide the name address and telephone number of the product equipment and system manufacturers 1 4 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O amp M DATA PACKAGES Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems a Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions SECTION 01 78 23 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 LS features modes and other operations including unoccupied operation seasonal changeover manual operation and alarms Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorit
82. any connections to panels or devices new and existing wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance grounds and or shorts Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test b Loop Resistance Tests Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test c Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test d Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer s O amp M manual e Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer s recommended calibrated test method Use of magnets is prohibited Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 f Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer
83. applied aluminum where required or seal welded PVC woe 312 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories a General Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant Insultion shall be marked showing the location of unions strainers check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation b Precut or Preformed Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity c Rigid Preformed Where precut preformed is unavailable rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used If nesting size insulation is used the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12 20 Mitered Insulation Elbow 2 4 Piping Exposed to Weather Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building After this procedure a laminated self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed vapor barrier weatherproffing jacket less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white
84. be designated as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators i e union a government agency or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators Proof of current qualifications shall be provided 722 Personnel Duties 2 7 2 1 Site Safety and Health Officer SSHO Superintendent a Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area operation inspected date of inspection identified hazards recommended corrective actions estimated and actual dates of corrections Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors daily report SECTION 01 35 29 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub contractors c Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site d Attend the pre construction conference pre work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting and periodic in progress meetings e Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs E Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety bulletin board g Ensure sub contractor compliance with safety and health requirements Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the superintendent a
85. be suitable for the temperature encountered Shell and tube type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the shell medium Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6 Legend RMF Rigid Mineral Fiber FMF Flexible Mineral Fiber CS Calcium Silicate PL Perlite SECTION 23 07 00 Page 24 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 CG Cellular Glass Flexible Elastomeric Cellular PF Phenolic Foam PC Polyisocyanurate Foam TABLE 6 Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment Inches and F Equipment handling steam Material Thickness or media to indicated pressure or temperature limit 15 psig RMF 2 0 inches or FMF 2 0 inches 250F CS PL 4 0 inches CG 3 0 inches PF 1 5 inches FC lt 200F 1 0 inches PC 1 0 inches gt 600 F Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the insulation to 120F Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to substantiate insulation and thickness selection 3 4 3 2 Insulation of Pumps Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a rigid housing that does not rest on the pump Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly The top cover shall have a joint forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover maki
86. comply with the following kVA DECIBELS MAX 750 57 g Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction Provide transformer top with an access handhole Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously displayed on its enclosure The transformer shall have an insulated low voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal and with removable ground strap 242423 Insulating Liquid a Mineral oil ASTM D 3487 Type II tested in accordance with ASTM D 117 Provide identification of transformer as non PCB and Type II mineral oil on the nameplate 2 2 3 1 Liquid Filled Transformer Nameplates Power transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57 12 00 and as modified or supplemented by this section SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 4 Corrosion Protection Bases and cabinets of transformers shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 167 Type 304 or 304L Base shall include any part of pad mounted transformer that is within 3 inches of concrete pad Paint bases cabinets and tanks Munsell 7GY3 29 1 5 green Paint coating system shall comply with NEMA C57 12 28 regardless of base cabinet and tank material The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D 1535
87. crane that was inspected shall always be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel r Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel 8 The Contractor shall certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices e g anti two block devices 3 5 3 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment a Equipment shall be operated by designated qualified operators Proof of qualifications shall be kept on the project site for review b Manufacture specifications or owner s manual for the equipment shall be on site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385 1 1 Such additional safety precautions or requirements shall be incorporated into the AHAs e Equipment and mechanized equipment shall be inspected in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations for safe operation by a competent person prior to being placed into use Daily checks or tests shall be conducted and documented equipment and mechanized equipment by designated competent persons 3 6 EXCAVATIONS The competent person for excavations performed as a result of contract work shall be on site when excavation work is being performed and shall inspect and document the excavations daily prior to entry by workers The competent pe
88. each Utility Line Feature data set a Demolished Lines are to be delivered in the appropriate feature data set b Abandoned In Place AIP utility lines will be located and updated in the current utility line feature data set and identified as AIP 6 GPS raw data will be submitted with each review Creation of Attribute data 1 The Contractor shall request a copy of Camp Lejeune s GIS data via the project manager Camp Lejeune s GIS data is continuously being updated and or changed therefore it is suggested that the GIS data be routinely requested 2 Each Feature class attribute data shall be developed in accordance with the most current layout used by MCB Camp SECTION 01 77 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Lejeune s IGIR data Any alteration shall be submitted for approval prior to collection of data to the I amp E s Public Works GIS Data Development Section building 1005 3 Specific attention shall be used with data type character length and attribute field name 4 The Contract shall review Camp Lejeune s current attributes for each feature class and populate the tables in accordance with existing scheme and collect attributed data as outlined in section G 5 Use of construction as built drawings to obtain attribute data associated with features located in field is acceptable however changes in spatial and non spatial data in the field always supersede planned drawings 6 In section G refe
89. electronic or thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer charging ports compressor service valves for field serviceable compressors and superheat adjustment 254 Controls Package Chiller shall be provided with a complete factory mounted prewired electric or microprocessor based control system Controls package shall contain as a minimum a digital display or acceptable gauges an on auto off Switch motor starters disconnect switches power wiring and control wiring Controls package shall provide operating controls monitoring capabilities programmable setpoints safety controls and EMCS interfaces as defined below 25 4 l Operating Controls Chiller shall be provided with the following adjustable operating controls as a minimum a Leaving chilled water temperature control b Adjustable timer or automated controls to prevent a compressor from short cycling SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Automatic lead lag controls adjustable for multi compressor units d Load limiting e System capacity control to adjust the unit capacity in accordance with the system load and the programmable setpoints Controls Shall automatically re cycle the chiller on power interruption f Startup and head pressure controls to allow system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 45 degrees F g Fan sequencing for air cooled condenser 2 5 4 2 Monitoring Capabilities Dur
90. entitled Copper Tubing for piping sizes one inch and smaller Provide ASTM B 306 copper tubing and ASME B16 23 solder joint fittings for piping sizes larger than one inch In lieu of copper tubing 1 25 inch Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pipe fittings and solvent cement may be provided 4 3 Buried Preinsulated Water Piping Provide buried preinsulated water piping in conduit complete and ready for operation Install in accordance with fabricator s published literature Provide steel piping for carrier piping Minimum depth of cover shall be 2 feet a Factory applied insulation Provide polyurethane or polyisocyanate insulation rated for not less than 250 degrees F service completely filling the space between carrier pipe and conduit b Factory applied conduit Provide each section of carrier pipe with insulation and conduit complete with waterproof conduit caps at both ends Mark each section of conduit with fabricator s name product identification and publications to which the items conform Provide same type of insulation and conduit material over field insulated joints and fittings provide waterproof shrink sleeves over field insulated joints to overlap not less than 6 inches of each conduit section C Bedding Accurately grade trench bedding with minimum of 6 inches of sand Backfill sand to minimum of 6 inches above and below conduit Lay bedding to firmly support conduit along entire length SECTION
91. f Units Line Diameter h Diameter in Units Installation Date 05080050 Expansion j X Coordinates Y Coordinates 1 Contract Number m Drawing Type n Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing M Valves LEJEUNE heat cool valve point 1 Locate a Data Acquired b Valve Type c Valve Group Class d Size e Size Units f Elevation g Elevation Units h Project ID i X Coordinates j Y Coordinates k Contract Number 1 Drawing Type m Drawing Number n Date Source Survey Grade GPS Field Sub Meter GPS AutoCAD Drawing N Manholes 1 Locate a Sub Type ID Steam Pit Valve Pit b Number of Valves c Number of Pipes d Width e Length f Diameter g Units for Measurements h Rim Elevations i Ground Elevation j Contract Number k Drawing Type 1 Drawing Number m X Coordinates n Y Coordinates Data Source Survey Grade GPS SECTION 01 77 00 Page 14 GPS and collect the following attributes Located in Georeferenced Drawing LEJEUNE heat cool junction point GPS and collect the following attributes Cooling Pit Sub Meter GPS HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing O Steam Line LEJEUNE heat cool line 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a b aa 3 SOHO 2
92. f P TP f Environmental Pian Review 163 f Ll f Annual Report of Products pio c r zp Containing Recovered Materials f f P TP f ozs4o0 sD 02 Shop Drawings 1 l ST S Firestopping Materiais 1 Ll f 8 l l L L Ll L 1 Firestopping materiais T Ll fT Installer Qualifications fs T T Ll f 1 umgedon a 11111 Ll L 23070 5 3 S Ll fS dt General Materials ft l L Ll L Adhesives l L Ll L seats 2 l l ll Ll L Ductinsulation l Ll L Ductinsuation sackets 232 f P TP f Pipe insulation Materials PESE Lr DNE pt a mu te pmo ques 8 L l Ll L SD o4sampes l l ll L l1 Ll L memensusdon Ae p p pn p e 230954 SD 02 Shop Drawings l ll Ll ListofSymbolsand 72 Ll L Abbreviations Used on Drawings f T l Ll f p stetUQPons quas p E E EE E e 4 SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 3 OF
93. for valves from 2 1 2 to 3 inches shall have flanged end connections Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that valve stems may be Type 316 stainless steel Water valves shall be sized for a 3 psi differential through the valve at rated flow except as indicated otherwise Select valve flow coefficient Cv for an actual pressure drop not less than 50 percent or greater than 125 percent of the design pressure drop at design flow b Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves 2S2 Valves for Hot Water Service Valves for hot water service below 250 Degrees F a Bodies for valves 1 1 2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze with threaded or union ends Bodies for valves larger than 2 inches shall have flanged end connections Water valves shall be sized for a 3 psi differential through the valve at rated flow except as indicated otherwise Select valve flow coefficient Cv for an actual pressure drop not less than 50 percent or greater than 125 percent of the design pressure drop at design flow b Internal trim including seats seat rings modulation plugs and springs of valves controlling water hotter than 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze d Non metallic parts of hot water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above
94. for lamps circuits meters fuses and switches The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing complete with back box hinged steel door with cylinder lock and surface mounting provisions 2 10 2 Control Modules Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm supervisory or trouble condition The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw type terminals with each terminal marked for identification Locate diodes and relays if any on screw terminals in the FACP Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage 2 10 3 Silencing Switches a Alarm Silencing Switch Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm b Supervisory Trouble Silencing Switch Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal but not extinguish the visual indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm supervision or trouble condition Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature
95. has been operated 2 10 4 Non Interfering Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal 2 10 5 Voice Notification System The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice Alarm Communications System requirements IEC 60849 IEC 60268 16 except as specified herein The system shall be a one way multi channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or Silenced Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floors but not in stairs or elevator cabs The visual strobes and audible message shall automatically be broadcast throughout the SECTION 28 31 76 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 building A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non volatile
96. hole are completely grouted smooth 2 5 6 2 Sleeves not in Masonry and Concrete Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves 2 5 7 Flexible Pipe Connectors Provide flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single braid where indicated Connectors shall be suitable for the intended service 2 5 8 Expansion Tanks Construct of steel for minimum working pressure of 125 psig Tank shall have polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the water SECTION 23 73 33 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 5 9 Air Separators Provide tangential inlet and outlet connections blowdown connections and internal perforated stainless steel air collector tube to direct released air to automatic air vent Construct of steel for minimum working pressure of 125 psig 5 10 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors walls and ceilings in exposed spaces Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished Spaces Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces 6 HEAT TAPE FOR FREEZE PROTECTION OF PIPING AND CHILLED WATER PUMPS LOCATED OUTSIDE Provide parallel conduction type that is composed of two copper conductors Separated by conductive material and all encased in an insulating jacket The heat tape shall be self regulating that decrea
97. hot rolled steel ground and polished keyed to shaft and protectively coated with lubricating oil Hollow shafts are not acceptable C V Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves dynamically balanced bored to fit shafts and keyed Variable and adjustable pitch SECTION 23 73 33 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with sheaves set at mid position and rated based on motor horsepower Contractor to furnish fixed sheaves at final RPM as determined by balancing contractor Minimum of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above Standard drive service factor minimum shall be 1 1 S F for 1 4 HP 7 5 HP 1 3 S F for 10 HP and larger calculated based on fan brake horsepower 2 1 1 4 ELECTRICAL A Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed Open Drip Proof premium efficiency meets or exceeds EPAct requirements 1750 RPM single speed 208V 60HZ 3P Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule B Wiring Termination Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities sizes and materials indicated Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70 Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90 1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance D Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle
98. installed system such as initiating devices and circuits notification appliances and circuits signaling line devices and circuits control devices equipment batteries transmitting and receiving equipment power sources supply annunciators special hazard equipment emergency communication equipment interface equipment and transient surge suppressors Test procedures shall include sequence of testing time estimate for each test and sample test data forms The test data forms shall be in a check off format pass fail with space to add applicable test data and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the SECTION 28 31 76 Page 25 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 acceptance testing The test data forms shall record the test results and shall 3 6 1 Identify the NFPA Class and Style of all Initiating Device Circuits IDC Notification Appliance Circuits NAC Voice Notification System and Signaling Line Circuits SLC 2 Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component and describe how this test shall be performed 3 Identify each component and circuit as to type location within the facility and unique identity within the installed system Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location test location and alphanumeric identity 4 Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test including equipme
99. item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard 25532 Mass Notification System The equipment furnished shall be compatible and be UL listed FM approved or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard 4543 3 Testing Services or Laboratories Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir UL Elec Const Dir or FM P7825a 5 4 Standard Products Provide materials equipment and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as UL or FM and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this Specification Select material from one manufacturer where possible and not a combination of manufacturers for any particular classification of materials Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening 5 5 Modification of References a In NFPA publications referred to herein consider advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears interpret reference to aut
100. jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above shall be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP 69 Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP 69 An insulation insert of cellular glass calcium silicate or perlite above 80 degrees F or the necessary strength polyisocyanurate shall be installed above each shield The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180 degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end SECTION 23 07 00 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required per the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation as an option to installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert d Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP 69 covering the
101. lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations Where conduit crosses building expansion joints provide suitable watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means For conduits greater than 2 1 2 in inside diameter provide supports to resist forces of 0 5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1 5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction 3 1 4 2 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings Make field made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit bending machine Do not install crushed or deformed conduits Avoid trapped conduits Prevent plaster dirt or trash from lodging in conduits boxes fittings and equipment during construction Free clogged conduits of obstructions 3 1 4 3 Pull Wire Install pull wires in empty conduits Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200 1b tensile strength Leave minimum 36 in of slack at each end of pull wire SECTION 26 20 00 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 1 4 4 Locknuts and Bushings Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulated bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box otherwise use at least minimum single locknut and bushing Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into w
102. listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted This includes but is not limited to the following a Domestic cold b Make up water e Chilled water f Dual temperature water i e HVAC hot chilled water g Air conditioner condensate drains 3 2 2 1 Insulation Material and Thickness Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2 322922 Jacket for Mineral Fiber Cellular Glass and Insulated Pipe Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than 3 ply laminated self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed vapor barrier weatherproofing jacket less than 0 0000 permeability standard grade sliver white black and embossed Insulation inside the building to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier weatherproofing self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed product less than 0 0000 permeability standard grade Embossed Silver White amp Black shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier weatherproofing self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed product less than 0 0000 permeability standard grade embossed silver White amp Black shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather except sealing of the laps of the aluminum
103. must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor SECTION 01 35 29 Page 23 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method When working in energized substations only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70 high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes as a minimum electrical hard hat safety shoes insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves fire retarding shirts coveralls face shields and safety glasses In addition provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required Insulating blankets hearing protection and switching suits may be required depending on the specific job and as delineated in the
104. of recommended maintenance procedures and materials 13 3 1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques Include step by step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement SECTION 01 78 23 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1323 2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point to point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory field interfaces Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work On diagrams number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type identically to actual installation configuration and numbering 1 3 3 3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards 1 3 3 4 Removal and Replacement Instructions Include step by step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal replacement disassembly and assembly of components assemblies subassemblies accessories and attachments Provide tolerances dimensions settings and adjustments required Instructions shall inc
105. past 5 years Competent person training as needed Level 4 A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance Level 5 An Associate Safety Professional ASP Certified Safety Trained Supervisor STS and or Construction Health amp Safety Technician CHST A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at SECTION 01 35 29 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal
106. per mil at 60 Hz tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi and aging shall be minimum 1000 hours in an Atlas Weatherometer 2 1 1535 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial NEMA TC 2 EPC 40 PVC as indicated 2 14 2 Fittings 2 1 2 1 Metal Fittings UL 514B threaded type 2 1 2 2 PVC Conduit Fittings NEMA TC 3 UL 651 2 1 2 3 Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit shall be cast metal cadmium or zinc coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and shall conform to UL 514A 2 1 3 Conductors Rated 600 Volts and Less Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used 600 Volt Wires and Cables Conductors in conduit other than service entrance shall conform to UL 83 Type THWN Conductor size and number of conductors in each cable shall be as indicated Conductors shall be color coded Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made Conductor identification shall be by color coded insulated conductors plastic coated self sticking printed markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shri
107. phase actions in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Perform the following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work a Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections b Review the Contract drawings c Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and equipment have been submitted and approved Verify receipt of approved factory test results when required d Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made SECTION 01 45 10 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 ale to provide the required QC testing e Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed f Examine the required materials equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data g Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and that required Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS are submitted and h Discuss construction methods 9 3 Initial Phase Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each initial phase When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work conduct the initial phase with the QC Specialists the super intendent and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work Observe the initial segment of the definable feature o
108. protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance Level 6 A Certified Safety Professional CSP and or Certified Industrial Hygienist CIH A minimum of 10 years safety work of a progressive nature with at least 5 years of experience on similar projects 30 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the past 5 years with training for competent person status for at least the following areas of competency Excavation Scaffolding Fall protection Hazardous energy Confined space Health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents Personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance l47414 2 Certified Safety Professional CSP and or Certified Industrial hygienist CIH Provide a Certified Safety Professional CSP and or Certified Industrial Hygienist CIH at the work site to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The CSP and or CIH shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385 1 1 The CSP and or CIH shall have no other duties than safety and occupational health management inspections and or industrial hygiene 7 13 Associate Safety professional ASP Certified Safety Trained Supervisor STS and or Construc
109. reports indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at each location type shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers End of Section SECTION 07 84 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 03 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL s al REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B 117 2003 Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 2002 National Electrical Safety Code NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA MG 1 2006 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 10 1994 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel Cage Polyphase Induction Motors NEMA MG 11 1977 R 1992 Energy Management Guide of Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code 42 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to all sections of Division 15 Mechanical of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual section 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE sad Material and Equipment Qualifications Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regular
110. rooms electrical equipment rooms hospitals power plants missile magazines and other such areas 22 Do not use in hazardous classified areas 3 Do not use in fire pump rooms 4 Do not use in penetrating fire rated walls or partitions or fire rated floors 5 Do not use above grade except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise 3 1 3 3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit Use only as specified in paragraph entitled Flexible Connections 3 1 3 4 Service Entrance Conduit Underground PVC Type EPC 40 galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC Underground portion shall be encased in minimum of 3 in of concrete and shall be installed minimum 18 in below slab or grade 321325 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance Pvc Type EPC 40 Convert nonmetallic conduit other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 to plastic coated rigid or IMC steel conduit before rising above grade SECTION 26 20 00 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 312326 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts Rigid metal conduit or IMC only 3 1 4 Conduit Installation Unless indicated otherwise conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls ceilings and floors Keep conduit minimum 6 in away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members where located ab
111. s O amp M manual 4 Test both primary power and secondary power Verify by test the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified h Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified i Visually inspect wiring SECTION 28 31 76 Page 27 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 Test the battery charger and batteries k Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer l Verify that red line drawings are accurate m Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits n Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive o Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke The use of canned smoke is prohibited p Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance based on wire length on each notification appliance circuit Audibility Intelligibility testing of the Voice Evacuation Notification System shall be accomplished iaw NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems IEC 60268 16 and ANSI 53 2 r Opening the circuit at not less than all alarm initiating devices and notification appliances to test the wiring supervisory feature s The contractor shall demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as s
112. session Upon completion of this course students should be fully proficient in the operation of each system function End of Section SECTION 23 09 54 Page 36 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 LIQUID CHILLERS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL ds 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE ARI ARI 495 2005 Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers ARI 550 590 2003 Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle ARI 700 2004 Specifications for Fluorocarbon Refrigerants AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION ABMA ABMA 11 1990 R 1999 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings ABMA 9 1990 R 2000 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE ASHRAE 15 2004 Errata 2006 Addenda B 2006 Supp to Addenda B 2006 Safety Code for Refrigeration ASHRAE 34 2004 Addendas a b c e f k n 0 p q r s u 2006 Supp to Addendas 2006 Addendas g h 2006 Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY AWS AWS 249 1 2005 Safety in Welding Cutting and Allied Processes ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME BPVC SEC IX 2004 2005 Addenda 200
113. shall be white with colored not green Stripe Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows a 208 120 volt three phase 1 Phase A black 2 Phase B red 3 Phase C blue b 480 277 volt three phase 1 Phase A brown 2 Phase B orange 3 Phase C yellow 553 Insulation Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 power and lighting wires shall be 600 volt Type THWN THHN conforming to UL 83 except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83 remote control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF conforming to UL 83 Where lighting fixtures require 90 degree Centigrade C conductors provide only conductors with 90 degree C insulation or better 2544 Bonding Conductors ASTM B 1 solid bare copper wire for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller diameter ASTM B 8 Class B stranded bare copper wire for sizes No 6 AWG and larger diameter 6 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS UL 486A for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes Connectors for No 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A or UL 486C twist on splicing connector Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors 7 DEVICE PLATES Provide UL listed one piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed For metal outlet boxes plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc coated sheet steel or cast me
114. sign using exterior grade plywood preservative treated lumber and galvanized hardware Paint the sign with one coat primer paint followed by two coats of gloss exterior type enamel Lettering is to be shown on graphics and is to be white gloss exterior type enamel Lettering and details of construction shall be as indicated Maintain sign throughout the life of the project Upon completion of the project remove the sign from the site 2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNBOARD A project identification signboard shall be provided The signboard shall be provided at a conspicuous location on the job site where directed by the Contracting Officer Construct signboard in accordance with project identification signboard plates for regional LANTNAVFACENGCOM logo a The field of the sign shall consist of on 4 by 8 foot sheet of grade B B medium density overlaid exterior plywood b Lumber shall be B or Better Southern pine pressure preservative treated with penetachlorophenol Nails shall be aluminum or galvanized steel C The entire signboard and supports shall be given one coat of exterior alkyd primer and two coats of exterior alkyd enamel paint The lettering and sign work shall be performed by a Skilled sign painter using paint known in the trade as bulletin colors The colors lettering sizes and lettering styles shall be as indicated d The high gloss acrylic gold enamel paint used as background for the Department of the Navy Atl
115. signed by all special inspectors who performed special inspections of construction or reviewed testing during that month regardless of whether they reported any deficiencies Each monthly report shall be signed by the Contractor End of Section SECTION 01 45 35 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL ld REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA 1997 Reduced Pressure Principle AWWA C511 Backflow Prevention Assembly FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH FCCCHR FCCCHR 01 1993 Manual of Cross Connection Control FCCCHR USC 2002 List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies U S FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION FHWA 1988 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices FHWA MUTCD l 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Traffic control plan SD 03 Product Data Backflow preventers sD 06 Test Reports Backflow Preventer Tests SD 07 Certificates Backflow Tester Certifications Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval SECTION 01 50 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 3 BACKFLOW TESTER
116. static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer s recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal unit discharge duct losses 3 Measure total system airflow Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow 4 Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow Use the terminal unit manufacturer s written instructions to make this adjustment When total airflow is correct balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant volume air systems 5 Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant volume air systems a If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow 6 Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow Adjust the fan and balance the return air ducts and inlets as described for constant volume air systems 7 Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static pressure controller at the main supply air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit 8 Record the final fan performanc
117. submit the proposed environmental plan for further discussion review and approval 1 6 4 Preconstruction Survey Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site with the Contracting Officer and document existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site 1 7 Class I and II ODS Prohibition Class I ODS as defined and identified herein shall not be used in the performance of this contract nor be provided as part of the equipment This prohibition shall be considered to prevail over any other provision Specification drawing or referenced documents 5 8 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1 8 1 Licenses and Permits Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to FAR 52 236 7 Permits and Responsibilities Perform inspections of the work in progress and submit certifications to the applicable regulatory agency via the Contracting Officer that the work conforms to the contract and permit requirements The inspections and certifications shall be provided through the services of a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the work is being performed As a part of the quality control plan which is required to be submitted for approval by the quality control section provide a subitem containing the name P E registration number address and telephone number of the professional engineer s who will be performing the inspections and certifications for each permit listed above SECTION 01 57 19 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS H
118. systems have been inspected tested and approved forms removed and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade Where pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion the backfill material up to an elevation 1 foot above utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings or wrappings 4 4 Trench Backfilling Backfill as rapidly as construction testing and acceptance of work permits Place and compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 8 SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 inch lifts to top of trench and in 8 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas 3 5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade under pavements and slabs bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade 346 BURIED DETECTION WIRE Bury detection wire directly above non metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken from manhole to manhole The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe with a minimum of 3 feet of wire coiled remaining accessible in each manhole The wire shall remain insulated over it s entire len
119. the roof or floor deck above 4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages or containers showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from damage and SECTION 07 84 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 exposure to elements Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS The Contractor shall engage an experienced Installer who is a FM Research approved in accordance with FM AS 4991 or b Certified licensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary staff training and a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of manufacturer s products per specified requirements A manufacturer s willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer The Installer shall have been trained by a direct representative of the manufacturer not distributor or agent in the proper selection and installation procedures 6 COORDINATION The specified work shall be coordinated with other trades Firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes and ducts shall be applied prior to insulating unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Firestopping materials at building joints and construction ga
120. the specified test standards SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 Service Organization A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1 2 x 11 inch booklets listing step by step procedures required for system startup operation abnormal shutdown emergency shutdown and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course The booklets shall include the manufacturer s name model number and parts list The manuals shall include the manufacturer s name model number service manual and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1 2 x 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and a trouble shooting guide The manuals shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed 3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Exposed moving parts parts that produce high operating temper
121. the system design temperature whichever is higher e Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves 2272258 Valves for Steam Service Entire bodies for valves 1 1 2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze with threaded or union ends Bodies for valves from 2 to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass bronze or iron Bodies for valves 4 inches and larger shall be iron Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends Provide bodies for valves 2 1 2 inches and larger shall with flanged end connections Steam valves shall be sized for 15 psig inlet steam pressure with a maximum 13 psi differential through the valve at rated flow except as indicated otherwise 2 7 3 Actuator AS Electric Actuators Provide direct drive electric actuators for all control applications When operated at rated voltage each actuator shall be capable of delivering torque required for continuous uniform motion and shall have end switch to limit travel or shall withstand continuous stalling without damage Actuators shall function properly with range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage Provide gears of steel or copper alloy Fiber or reinforced SECTION 23 09 54 Page 25 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 nylon gears may be used for torque less than 16 inch pounds Provide hardened steel running shafts in sleeve bearing of copper alloy hardened steel nylon or ball bearing Provide two position actuators of the Single direction spring re
122. the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection 2 4 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON METALLIC PIPING Detection wire shall be insulated single strand solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION 3 1 1 Drainage and Dewatering Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction 3 1 1 1 Drainage So that construction operations progress successfully completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry Throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity When unsuitable soil support for construction features develop remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing Excavation shall be performed so that the site the area immediately surrounding the site and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained 3 1 1 2 Dewatering Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls boils
123. to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes for securing base to supporting surface c Pump suction diffuser Casing shall include an angle type body of cast iron Unit shall have internal straightening vanes strainer with minimum 0 25 inch openings and auxiliary disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed 30 days after start up SECTION 23 73 33 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 Provide warning tag for operator indicating scheduled date for removal Casing shall have connection sizes to match pump suction and pipe sizes and be provided with adjustable support foot or support foot boss to relieve piping strains at pump suction Blowdown port and plug shall be provided on unit casing Provide a magnetic insert to remove debris from system 2 ELECTRICAL 2a L Electrical Motors Controllers Contactors and Disconnects Furnish with respective pieces of equipment Motors controllers contactors and disconnects shall conform to Section 26 20 00 Interior Wiring Systems Provide electrical connections under Section 26 20 00 Interior Wiring Systems Provide controllers and contactors with maximum of 120 volt control circuits and auxiliary contacts for use with controls furnished When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated the cost of providing additional electrical service and related work shall be included under this section 2 2 Electrical Work
124. where indicated for duct heights of 12 inches and larger Provide factory manufactured single leaf dampers for duct heights less than 12 inches Provide damper shafts with 2 inch standoffs to clear 2 inches of duct insulation with bearings at both ends of the shafts Provide adjustment SECTION 23 73 33 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 quadrant with indicator and locking devices Provide galvanized steel dampers one gage heavier than duct in which dampers are installed 2 3 4 Diffusers Registers and Grilles Provide factory fabricated metal units with edges rolled or rounded where exposed to view and aluminum finish Provide each diffuser and register with factory fabricated group operated adjustable opposed blade air volume control dampers key or screwdriver operated from the face of unit without the use of a tool Provide each unit with rubber or plastic installation gaskets Diffusers in same room shall have same face design a Registers Provide double deflection supply registers arranged to control air direction throw and drop Exhaust and return air registers shall have single set of nondirectional face bars or vanes having the same appearance as supply registers Provide face bars or vanes spaced not more than 0 75 inch on center and not less than 0 62 inch depth 2 3 5 Access Doors Provide for access to volume dampers fire dampers plenum chambers and where indicated Provide each door with do
125. white The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be determined according to procedure B of ASTM E 96 E 96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E 96 E 96M The coating shall be a nonflammable fire resistant type All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647 2 1 10 Wire Soft annealed ASTM A 580 A 580M Type 302 304 or 316 stainless steel 16 or 18 gauge d Insulation Bands Insulation bands shall be 1 2 inch wide 26 gauge stainless steel 2 1 12 Sealants Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type the styrene butadiene rubber type or the butyl type of sealants Sealants shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0 02 perms and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 ees PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements 2 2 4 Aboveground Cold Pipeline 30 to 60 deg F Insulation for outdoor indoor exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows a Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Type II and Type III Supply the insulation with manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket vapor barrier b Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation ASTM C 534 Grade 1 Type I or II Type II shall have vapor retarder vapor barrier Skin on one or both sides of the insulation 22222 Abov
126. within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National Electrical Code requirements E Provide marine light in each section mounted and wired to a junction box with an on off switch and GFI receptacle mounted on the outside of the cabinet F All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on project schedule 2 1 1125 COOLING AND HEATING COILS A Certification Acceptable water cooling water heating steam and refrigerant coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer s certification and or the range of ARI s standard rating conditions will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410 Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified B Water cooling coil shall be provided Provide access to coil s for Service and cleaning Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5 beyond unit casing for ease of installation Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly If not factory packaged Contractor must supply
127. written warranties for equipment products that have extended warranties warranty periods exceeding the standard one year warranty furnished under SECTION O1 77 00 Page 25 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Ta the contract and prepare a complete listing of such equipment products The equipment products list shall state the specification section applicable to the equipment product duration of the warranty therefore start date of the warranty ending date of the warranty and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty The warranty period shall begin on the same date as project acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period Execute the full list and deliver to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance of the facility 2922 Equipment Warranty Tags and Guarantor s Local Representative Furnish with each warranty the name address and telephone number of the guarantor s representative nearest to the location where the equipment and appliances are installed The guarantor s representative upon request of the station representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty At the time of installation tag each item of warranted equipment with a durable oil and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer Attach tag with copper wire and spray with a clear Silicone waterproof coating Leave the date of
128. 0 2 2 2 2 normal temperatures are approximately equal to midpoint readings on the scale 10 2 Pressure Gages a Provide pressure gages for all pneumatic outputs Select gage range so normal pressures are approximately equal to the midpoint readings on the scale unless otherwise specified Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the range Gages shall conform to ANSI ASME B40 1 b Gages indicating pneumatic outputs shall have 2 inch diameter faces Scale shall be 0 to 30 psi with 1 psi graduations c Gages for low differential pressure measurements shall be 4 1 2 inch nominal size with two sets of pressure taps and shall have a diaphragm actuated pointer white dial with black figures and pointer zero adjustment Gage shall have ranges and graduations as shown Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of scale range zu PNEUMATIC POWER SUPPLY AND TUBING 11 1 Pneumatic Tubing edie 1 21 Polyethylene Tubing Provide flame resistant multiple polyethylene tubing in flame resistant protective sheath or unsheathed polyethylene tubing in rigid metal intermediate metal or electrical metallic tubing conduit for areas where tubing is exposed Single unsheathed flame resistant polyethylene tubing may be used where concealed in walls or above ceilings and within control panels Provide polyethylene tubing only for working pressures of 30 psig or less Number each tube in sheathing each two feet minimum Permanen
129. 0 00 10 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 warranty 26 22 Equipment Warranty Tags At the time of installation each item of manufacturer s multi year warranted equipment shall be tagged with a durable oil and water resistant tag suitable for interior and exterior locations resistant to solvents abrasion and fading due to sunlight The tag shall be attached with copper wire or a permanent pressure sensitive adhesive backing The tag shall be installed in an easily noticed location attached to the warranted equipment The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following in format and shall contain all of the listed information MANUFACTURER S MULTI YEAR WARRANTY EQUIPMENT TAG Equipment Product Covered Manufacturer Model No Serial No _ Warranty Period From to Contract No Warranty Contact Name Address Telephone STATION PERSONNEL SHALL PERFORM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products which are of a similar material design and workmanship The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The 2 years
130. 07 Certificates Firestopping Materials Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified requirements In lieu of certificates drawings showing UL classified materials as part of a tested assembly may be provided Drawings showing evidence of testing by an alternate nationally recognized independent laboratory may be substituted Installer Qualifications Documentation of training and experience Inspection Manufacturer s representative certification stating that firestopping work has been inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturer s recommendations and the specified requirements 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing tested and listed firestop systems combination of materials or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls partitions floors and ceiling floor assemblies including through penetrations and construction joints and gaps Through penetrations include the annular space around pipes tubes conduit wires cables and vents Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion contraction wind or seismic movement firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the joint Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and the floor slab and between the top of the fire rated walls and
131. 1 AC Control Wiring a Control wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and rated for 300 VAC service b Wiring for 120 V shall be 14 AWG minimum and rated for 600 V service 2 8 3 2 Analog Signal Wiring Analog signal wiring shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have 20 AWG drain wire Each wire shall have insulation rated to 300 V ac Cables shall have an overall aluminum polyester or tinned copper cable shield tape Install analog Signal wiring in conduit separate from AC power circuits 2 9 FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES Provide smoke detectors in return and supply air ducts on downstream side of filters in accordance with NFPA 90A except as otherwise indicated Provide UL listed or FM approved detectors for duct installation 2 9 1 Smoke Detectors Provide in systems having air handling capacity over 2 000 cfm in accordance with NFPA 90A Furnish detectors under Section 28 31 76 Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System and install under this section 2 10 INDICATORS 2510 1 Thermometers Provide bi metal thermometers in locations as indicated Bi metal thermometers shall have either 9 inch scales or 3 5 inch dials and shall have insertion immersion or averaging elements as indicated Provide thermowells for liquid sensing applications Select thermometer ranges so SECTION 23 09 54 Page 28 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 0508005
132. 245 CATEGORY Mixed Debris Painted Masonry and Concrete Unpainted Masonry and Concrete Nonrecyclable Cardboard Nonrecyclable Wood Pallets Treated Wood 05080050 CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS DISPOSAL BASE SANITARY LANDFILL EXAMPLE GENERAL INFORMATION FOR DEPOSIT IN THE LANDFILL The following materials may be placed in the landfill in a location designated by the landfill operator These items may be mixed together Sheetrock plaster glass broken Non asbestos insulation fiberglass and mineral wool shall be bagged Packing paper styrofoam and pasteboard boxes Non asbestos roofing materials such as shingles built up and single roofing Painted wood such as doors windows siding and trim Plastic fiberglass such as pipe electrical boxes cover plates etc Ceramic and vinyl flooring or tile ceiling tile Deliver concrete block brick mortar to the landfill separate from any other items and place in a location designated by the landfill operator Reinforcement wire and rebar shall be removed flush with exposed surfaces Deliver concrete block brick mortar to the landfill separate from any other items and place in a location designated by the landfill operator Reinforcement wire and rebar shall be removed flush with exposed surfaces Breakdown corrugated cardboard boxes and deliver to the Base Recycling Center located at Building 982 If base personnel rejects the cardboard take
133. 253 l1 f sid Flexible pipe connectors 257 l T J Bames ps3 Ll T S T Ll Diffusers registers and griles_ 234 l Ll Betihing J 1 L yas ll y as S S qeccp scia sd Pipeandfttins J J l T J f FlexibleRoundDucts 237 J TT T J 50 06 O T l l1 J Ll Packaged Air Handiing Units 2 114 T J 7 SDO Certificates l l L 7 135 J 7 qualifications l S CT T Lb bL 11 T SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 6 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q 2 2 2 z CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 373 33 D 08 Manufacturer s Instructions nstallation manual D 10 Operation and Maintenance or o m A
134. 26 05 48 00 10 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Automatic Transfer Switches Power Distribution Units PART 2 PRODUCTS 2v SWAY BRACING MATERIALS Sway bracing materials e g rods plates rope angles etc shall be as Specified PART 3 EXECUTION SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe End of Section SECTION 26 05 48 00 10 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING AND BONDING 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Tel REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANSI ANSI C2 1997 National Electrical Safety Code ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B 1 2001 Hard Drawn Copper Wire ASTM B 8 1999 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium Hard or Soft INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 837 1989 Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2003 Acceptance Testing Specifications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 83 1998 R 2001 Bul 2002 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables UL 467 1993 R 2001 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 1 2 SUBMITTALS Subm
135. 29 WARNING SIGNS Provide as specified in Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING UL 467 Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02 Underground Transmission and Distribution 5 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Shall be composed of fine aggregate coarse aggregate portland cement and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic workable mixture Fine aggregate shall be of hard dense durable clean and uncoated sand The coarse aggregate shall be reasonably well graded from 3 16 inch to 1 inch The fine and coarse aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of dirt vegetable matter soft fragments or other deleterious substances Water shall be fresh clean and free from salts alkali organic matter and other impurities Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength unless specified otherwise Slump shall not exceed 4 inches Retempering of concrete will not be permitted Exposed unformed concrete surfaces shall be given a smooth wood float finish Concrete shall be cured for a period of not less than 7 days and concrete made with high early strength portland cement shall be repaired by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective areas with cement mortar as directed by the Contracting Officer Air entrain concrete exposed to weather using an air entraining admixtur
136. 360 degree arc of the insulation An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium Silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe The insert shall cover the 360 degree arc of the pipe Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield When insulation inserts are required per the above and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation as an option instead of installing insulation inserts The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel wooden block or insulation insert The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe penetrating the pipe insulation These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service e Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket shall overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1 1 2 inches and shall be sealed as required for the pipe jacket The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insula
137. 4 3 6 Letter Provided By Contracting Officer Indicating Contract Letter provided by Contracting Officer indicating contract contract period and prime contractor Proof of employment on a valid Government contract e g a letter on company letterhead from the prime contractor including contract number and term 1 4 3 7 Photo ID Valid state or federal issued picture identification card Acceptable documents include state drivers license DMV issued photo identification or alien registration card 1 4 4 Denial of Access Installation access shall be denied if it is determined that an employee a Is on the National Terrorist Watch List b Is illegally present in the United States C Is subject to an outstanding warrant d Has knowingly submitted an employment questionnaire with false or fraudulent information e Has been issued a debarment order and is currently banned from military installations f Is a Registered Sexual Offender or has any Felony Conviction within the past two years 1 4 5 Appeal Process All appeals should be directed to the Base Inspector s Office for any individual that has been denied access to the Base 1 4 6 Display of Badges Contractors subcontractors shall prominently display their badges on their SECTION 01 30 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 person at all times Upon completion termination of this contract or an individual s employment the Contractor shall colle
138. 50 1 6 Warranties if applicable O amp M manuals if applicable Final payrolls FAR 52 222 6 A release for an assignment of claims if applicable Submit three originals Procedures for Submitting Payment Request The Contractor may submit only one invoice for payment each month as the work progresses The invoice shall be delivered to the ROICC Office Administrative Branch between five calendar days before and five calendar days after the contract award date Invoices received outside this schedule shall be returned to the Contractor unprocessed The Contractor will have to wait until the following month to submit their next invoice Invoices shall be delivered during normal work hours from 7 30 AM up to 4 00 PM EST Monday through Friday excluding holidays PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR Payments will be made on submission of a proper payment request invoice by the Contractor Obligation of Government Payments The obligation of the Government to make payments required under the provisions of this contract will at the discretion of the Contracting Officer be subject to the following PART 2 a Reasonable retention and or deductions due to defects in material or workmanship potential liquidated damages and or failure to comply with any other requirements of the contract Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or in connection with this contract and Unless otherwise
139. 6 Addenda Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 2004 2005 Addenda 2006 Addenda Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Pressure Vessels Division 1 Basic Coverage ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B 117 2003 Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus ASTM D 520 2000 R 2005 Zine Dust Pigment ASTM E 84 2007 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA MG 1 2006 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 2 2001 Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators 1 2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Drawings Drawings at least 5 weeks prior to beginning construction provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified SD 03 Product Data Refrigeration System Manufacturer s standard catalog data at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase or installation of a particular component highlighted to show material size options performance charts and curves etc in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements Data shall include manufacturer s recommended installation instructions and
140. AC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials 122 Seismic Isolation System Periodic special inspection during the fabrication and installation of isolator units 2123 Energy Dissipation System Periodic special inspection during the fabrication and installation of energy dissipation devices 2 TESTING The special inspector shall be responsible for verifying that the testing requirements are performed by an approved testing agency for compliance with the following where shown on the drawings a Seismically Isolated Structures Verify that the required system and component tests for seismically isolated structures have been done in accordance with FEMA 302 and comply with all acceptance provisions contained therin b Energy Dissipation Systems Verify that the required system and component tests for seismic energy dissipation systems have been done in accordance with FEMA 302 and comply with all acceptance provisions contained therein A REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES a On the first day of each month the Contractor shall furnish to the Government five copies of the combined progress reports of the special inspector s observations These progress reports shall list all special inspections of construction or reviews of testing performed during that month note all uncorrected deficiencies and describe the corrections made both to these deficiencies and to previously reported deficiencies Each monthly report shall be
141. Air Ducts Exhaust Air Ducts 2 0 2342 Insulation and Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct Insulation and vapor retarder vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment SECTION 23 07 00 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Supply ducts b Return air ducts c Exhaust Air Ducts Make up Air Ducts e Plenums g Coil headers and return bends h Coil casings n Ducts exposed to weather Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed minimum density 3 4 pcf and rigid type where exposed minimum density 3 pcf Insulation for both concealed or exposed round oval ducts shall be flexible type minimum density 3 4 pcf or a semi rigid board minimum density 3 pcf formed or fabricated to a tight fit edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white paint able factory applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1 16 inch Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory applied Type I or II vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers shall be continuous over the damper collar and retain
142. Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5098 Ph 215 697 2179 Fax 215 697 1462 Internet http www dodssp daps mil www daps dla mil Detail Series Documents U S FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY FEMA 500 C Street SW Washington D C 20472 Ph 1 800 621 FEMA Internet http www fema gov U S FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION FHWA Office of Highway Safety HHS 31 400 Seventh Street SW Washington DC 20590 0001 Ph 202 366 0411 Fax 202 366 2249 Internet http www fhwa dot gov Order from Superintendent of Documents U S Government Printing Office GPO 732 North Capitol Street NW Washington DC 20401 Ph 202 512 1800 Fax 202 512 2104 E mail contactcenter gpo gov Internet http www gpoaccess gov U S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION GSA General Services Administration 1800 F Street NW Washington DC 20405 Ph 202 501 1021 Internet www GSA gov Order from General Services Administration Federal Supply Service Bureau 1941 Jefferson Davis Highway Arlington VA 22202 Ph 703 605 5400 Internet http apps fss gsa gov pub fedspecs index cfm Commercial Item Description Documents U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 8601 Adelphi Road College Park MD 20740 6001 Ph 866 272 6272 Fax 301 837 0483 Internet http www archives gov SECTION 01 42 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050
143. Building The Contractor shall be working in and around an existing building which is occupied Do not enter the building without prior approval of the Contracting Officer The existing buildings and their contents shall be kept secure at all times Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as directed by the Contracting Officer Provide dust covers or protective enclosures to protect existing work that remains and Government material during the construction period Relocate movable furniture as required to perform the work protect the furniture and replace the furniture in their original locations upon completion of the work Leave attached equipment in place and protect it against damage 1 5 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions a Make utility cutovers and interruptions only after notifying in SECTION 01 14 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 writing and scheduling with the Contracting Officer as these buildings are housing and are occupied after normal business hours Allow 15 working days for Contracting Officer to verify and schedule outage with base personnel b Ensure that new utility lines are complete except for the connection before interrupting existing service ex Interruption to water sanitary sewer storm sewer telephone Service electric service air conditioning heating fire alarm and compressed air shall be considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entit
144. CAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE C62 41 1991 R 1995 Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC IEC 60268 16 2003 Sound System Equipment Part 16 Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index IEC 60849 1998 Sound Systems For Emergency Purposes NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 170 2005 Fire Safety Symbols NFPA 241 2004 Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operations NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code NFPA 72 2006 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 90A 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2005 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems SECTION 28 31 76 Page 1 HVAC UL 1 2 REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 2000 Rev thru Jun 2004 Standard for Safety for General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems 2006 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems 1998 Rev thru Apr 2006 Smoke Detectors for Duct Application 2003 Rev thru Mar 2006 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems Elec Const Dir 2006 Electrical Construction Equipment Directory Fire Prot Dir 2006 Fire Protection Equipment Directory RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this Section with the additions and modifications specified herein l 3 SUBMITTALS The fol
145. CONTRACT N40085 08 B 0050 NAVFAC SPECIFICATION NO 05 08 0050 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 AT THE MARINE CORPS BASE CAMP LEJEUNE NORTH CAROLINA DESIGN BY DAVIS amp FLOYD INC GREENWOOD SOUTH CAROLINA 29649 A E Contract N62470 04 D 2283 SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY DAVIS amp FLOYD INC GREENWOOD SOUTH CAROLINA 29649 Date 2 July 2008 SPECIFICATION APPROVED BY B R Marshburn P E Director Design Branch Public Works Division T L Ammons Commander CEC U S Navy for Commander Naval Facilities Engineering Command 05080050 DIVISION 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 11 12 14 20 30 32 33 35 42 45 45 50 57 58 77 78 00 00 00 00 00 16 00 29 00 10 35 00 19 00 00 23 DIVISION 07 84 00 DIVISION 23 23 23 23 23 23 03 05 07 09 64 73 00 93 00 54 00 33 DIVISION 26 26 26 26 26 26 00 05 06 08 12 20 00 48 00 00 19 00 DIVISION 28 31 76 DIVISION 31 11 00 31 23 00 07 23 00 26 00 10 28 31 00 PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK CUTTING AND PATCHING WORK RESTRICTIONS PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS QUALITY CONTROL SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR
146. Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 2 Makeup Water amp Flex Elast Cell r ASTM 534 X No Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 T 1 Yes A C condensate Drain Located Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No Inside Bldg Flex Elast Cell r ASTM C 534 I No TABLE 2 Piping Insulation Thickness inch and F Tube And Pipe Size Inches Service Material 1 qe lt 1 5 1 5 4 lt 8 gt or to 8 Chilled Water Cellular Glass E 2 2 24 5 3 Supply amp Return amp Dual Temperature Mineral Fiber 1 1 5 I 2 2 Piping 40 F Nominal Chilled Water Cellular Glass 1 5 divs 15 2 Supply amp Flex Elas Cell r a 1 N A N A Return amp Dual Temperature Mineral Fiber 1 eS Ls 2 2 Piping 40 F Nominal Heating Hot Water Mineral Fiber 15 1 5 2 2 2 Supply amp Return Calcium Silicate 25 225 3 3 3 Cellular Glass 2 2 5 3 3 3 SECTION 23 07 00 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 TABLE 2 Piping Insulation Thickness inch and F Tube And Pipe Size Inches Service Material 1 1 1 5 1 5 lt 4 4 lt 8 or to 8 Cold Domestic Cellular Glass 1 25 1 25 1 5 1 5 1 5 Water Piping Flex Elas Cell r 1 1 1 N A N A Makeup Water Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1 5 1 5 A C condensate Cellular Glass 1 5 155 1 5 1 5 Drain Located Flex Elas Cell r 1 1 1 N A N A Inside Bldg 3 2 2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F shall be insulated per Table 2 except those piping
147. Contract Number h Date Source Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Utilities Locate and Collect GPS data for each feature listed with survey grade accuracy Please note All utility lines that can be currently located in MCB Camp Lejeune GIS geodatabase that are to be demolished removed within the specifications of this contract will be used to update the demolished line feature data set for that class The existing spatial and non spatial data will be copied into the demolished feature class This information does not include Abandoned in Place AIP lines Abandoned lines shall remain the in the existing data feature class and be attributed AIP Electrical Distribution Please Note MCB Camp Lejeune s Complete Circuit ID list is available upon request A Demolished Electrical Lines LEJEUNE demolished cable line 1 Existing attribute information will be copied into the demolished feature class Please add the following attribute data once updated a Date b Drawing Number Drawing Contract Number e Data Source Existing GIS Data Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing B Electrical Lines LEJEUNE electrical cable line 1 Locate all Electrical Line data and collect the following attributes SECTION 01 77 00 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Subtype Identifier Primary OH Primary UG Secondary OH S
148. Contractor s AHA 3 7 2 Portable Extension Cords Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage All damaged extension cords shall be immediately removed from service Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70 348 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Section 06 1 of USACE EM 385 1 1 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910 146 Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used a Entry Procedures Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose including hot work until the qualified person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented See Section 06 1 05 of USACE EM 385 1 1 for entry procedures All hazards pertaining to the space shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA b Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level c Ensure the use of rescue and retrieval devices in confined spaces greater than 1 5 m 5 feet in depth Conform to Sections 06 1 09 06 1 10 and 06 1 11 of USACE EM 385 1 1 d Sewer wet wells require cont
149. Control panel shall have the capability to temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages Provide conductor integrity monitoring for strobe display temporary deactivation of fire alarm audible notification appliances and speaker wiring Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages strobes and displays and for delivering live voice messages Provide capacity for at least four pre recorded messages Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre recorded messages Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification and initiate synchronize strobes Provide a complete set of self diagnostics for controller and appliance network Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file SECTION 28 31 76 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 1041 Cabinet Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate Lettering on the nameplate shall say Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel and shall not be less than one inch high Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates
150. DOCUMENTS As Built Drawings will be submitted as specified in 1 2 1 along with GIS Deliverables which will be created and submitted within specification in section 1 2 2 Tee ied As Built Drawings PAC 5252 236 9310 Record Drawings In addition to the requirements of FAC 5252 236 9310 the Contractor shall survey the horizontal and vertical location of all new utilities and structures to within 0 1 feet relative to the station datum All utilities shall be surveyed at each fitting and every 100 LF of run length and at each change of direction All structures shall be surveyed at corners of buildings Locations and elevations shall be recorded on the Record Drawings Submit drawings with QC certification Submit drawings in AutoCAD format versions 2000 or 2002 1 2 2 GIS Deliverables Shall meet the following requirements 1224 21 Objective The primary objective of this section is to provide detailed specifications for GIS Geographic Information Systems and GPS Global Positioning System technologies that will be utilized in the creation of the geospatial data deliverables for all new Infrastructure and Utility data which is to be used to update Camp Lejeune s Integrated Geographic Information Repository IGIR database SECTION 01 77 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 2 2 2 Specific Tasks Requirements for GPS collection I Utilities Locate field verify and collect GPS coordinates for all new Utility data utiliz
151. ED FORM 01450 2 7 96 SECTION 01 45 10 PAGE 16 440 MLNOS Gaain 33 1531 HOM OL HdWaowayd ONY aiva O2A0uddy NOIL23S dadig3322v NOIL VOIJI23dS 401 V41NO2 NOILYJOT GNY 199 201 ONILSAL 10 PAGE 17 amp SECTION 01 45 gt 2 NOLLNOS34 338 ON 339 VNVMW 20 ON ON Jed NDIVL NOLLOV pue dads AN3WWGIDO33 iOVaLlNOO 4 3 LSIT SWALI NOW diwIS3ad rt tenet 30328J1u02 ON 31386J3u0 SECTION 014510 PAGE 18 End of Section HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC RESISTING SYSTEMS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ds 4 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only U S FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY FEMA FEMA 302 Feb 1998 NEHRP Recommended Provisions
152. EPROM microprocessor based input to the amplifiers The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry field wiring and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input Loss of operating power supervisory power or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification functions The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station with redundant controls of the notification system control panel activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits Audio output shall be selectable for line level 600 ohms 25 70 7 or 100 volt output The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes A hand held microphone shall be provided and upon activation shall take priority over any tone signal recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits Form
153. ERIALS Insulation material shall conform to Table 1 Insulation thickness shall SECTION 23 07 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 be as listed in Table 2 Insulation thickness as specified in Table 2 shall be 1 inch Insulation exterior shall be cleanable grease resistant non flaking and non peeling Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion soften or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements Materials shall be asbestos free and conform to the following 2 41 Adhesives 2 1 1 1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive Adhesive shall be a nonflammable fire resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C 916 Type I 2521 1 2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 195 2 1 1 3 Lagging Adhesive Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation especially around a cylindrical object This may include the insulation as well as the cloth material covering the insulation Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 Adhesive shall be MIL A 3316 Class 1 pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board for bonding cotton brattice cloth to
154. F Dampers shall be rated at not less than 2000 fpm air velocity All blade operating SECTION 23 09 54 Page 23 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 linkages shall be within the frame so that blade connecting devices within the same damper section will not be located directly in the air stream Damper axles shall be 0 5 inch minimum plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0 04 inch water gage at 1000 fpm in the wide open position Frames shall not be less than 2 inches in width Dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500 c Operating links external to dampers such as crankarms connecting rods and line shafting for transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers shall withstand a load equal to twice the maximum required damper operating force Rod lengths shall be adjustable Links shall be brass bronze zinc coated steel or stainless steel Moving parts in contact with one another shall be of different materials Working parts of joints and clevises shall be brass bronze or stainless steel Adjustments of crankarms shall control the open and closed position of dampers 7 2 Valves a Tegel Valve Assembly Valves shall have stainless steel stems Valve bodies shall be designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150 percent of the sys
155. Federal State and local regulations pertaining to the environment including but not limited to water air solid waste and noise pollution 6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 6 1 Contents of Environmental Protection Plan a Include any hazardous materials HM planned for use on the station shall be included in the station HM Tracking Program maintained by the Safety Department To assist this effort submit a list including quantities of HM to be brought to the station and copies of the corresponding material safety data sheets MSDS Submit this list to the Contracting Officer At project completion remove any hazardous material brought onto the station Account for the quantity of HM brought to the station the quantity used or expended during the job and the leftover quantity which 1 may have additional useful life as a HM and shall be removed by the Contractor or 2 may be a hazardous waste which shall then be removed as specified herein b The Environmental Protection Plan shall list and quantify any Hazardous Waste HW to be generated during the project C In accordance with station regulations store HW near the point of generation up to a total quantity of one quart of acute hazardous waste or 55 gallons of hazardous waste Move any volume exceeding these quantities to a HW permitted area within 3 days Prior to generation of HW contact Contracting Officer for labeling requirements for storage of hazardous waste
156. Firestop Contractors FM P7825a 2005 Approval Guide Fire Protection UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1479 2003 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops UL 2079 2004 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems UL 723 2003 Rev thru May 2005 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL Fire Resist Dir 2006 Fire Resistance Directory 2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings SECTION 07 84 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 Firestopping Materials Detail drawings including manufacturer s descriptive data typical details conforming to UL Fire Resist Dir or other details certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping assembly in lieu of fire test data or report For those firestop applications for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer a manufacturer s engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be submitted for review and approval prior to installation Submittal shall indicate the firestopping material to be provided for each type of application When more than a total of 5 penetrations and or construction joints are to receive firestopping provide drawings that indicate location F and T ratings and type of application SD
157. HILLER Unless necessary for delivery purposes units shall be assembled leak tested charged refrigerant and oil and adjusted at the factory In lieu of delivery constraints a chiller may be assembled leak tested charged refrigerant and oil and adjusted at the job site by a factory representative Unit components delivered separately shall be sealed and charged with a nitrogen holding charge Unit assembly shall be completed in strict accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Chiller shall operate within capacity range and speed recommended by the manufacturer Parts weighing 50 pounds or more which must be removed for inspection cleaning or repair such as motors gear boxes cylinder heads casing tops condenser and cooler heads shall have lifting eyes or lugs Chiller shall include all customary auxiliaries deemed necessary by the manufacturer for safe controlled automatic operation of the equipment Chiller shall be provided with a single point wiring connection for incoming power supply Chiller s condenser and liquid cooler shall be provided with standard water boxes with flanged connections 2 4 1 Scroll or Rotary Screw Type Chiller shall be constructed and rated in accordance with ARI 550 590 Chiller shall be conform to ASHRAE 15 Chiller shall have a minimum full load EER rating of 2 8 and a part load kW ton rating of 3 1 in accordance with ARI 550 590 As a minimum chiller shall include the following component
158. HP 245 05080050 NFPA 90A 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2005 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds 1995 Addenda Nov 1997 6th Printing 2001 HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible SMACNA Leakage Test 1 1985 6th Printing 1997 HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL Bld Mat Dir 1999 Building Materials Directory UL 181 1996 Rev Dec 1998 Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors UL 555 1999 Rev thru Jan 2002 Fire Dampers 1 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide new and modify existing heating ventilating and cooling HVAC Systems complete and ready for operation HVAC systems include equipment ducts and piping which is located within on under and adjacent to buildings 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 02 Shop Drawings Temperature control systems Automatic Flow Control Valves AFCV Equipment layout drawings for 1 Air Handling Units 2 Make up Air Units SD 03 Product Data Packaged Air Handling Units Make up Air Units Hot Water Converters T E Package Pumps including performance curves for each impeller size Fire dampers Expansion tanks SECTION 23 73 33 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Air separators Heat tape Pipe hangers and supports Flexible pipe
159. HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2143 1 Through Penetrations Firestopping materials for through penetrations as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall provide F and T fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 Fire resistance ratings shall be as follows a Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions F Rating Rating of wall or partition being penetrated Construction Joints Gaps Fire resistance ratings of construction joints as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and gaps such as those between floor slabs or roof decks and curtain walls shall be the same as the construction in which they occur Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested per ASTM E 119 ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E 1399 or Uh 2079 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 al PREPARATION Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt grease oil or loose materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system For cast in place firestop devices formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound and capable of supporting device Surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer 2 INSTALLATION Firestopping material shall
160. IC CS6 Cable shall be single conductor employing concentric Class B stranded copper conductors Cable shall have conductor and insulation shielding Insulation shielding shall be metal tape or wire type consisting of a concentric serving of tape or wires according to NEMA WC 8 Cable shall be rated 15 kV with insulation and jacket thickness of 220 and 80 mm mils respectively 42 7 Medium Voltage Cable Terminations IEEE Std 48 Class 1 Provide terminations including stress control terminator ground clamp connectors and lugs Terminator shall be the product of one manufacturer suitable for the type and materials of the cable terminated Furnish components in the form of a UL listed kit including complete instructions which shall be followed for assembly and installation Provide terminator as specified herein for terminating single conductor solid insulated nonmetallic jacketed type cables for Service voltage up to 35 KV indoor and outdoor Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the terminator 216 Indoor Terminations Terminations Within Equipment Enclosures P 1 3 Termination Separable Insulated Connector Type Provide as specified in Section 26 12 19 10 three Phase Pad Mounted Transformers 2127 Medium Voltage Cable Joints Medium voltage cables shall run in one continuous length without joints or splices from termination to termin
161. III D1 and ASME BPVC SEC IX SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 1 1 Refrigeration System 3cd 1 Equipment Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ASHRAE 15 Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment appurtenances and pipe as required including frames or supports for compressors condensers liquid coolers and similar items If mechanical vibration isolators are not provided vibration absorbing foundations shall be provided Each foundation shall include isolation units consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings together with intermediate isolation material Other floor mounted equipment shall be set on not less than a 6 inch concrete pad doweled in place 3 1 1 2 Field Refrigerant Charging a Initial Charge Upon completion of all the refrigerant pipe tests the vacuum on the system shall be broken by adding the required charge of dry refrigerant for which the system is designed in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations Contractor shall provide the complete charge of refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Upon satisfactory completion of the system performance tests any refrigerant that has been lost from the system shall be replaced After the system is fully operational service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened b Refrigerant Leakage If a refriger
162. INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B 1 2001 Hard Drawn Copper Wire ASTM B 8 1999 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium Hard or Soft NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA C80 1 1994 Rigid Steel Conduit Zinc Coated NEMA C80 3 1994 Electrical Metallic Tubing Zinc Coated EMT NEMA FU 1 2002 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses NEMA ICS 2 2000 Industrial Control and Systems Controllers Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts NEMA ICS 3 1993 R 2000 Industrial Control and System Factory Built Assemblies NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2001 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures NEMA KS 1 2001 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches 600 Volts Maximum NEMA TC 2 1998 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Tubing and Conduit NEMA TC 3 1999 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing NEMA WD 1 1999 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD 6 2002 Wiring Devices Dimensional SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Specifications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL IL 4 2000 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1660 2000 R 2002 Bul 2002 Liquid Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit UL 198E 1988 R 1988 Class R Fuses UL 20 2000 R 2002 Bul 2002 General Use Snap Switches UL 360 1996 R 2001 Bul 2002 Liquid Tight
163. ION 01 45 35 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a A list of all iems that require quality assurance Special Inspection and testing including the type frequency extent and duration of the special inspection for each item on this list b A list of all items that require quality assurance testing including the type and frequency of testing for each item on this list c The content distribution and frequency of special inspection reports d The content distribution and frequency of testing reports e The procedures controls and people used within the Contractor s organization to develop sign and distribute Special Inspection and Testing reports along with the position title and pertinent qualifications of all Contractor personnel involved 1 5 SPECIAL INSPECTION The Special Inspection for seismic resisting system components shall be done as specified Special Inspector personnel shall be in addition to the quality control inspections and inspectors required elsewhere in this section 1 5 1 Continuous Special Inspection Continuous special inspection is the full time observation of the work by the Special Inspector present in the work area whenever work is being performed Continuous special inspection shall be performed where Specified for items as shown on the drawings 1 5 2 Perodic Special Inspection Perodic special inspection is the intermittent observation of the work by a Special Inspec
164. ION 01 57 19 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS Contractor shall submit data annually By 1 December Page 1 of 3 for the following products used during the previous fiscal year 1 October 30 September as required by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as ammended by Resource Fiscal Year QUANTITY CRM TOTAL QUANTITY Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA Contract Number MATERIAL UNIT A Insulation 1 Loose fill Ft3 2 Blanket or batt Ft2 3 Board Ft2 4 Spray in place m3 5 Other B Cement and Concrete yd3 C Paper and Paper Products 1 Copy Paper Box 2 Printing Writing Paper Box 3 Corrugated and fiberboard boxes Box 4 Folding boxboard and cartons Box 5 Stationary office papers envelopes and computer paper sAmt 6 Toilet tissue paper towels fasial tissue paper napkins doilies and industrial wipes Amt 7 Brown papers and coarse papers Box 8 Other APPENDIX A SECTION 01 57 19 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Page 2 of 3 MATERIAL DEFINITION Blanket or Batt Insulation Board Insulation Spray in place Insulation Cement or Concrete Containing Recovered Materials Cement or Concrete Containing Fly Ash Printing amp Writing Paper Quantity used containing recovered materials Quantity
165. IS OBSOLETE PAGE 9 OF 11 PAGES IN ip gt c N N wl 00 N 92 NJN JN 2 N wo N NM 1 9 N N i mo HALLE LLL LU CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2 CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T T R L A A A N S R A C S S T M P A T V T R Il E MAILED T A C N TO T A G4 CONTR Y L R T GE DESCRIPTION A bey DATE DATE N P F D F ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER E ACTION REMARKS 8 31 76 Fire Alarm And Mass Notification 2 1 Smoke sensors 7 0 o di SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 10 OF 11 PAGES iB NJN N Nie T N o 2 NJN wo N 2 2 2 ie 1 UE up os hi use _ pee zm Ep lu o o S S S T
166. LDING HP210 AND CHILLER YARD PLANS DEMOLITION 60001576 M 4 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PLANS RENOVATION 60001577 M 5 THIRD FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS RENOVATION 60001578 M 6 MEHCANICAL ROOM FLOOR PLANS DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION 60001579 M 7 MECHANICAL BUILDING HP 210 AND CHILLER YARD PLANS RENOVATION 60001580 M 8 SCHEMATIC RISER DIAGRAMS AND ENLARGED SECTIONS 60001581 M 9 SCHEDULES AND DETAILS 60001582 M 10 DETAILS 60001583 M 11 CONTROLS SEQUENCE OF OPERATION AND ASBESTOS DEMOLITION NOTES 60001584 M 12 TE BUILDNG HEAT EXCHANGER PACKAGE BLDG HP 210 60001585 E 1 LEGEND amp GENERAL NOTES 60001586 E 2 BARRACKS ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 60001587 E 3 HP 210 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 60001588 E 4 ELECTRICAL RENOVATIONS FIRST amp SECOND FLOORS 60001589 E 5 ELECTRICAL RENOVATIONS THIRD FLOOR amp ROOF 60001590 E 6 BARRACKS RISER DIAGRAMS 60001591 E 7 HP 210 CHILLER PLANT RENOVATION 60001592 E 8 HP 210 NEW CHILLER AND PUMPS WIRING DETAIL 60001593 E 9 HP 210 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 60001594 E 10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER DETAILS HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL a La 1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 22 Project Description Existing air handling units will be demolished and replaced with new air handling units Make up air units will be added to each barracks building to recover energy in the exhaust air and use it to temper the incoming supply air The addition of the
167. LLE LLL LU SUBMITTAL FORM Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 5 OF 11 PAGES CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q 2 2 2 z T SCHEDULE DATES ACTION V T C T R E A S R A A cls S T M S P A T T R E MAILED N N TO FIA GH AR CONTR YL S R T E DESCRIPTION A pow A o DATE o DATE NIN OF D OF olo 1 ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT ACTION CONTR REVIEWERJREVIEWER ACTION REMARKS 237333 SD 02 Shop Drawings J 11111111111 Temperature control systems 131 l J 7 Automatic Flow Control Vaives 132 J 7 n cp O ge up 7 Equipmentliayoutarawings J L1 7 sposPodwtbeta l l1 1 1l Packaged Air Handiing Units 2 114 J 7 Make upAirUnits tte l S bL 7 Pums p34 S Li Ll LL LL rredmpes kaes l TJ J 1 ll Ll 2 __ 258 T TT T J 7 O Arsprtrs l J 7 Hettpe pe Ll 1l 1l 1L Ll j bPiehnanesandspprs
168. N 1 6 1 Requirements Provide for approval by the Contracting Officer a QC plan submitted ina 3 ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on site and off site work and includes the following a A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order E OC ORGANIZATION ELI NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS SECTION 01 45 10 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 III DUTIES RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF OC PERSONNEL IV OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS V APPOINTMENT LETTERS VI SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER VII TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION VIII TESTING PLAN AND LOG IX PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS X DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES XI LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES XII PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE THREE PHASES OF CONTROL XIII PERSONNEL MATRIX XIV PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION b A chart showing the QC organizational structure and its relationship to the production side of the organization c Names and qualifications in resume format for each person in the QC organization d Duties responsibilities and authorities of each person in the QC organization e A listing of outside organizations such as architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide f A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QC Manager and s
169. P 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 54 ANNUAL REPORT OF PRODUCTS CONTAINING RECOVERED MATERIALS The Contractor shall submit data annually by December 1 products used during the previous fiscal year October 1 September 30 as required by 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA Report forms is attached to end of this section as Appendix A PART 3 EXECUTION 321 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of work Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified Conform to the national and state permitting requirements of the Clean Water Act 342 2 Land Resources Except in areas to be cleared do not remove cut deface injure or destroy trees or shrubs without Contracting Officer s permission Do not fasten or attach ropes cables or guys to existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by Contracting Officer Where such use of attach ropes cables or guys is authorized the Contractor shall be responsible for any resultant damage 3 1 1 1 Protection of Trees Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured bruised defaced or otherwise damaged by construction operations Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas By approved excavatio
170. Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 c Application d Dates of use e Dates of calibration 3 18 ADDITIONAL TESTS A Within 90 days of completing testing adjusting and balancing perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions B Seasonal Periods If initial testing adjusting and balancing procedures were not performed during near peak summer and winter conditions perform additional inspections testing and adjusting during near peak summer and winter conditions End of Section SECTION 23 05 93 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 04 07 PART 1 GENERAL ds 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only At the discretion of the Government the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 167 1999 R 2004 Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip ASTM A 580 A 580M 2006 Stainless Steel Wire ASTM B 209 2004 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plat
171. Provide data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings As Built Drawings Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer six sets of detailed as built drawings Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCadd and DXF format of as built drawings and schematics The drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment both factory and field wired Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as built location of devices and equipment The drawings shall show the system as installed including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system At least one set of as built marked up drawings shall be provided at the time of or prior to the final acceptance test SD 03 Product Data Include UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided Technical Data And Computer Software Fire alarm control panel FACP Fire Alarm And Mass Notification Control Panel FACP FMCP Transmitters including housing Batteries Battery chargers Smoke sensors Wiring and cable Addressable interface devices Remote Fire Alarm Control Units Amplifiers Preamplifiers Tone Genera
172. QUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein 6 1 New Work Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment such as motors motor starters except starters controllers which are indicated as part of a motor control center control or push button stations float or pressure Switches solenoid valves integral disconnects and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted The interconnecting power wiring and conduit control wiring rated 120 volts nominal and conduit the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers and the electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 16 except internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated provide any required changes to the electrical Service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the Section specifying that motor or equipment 6 2 Modifications to Existing Systems Where existing mechanical systems and motor operated equipment require modifications provide electrical components under Division 16 2643 High Efficiency Motors
173. RATION INSTITUTE ART 4100 North Fairfax Drive Suite 200 Arlington VA 22203 Ph 703 524 8800 Fax 703 528 3816 E mail ari ari org Internet http www ari org AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL AMCA 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights IL 60004 1893 Ph 847 394 0150 Fax 847 253 0088 E mail amca amca org Internet http www amca org AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION ABMA 2025 M Street NW Suite 800 Washington DC 20036 Ph 202 367 1155 Fax 202 367 2155 E mail info abma smithbucklin com Internet http www abma dc org AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION AISC One East Wacker Drive Chicago IL 60601 1802 Ph 312 670 2400 Fax 312 670 5403 Publications 800 644 2400 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 E mail pubs aisc org Internet http www aisc org AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST 1819 L Street NW 6th Floor Washington DC 20036 Ph 202 293 8020 Fax 202 293 9287 E mail info ansi org Internet http www ansi org ANSI documents beginning with the letter S can be ordered from Acoustical Society of America ASA 2 Huntington Quadrangle Suite 1NO1 Melville NY 11747 4502 Ph 516 576 2360 Fax 516 576 2377 E mail asa aip org Internet http asa aip org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE 1791 Tullie Circle NE
174. RS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 d will perform and document the testing o Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion Inspection process Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection prefinal inspection and final acceptance inspection 6 2 Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers and surveying 46 3 Approval Approval of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary to ensure the specified quality of work The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify his her submitted qualifications 6 4 Notification of Changes Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any proposed change including changes in the QC organization personnel a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change Proposed changes must be approved by the Contracting Officer eh QC PLAN MEETING Prior to submission of the QC plan meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission 8 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL
175. S Reclosures Switch Vacuum Disconnect Other b Switch ID if applicable c Disposition d Installation Type Pad Mounted Pole Mounted Cubicle etc e Switch Status Open Closed f Voltage g Circuit ID RG1 RG2 AS1 ASL FC2 MAL etc h X Coordinates i Y Coordinates j Contract Number k Drawing Type 1 Drawing Number m Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing H Electrical Regulator LEJEUNE electrical regulator point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Electrical Regulator ID Facility Number b Disposition Regulator Type d Regulator Use e Primary Volts f Secondary Volts g Number of Taps h KV Rate i Fuse Type j Manufacture k Model Number 1 Circuit ID RG1 RG2 51 ASL FC2 MAL etc m X Coordinates n Y Coordinates o Contract Number p Drawing Type q Drawing Number r Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing I Electrical Manholes LEJEUNE electrical junction point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Subtype ID Manhole Junction Box etc b Manhole Number Number of Cables e Rim Elevation f Units of Elevation g Diameter h Diameter Units i X Coordinates j Y Coordinates SECTION 01 77 00 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245
176. S HAVE BEEN MET EQUIPMENT MATERIAL RECEIVED TODAY TO BE INCORPORATED IN JOE CONTRACTOR SUPERINTENDENT DATE SHEET OF COMBINED FORM 01450 1 17 96 SECTION 01 45 10 PAGE 13 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT DATE ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY PHASE suweworamcamn YES NO senon ceram rentur or WOR ano usr personna mr Fa HAVE BEEN REVIEWED THE SUBMITTALS HAVE a m BEEN APPROVED MATERIALS COMPLY WITH iaa APPROVED SUBMITTALS MATERIALS STORED co DONE CORRECTLY TESTING PLAN HAS BEEN EE REVIEWED El SCHEDULE DISCUSSED JOB SAFETY HAZARD PRELIMINARY WORK WAS Fold TESTING PERFORMED amp WHO DONE CORRECTLY PERFORMED TEST SAMPLE HAS BEEN WORKMANSHIP IS TEST RESULTS ARE ni ACCEPTABLE WORK I IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONTRACT WORK COMPIES WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS WORK COMPLIES WITH TESTING PERFORMED amp WHO CONTRACT AS APPROVED PERFORMED TEST INITIAL PHASE WORK COMPIES WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS REWORK ITEMS CORRECTED TODAY FROM REWORK ITEMS LIST PREPARATORY INITIAL REWORK ITEMS IDENTIFIED TODAY NOT CORRECTED BY CLOSE OF BUSINESS On behav of the contractor that this report is comoteted and Cotrect and aquipment and rnatariai used anc work performed during this reporting period isin comptiance with the contract drawings and scremea
177. SEISMIC RESISTING SYSTEMS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION FIRESTOPPING HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 10 10 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS LIQUID CHILLERS HEATING VENTILATING AND COOLING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING AND BONDING APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM EARTHWORK CLEARING AND GRUBBING EXCAVATION AND FILL PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 92 19 SEEDING DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION End of Project Table of Contents PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 LIST OF DRAWINGS Contract drawings are as follows NAVFAC SHEET DWG NO NO TITLE 60001570 CS 1 DRAWING INDEX LOCATION amp VICINITY MAPS 60001571 C 1 EXISTING SITE PLAN 60001572 C 2 SITE RENOVATIONS PLAN 60001573 M 1 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PLANS DEMOLITION 60001574 M 2 THIRD FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS DEMOLITION 60001575 M 3 MECHANICAL BUI
178. TION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 30 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Lz d 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Construction schedule Equipment delivery schedule 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Within 21 days after receipt of the Notice of Award prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a Critical Path Method CPM Network Schedule in accordance with the terms in Contract Clause FAR 52 236 15 Schedules for Construction Contracts except as modified in this contract Primavera Suretrak 3 0 will be utilized to produce and update all progress Schedules 3 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE Bal Initial Schedule Within 30 calendar days after approval of the proposed construction schedule submit for Contracting Officer approval a schedule showing procurement plans for materials plant and equipment Submit in the format and content as prescribed by the Contracting Officer and include as a minimum the following information a Description b Date of the purchase order c Promised shipping date d Name of the manufacturer or supplier e Date delivery is expected f Date the material or equipment is required according to the current construction schedule 4 NETWORK ANALYSIS SYSTEM NAS T
179. TION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 7 FABRICATION 7 1 Factory Coating Unless otherwise specified equipment and component items when fabricated from ferrous metal shall be factory finished with the manufacturer s standard finish except that items located outside of buildings shall have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution Immediately after completion of the test the specimen shall show no signs of blistering wrinkling cracking or loss of adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1 8 inch on either side of the scratch mark Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot dip galvanized sheet steel is used shall be coated with a zinc rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520 Type I 72 Factory Applied Insulation Chiller shall be provided with factory installed insulation on surfaces subject to sweating including the liquid cooler suction line piping economizer and cooling lines Insulation on heads of coolers may be field applied however it shall be installed to provide easy removal and replacement of heads without damage to the insulation Where motors are the gas cooled type factory installed insulation shall be provided on the cold gas inlet connection to the motor per manufacturer s standard practice Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to
180. TS Section 23 03 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods applies to this Section with the additions and modifications specified herein 123 DEFINITIONS l 3 1 Digital Controller A control module which is microprocessor based programmable by the user has integral input output within the module or on network connected modules and performs stand alone operations 1 3 2 Direct Digital Control DDC Digital controls as defined in this specification performing control logic The controller directly senses building environment and makes control decisions based on user defined controller resident programs The controller outputs control signals that directly operate valves dampers and motor controllers No conventional control devices pneumatic or electronic such as receiver controllers thermostats and logic units are present within or interface with a direct digital control loop Actuators are electric or pneumatic and the controller output is converted to the appropriate type of signal 1 3 3 DDC System A System made up of one or more digital controllers which communicate on a network SECTION 23 09 54 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 1 3 4 Distributed Control The intent of distributed control is to install the controllers near their respective controlled equipment The control system consists of stand alone controllers with the total number of input and output points limited to 48 or l
181. UALITY CONTROL 3 6 1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 performed in accordance with NETA ATS 34045 t a Pad Mounted Transformers Visual and mechanical inspection 1 6 Compare equipment nameplate information with specifications and approved shop drawings Inspect physical and mechanical condition Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey Verify correct liquid level in tanks Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer Verify correct equipment grounding Electrical tests 1 Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter if applicable Perform insulation resistance tests Perform turns ratio tests Perform insulation power factor dissipation factor tests on windings Sample insulating liquid Sample shall be tested for a Dielectric breakdown voltage b Acid neutralization number c Specific gravity d Interfacial tension e Color Visual con
182. UNDERSTANDING MEETING After submission of the QC Plan but prior to the start of construction meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss the QC program required by this Contract The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details including forms to be used for documentation administration for on site and off site work and the coordination of the Contractor s management production and QC personnel with the Contracting Officer As a minimum the Contractor s personnel required to attend shall include the project manager project superintendent and QC Manager Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QC Manager and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer 29 5 After the start of construction the QC Manager shall conduct weekly meetings at the work site with the project superintendent and QC specialists The QC Manager shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the Contracting Officer within 2 working days after the meeting The Contracting Officer may attend these meetings The QC Manager shall notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each meet ing As a minimum the following shall be accomplished at each meeting SECTION 01 45 10 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Iy a Review the minutes of the previous meeting b Review the schedule and the status of work Work or testing accomplishe
183. Wiring to be Removed Existing concealed wiring to be removed shall be disconnected from its Source Remove conductors cut conduit flush with floor underside of floor and through walls and seal openings 3 1 13 3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment shall include equipment s associated wiring including conductors cables exposed conduit surface metal raceways boxes and fittings back to equipment s power source as indicated 3 1 13 4 Continuation of Service Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain Existing circuits of equipment shall remain energized Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power restored back to original condition 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test SECTION 26 20 00 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 2 1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times demonstrating satisfactory operation each time 2 2 600 Volt Wiring Test Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies vo
184. YH X YH YS ct 0 HiQ Oo0 Subtype ID Condensate Steam Date Acquired Year Disposition Use Underground Overhead Abandoned Material Size Length Size Units Ground Elevation Invert Elevation Units for Elevation Taped Yes No Building ID If service line indicate Building Insulation Material Size of Insulation Size Units Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing P Demolished Steam Line LEJEUNE demolished heat cool line Existing attribute information will be copied into the demolished feature class Please add the following attribute data once updated Date Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Existing GIS Data Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing STORM SEWER Collect GPS data survey grade Q Storm Sewer Lines LEJEUNE storm_sewer_line 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Date Acquired Year Use Type Material Size Diameters Units Elevation Elevation Units Contract Number Drawing Type SECTION 01 77 00 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 k Drawing Number 1 Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing R Manhole LEJEUNE storm sewer junction point 1 Locate GPS and coll
185. a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 167 1999 R 2004 Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip ASTM C 260 2001 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM D 117 2002 Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin ASTM D 1535 1997 Specifying Color by the Munsell System ASTM D 3487 2000 Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE Std 386 1995 R 2001 Separable Insulated Connection IEEE C2 2002 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C57 12 00 2000 Liquid Immersed Distribution Power and Regulating Transformers IEEE IBEE 57 12 80 2002 Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers IEEE IEEE C57 12 90 1999 Test Code for Liquid Immersed Distribution Power and Regulating Transformers IEEE IEEE C57 98 1993 Correction 1998 Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests IEEE IEEE C62 11 1999 Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for AC SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Power Circuits gt 1 kV IEEE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA C37 47 2000 High Voltage Current Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches NEMA C57 12 22 1993 R 1998 Transformers Pad Mounted Compa
186. aces unless indicated otherwise and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor s operations 3212522 11 Provide 4 inches of existing soil to meet indicated finish grade After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade incorporate fertilizer pH adjusters and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking harrowing tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer Remove debris and stones larger than 3 4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic SECTION 32 92 19 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Fertilizer Application Rates Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following Organic Granular Fertilizer 8 pounds per 1000 square feet 342 SEEDING 3 2 1 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions Immediately before seeding restore soil to proper grade Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for Seeding If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions submit a written request to the Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and p
187. achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow E Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows 1 Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow 2 Adjust each station in turn beginning with the station with the highest percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow 3 Record settings and mark balancing devices F Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage voltage rpm pump heads and systems pressures and temperatures including outdoor air temperature G Measure the differential pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing 3 10 HEAT EXCHANGERS A Measure water flow through all circuits B Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances C Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures D Measure inlet steam pressure Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature control valves self contained control valves and pressure reducing valves E Record safety valve settings F Verify operation of steam traps MOTORS A Motors 1 2 HP and Larger Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data Manufacturer model and serial numbers Motor horsepower rating Motor rpm Efficiency rating if high efficiency motor Nameplate and measured voltage each phase Nameplate and measu
188. acted for clarification or additional information pertaining to the data on the form 2 The date of data collection 3 The building or structure identification number and the specific location of the equipment within the structure ex 3d deck mech room 4 A check adjacent to the description of the new or replacement item and a check adjacent to the supplemental description if applicable ex circulating pump and HVAC or steam 5 The Maximo number or serial number of the demolished or removed item if applicable 6 All applicable data from the equipment data plate Each Room Number List form shall contain the following information 1 The name and telephone number of the individual providing the information 2 The date the form was completed 3 The building or structure identification number 4 A check in the box adjacent to each applicable room number PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Sd PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied and shall SECTION 23 03 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 be specified herein and provided under each individual section 1 1 Factory Painting Systems Manufacturer s standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 h
189. acteristics of all equipment shall be conducted by a registered professional engineer or an approved manufacturer s start up representative experienced in system start up and testing at such times as directed Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each System and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with the drawings and specifications Corrections and adjustments shall be made as necessary and tests shall be re conducted to demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as specified Prior to acceptance service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened Any refrigerant lost during the system startup shall be replaced If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Government Any material equipment instruments and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor Field tests shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 4 2 Test Report The report shall document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the syst
190. age systems Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas Remove waste and surplus materials rubbish and construction facilities from the site PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 77 00 Page 27 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM E 1971 1998 R 2005 Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings 2 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit Operation and Maintenance O amp M Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment product or system stressing and enhancing the importance of system interactions troubleshooting and long term preventative maintenance and operation The subcontractors shall compile and prepare data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel The Contractor shall compile and prepare aggregate O amp M data including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as built conditions Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O amp M requirements at the system equipm
191. ail height Should the unit baserail not be factory supplied at this height the contractor is required to supply a concrete housekeeping pad to make up the difference 25185 1 52 FAN ASSEMBLIES A Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width double inlet class II belt drive type housed forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly as shown in schedule Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door If not supplied at the factory contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required Provide access to motor drive and bearings through hinged access door B Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2 deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry 2 1 1 3 BEARINGS SHAFTS AND DRIVES A Bearings Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA ANSI Standards The bearings shall be designed for service with an L 50 life of 200 000 hours and shall be a heavy duty pillow block self aligning grease lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type B Shafts shall be solid
192. alized controller programs ready for download to replacement controllers Provide any access keys which restrict programming language software functions or the ability to compile or prepare programming for download to controllers 1 7 11 DDC Manufacturer s Hardware Software Manuals Provide the following manuals a Installation and Technical Manuals for all digital controller hardware b Operator Manuals for all digital controllers c Programming Manuals for all digital controllers 1 7 12 Modification of References The advisory provision in ASME B31 1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory Substitute the word shall for should wherever it appears and interpret all SECTION 23 09 54 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 references to the authority having jurisdiction and owner to mean the Contracting Officer PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 DDC SYSTEM a Provide a DDC system as a distributed control system The system shall have stand alone digital controllers a communications Network and a separate workstation computer with workstation software b Provide an operator programmable system to perform closed loop modulating control of building equipment Connect all digital controllers through the communication network to share common data and report to workstation computers Provide workstation DDC software capable of programming and monitoring the digital controllers The control system shall be capable of download
193. all be as shown in Table 5 Legend RMF Rigid Mineral Fiber FMF Flexible Mineral Fiber CS Calcium Silicate PL Perlite CG Cellular Glass FC Flexible Elastomeric Cellular SECTION 23 07 00 Page 22 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PF Phenolic Foam PC Polyisocyanurate Foam TABLE 5 Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment Inches and F Equipment handling media Material Thickness at indicated temperature 35 to 60 CG 1 5 inches degrees F PF 1 5 inches FC 1 0 inches PC 1 0 inches 3 0 202 Pump Insulation a Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed Joints between sides and between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation The box shall conform to the requirements of MICA Insulation Stds plate No 49 when using flexible elastomeric cellular insulation Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover thus making the top cover removable b Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles c Upon completion of installation of the insulation including removable sections two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a layer of glass cloth emb
194. all of metal enclosures Install bushings on ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70 3 1 4 5 Flexible Connections Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 ft in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for motors Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1 2 in diameter Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission movement or motors Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections 3 155 Boxes Outlets and Supports Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast metal hub type when located in wet locations when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 ft above floors and walkways and when specifically indicated Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 in square or octagonal except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations as approved Boxes for use in masonry block or tile walls shall be squa
195. ame length of time Timed local overrides are disabled during occupancy periods 2 3 6 Time Programs Provide programs to automatically adjust for leap years and make daylight Savings time and standard time adjustments 25 3 7 Scheduling a Individual controlled equipment shall be schedulable with schedule based on time of day day of week and day of year Equipment may be associated into groups Each group may be associated with a different schedule Changing the schedule of a group shall change SECTION 23 09 54 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 the schedule of all equipment in the group Groups may be modified created and deleted by the operator b Provide capability that will allow current schedules to be viewed and modified in a seven day week format When control program does not automatically compute holidays provide capability to enter holiday schedules one full year at a time 23 8 Point Override I O and virtual points shall accept software overrides to any possible value 23 9 Alarming I O points and software points shall be alarmable Alarms may be enabled and disabled for every point Alarm limits shall be adjustable on analog points Controllers connected to an external communications device such as a printer terminal or computer shall download alarm and alarm message when alarm occurs When a computer workstation is connected to a DDC system with a modem operator selected alarm cond
196. amp HP 245 05080050 workers prime and subcontractor on the site Ensure that no employee uses illegal drugs or consumes alcohol during work hours Ensure there are no employees under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours After accidents collect blood urine or saliva specimens and test the injured and involved employees for the influence of drugs and alcohol A copy of the test shall be made available to the Contracting Officer upon request 1 7 SITE QUALIFICATIONS DUTIES AND MEETINGS d asd Personnel Qualifications Work performed under this contract shall meet Level 2 Site Safety and Health Officer 55 Site Safety and Health Officer SSHO shall be provided at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor The SSHO shall meet the following requirements Level 1 Worked on similar projects 10 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 years Competent person training as needed Level 2 A minimum of 3 years safety work on similar project 30 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 years Competent person training as needed Level 3 A minimum of 5 years safety work on similar projects 30 hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years An average of at least 24 hours of formal safety training each year for the
197. an will provide walls doors windows closet crawlspace head facility stairwells etc 1 Create feature and update the following attributes a Building ID Facility number b Floor Name Subtype ID Attic Main Floor Second Floor Basement etc Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing roo C Slabs LEJEUNE slab area 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a Structure ID Facility Number if applicable b Feature Description include type of utility when applicable i e Generator Pad Transformer etc SECTION 01 77 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 c d e g h i Structure Material Structure Condition Built Date Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing D Road Centerline LEJEUNE road centerline 1 GPS and collect the following attributes Category Main Secondary etc Number of Lanes Road Name Paved PAVED UNPAVED Date Acquired Year Surface Type ASPHALT GRAVEL DIRT ETC Paved or Unpaved Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing E Road Area LEJEUNE road area 1 GPS and collect the following attributes Category Main Secondary etc Road
198. ance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer The Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance O amp M manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site 1 The systems manufacturer s technical representative 2 Marked up red line drawings of the system as actually installed SECTION 28 31 76 Page 26 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 3 Megger test results 4 Loop resistance test results 5 Complete program printout including input output addresses The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative COR At this time any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion Following acceptance of the system as built drawings and O amp M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance In existing buildings the transfer of devices from the existing system to the new system and the permission to begin demolition of the old fire alarm system will not be permitted until the as built drawings and O amp M manuals are received 3 6 3 Minimum System Tests Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72 IEC 60849 IEC 60268 16 The required tests are as follows a Megger Tests After wiring has been installed and prior to making
199. and butt joints shall be secured and sealed with adhesive When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive Insulation shall be pushed on the pipe never pulled Stretching of insulation may result in open seams SECTION 23 07 00 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 2 2 4 3 2 2550 and joints All edges shall be clean cut Rough or jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted Proper tools such as sharp knives shall be used Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe On pipes larger than 12 inches adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1 3 of the pipe Insulation for Fittings and Accessories Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein 5 for anchors 10 11 and 13 for fittings 14 for valves and 17 for flanges and unions Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density thickness and thermal conductivity Where precut preformed is unavailable rigid preformed pipe
200. and provide subsequent tagging Backflow preventer tests shall be performed using test equipment procedures and certification forms conforming to those outlined in the latest edition of the Manual of Cross Connection Control published by the FCCCHR 01 Test and tag each reduced pressure backflow preventer upon initial installation prior to continued water use and monthly thereafter Tag shall contain the following information make model serial number dates of tests results maintenance performed and signature of tester Record test results on certification forms conforming to requirements cited earlier in this paragraph End of Section SECTION 01 50 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Lz 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD MIL S 16165 Rev E Shielding Harnesses Shielding Items and Shielding Enclosures for Use in the Reduction of Interference from Engine Electrical Systems MIL STD 461 Rev E Control of Electromagnetic Interference Emissions and Susceptibility MIL STD 462 Rev D Notice 4 Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous
201. anship is satisfactory test results are acceptable work is in compliance with the Contract and the required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests d Results of the Follow up Phase inspections held including the location of the definable feature of work Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase and that required testing has been performed and include a list of who performed the tests e Results of the three phases of control for off site work if applicable including actions taken f List the rework items identified but not corrected by close of business List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken h Include a remarks section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received quality control problem areas deviations from the QC plan construction deficiencies encountered QC meetings held acknowledgement that as built drawings have been updated corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action taken by the Contractor i Contractor Quality Control Report certification 1 13 3 Testing Plan and Log As tests are performed the QC Manager shall record on the Testing Plan and Log the date the test was conducted the date the test results were forwarded to the Contracting Officer rema
202. ant leak is discovered after the system has been charged the leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and the refrigerant shall be pumped into the system receiver or other suitable container The refrigerant shall not be discharged into the atmosphere c Contractor s Responsibility The Contractor shall at all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere The steps shall include but not be limited to procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the specified requirements including material labor and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment material or installation Oil Charging Except for factory sealed units two complete charges of lubricating oil for each compressor crankcase shall be furnished One charge shall be used during the performance testing period and upon the satisfactory completion of the tests the oil shall be drained and replaced with the second charge 3 2 MANUFACTURER S FIELD SERVICE The services of a facto
203. antic Division Naval Facilities Engineering Command applied sticker shall be spray applied automotive quality paint The 18 inch diameter applied sticker shall be a silkscreened image in the design indicated painted on a 2 millimeter transparent polyester film The weather resistant self adhering film shall be rated for a minimum of 2 year exterior vertical exposure and be mounted to sign with pressure sensitive permanent acrylic adhesive Shop cut sticker to round shape and provide pull off protection sheets for both sides of sticker for shipping e Sign paint colors numbers listed below for color identification only SECTION 01 58 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 1 Blue Benjamin Moore Paints No 826 2 White Benjamin Moore Paints No 873 3 Gold Dupont No B8014 Metallic gold PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 58 00 Page 2 05080050 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Equipment product warranty list Submit Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data SD 11 Closeout Submittals As built drawings GIS Deliverables Record of materials Equipment product warranty tag 1 2 PROJECT RECORD
204. apabilities a Communications baud rates communication ports hierarchy b Trending capabilities SECTION 23 09 54 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Alarming capabilities capable of alarm generation as defined in this specification Messaging capabilities Self diagnostic capabilities PID control capabilities Workstation Software Mouse and keyboard operation Communications DDC Program download capability Dynamic point update Program modification Database modification Graphics and graphics modification Penetration of graphics Input Devices Transmitters Temperature sensors Humidity sensors Pressure sensors Flow or motor proof Sensor wells Output Devices Dampers Valves Actuators Control relays Solenoid air valves Electronic to pneumatic transducer Surge and Transient Protection Power line SECTION 23 09 54 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Communications lines c Controller I O 1 7 2 Nameplates and Tags a Nameplates and tags bearing device unique identifiers shall be engraved or stamped Permanently attach nameplates to HVAC control panel doors and back plates b For each field mounted piece of equipment attach a plastic or metal tag with equipment name and point identifier 1 7 3 Verification of Dimensions The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work
205. ard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 96 E 96M 2005 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS MSS SP 69 2003 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION MICA MICA Insulation Stds 1999 National Commercial amp Industrial Insulation Standards NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 255 2005 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD MIL A 3316 Rev C Am 2 Adhesives Fire Resistant Thermal Insulation UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 723 2003 Rev thru May 2005 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Field applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems shall be as specified herein factory applied insulation is specified under the piping SECTION 23 07 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 Ll 1 duct or equipment to be insulated 3 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL 2241 Standard Products Provide field applied insulation for heating ventilating and cooling HVAC air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within on under and adjacent to buildings and for plumbing systems Materials shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufa
206. as applicable MCB Camp Lejeune NC and its satellite activities Report as follows 1 Identification Card Center 59 Molly Pitcher Road for badge 910 451 2727 MCAS New River NC Report as follows 1 S 4 Facilities Office Bldg AS 211 1st Deck for registration on contractor s list 910 449 6310 2 Pass and Identification Office Bldg AS 211 1st Deck for badge and vehicle decal 910 449 5427 5428 SECTION 01 30 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 4 3 4 Proof of Employee Citizenship or Legal Alien Status Acceptable documents include birth certificate Social Security Cards Immigration and Naturalization Service INS forms and passports 1 45 35 Proof of Criminal Records Check Proof of a criminal records check from the county or state where the employee has resided for the previous two years or length of legal residence for foreign nationals in the U S for less than two years Criminal background records checks must be from a credible source Many credible sources exist but some examples include the County Courthouse Infolink Screening Services Inc www infolinkscreening com IntegraScan Criminal Records Checks www integrascan com Intelius Employee Screening www Intelius com and Castle Branch www castlebranch com Subsequent to the initial criminal background records checks local criminal records checks shall be conducted annually prior to renewal of badges for reevaluation 1
207. at the site haul roads and other areas disturbed by operations Dry power brooming will not be permitted Instead use vacuuming wet mopping wet sweeping or wet power brooming Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks concrete and bituminous concrete Do not shake bags of cement concrete mortar or plaster unnecessarily Abrasive Blasting shall not be allowed 3 8 QUARANTINE FOR IMPORTED FIRE ANT 4 82 Onslow Jones and Cartaret Counties and portions of Duplin and Craven Counties have been declared a generally infested area by the United States Department of Agriculture USDA for the imported fire ant Compliance with the quarantine regulations established by this authority as set forth in USDA Publication 301 81 of 31 December 1992 is required for operations hereunder Pertinent requirements of the quarantine for materials originating on the Camp Lejeune reservation the Marine Corps Air Station Helicopter New River and the Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point which are to be transported outside Onslow County or adjacent suppression areas include the following a Certification is required for the following articles and they shall not be moved from the reservation to any point outside Onslow County and adjacent designated areas unless accompanied by a valid inspection certificate issued by an Offic
208. ate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 6 6 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer 6 7 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel The SECTION 26 00 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 operating instructions shall include the following a Wiring diagrams control diagrams and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment b Start up proper adjustment operating lubrication and shutdown procedures c Safety precautions d The procedure in the event of equipment failure e Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glas
209. ated for the application shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance Fuses shall not be used for surge protection 4 2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms a A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes b An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes Fuses shall not be used for surge protection 4D ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Style B initiating device circuits The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble loss of polling or as a supervisory module and reporting supervisory short supervisory open or loss of polling such as independent smoke detection systems relays for output function actuation etc The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel s SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled Existing fire alarm system initiating device circuits shall be c
210. ately the test results of that equipment c Perform all required tests and inspections specified in 29 CFR 1910 146 and 29 CFR 1915 Subpart B d Assess hazardous conditions including atmospheric hazards in confined space and adjacent spaces and specify the necessary protection and precautions to be taken e Determine ventilation requirements for confined space entries and operations E Assess hazards associated with hot work in confined and adjacent Space and determine fire watch requirements and g Maintain records required When the work involves marine operations that handle combustible or hazardous materials this qualified person shall be a NFPA certified marine chemist 7 1 5 Competent Person for the Health Hazard Control and Respiratory Protection Program 1 E 1 Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385 1 1 who is a Capable by education specialized training and or experience of anticipating recognizing and evaluating employee exposure to hazardous chemical physical and biological agents in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 Section 6 b Capable of spe cifying necessary controls and protective actions to ensure worker health 7 1 6 Crane Operators Crane operators shall meet the requirements in USACE EM 385 1 1 Section 16 and Appendix G In addition for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM rated capacitates of 50 000 pounds or greater crane operators shall
211. ation 1 8 Tape Insulating Tape UL 510 plastic insulating tape capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C SECTION 33 71 02 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2842 Buried Warning and Identification Tape Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried cable and conduit Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument Provide tape in rolls 2 inchesminimum width color coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length Warning and identification shall be CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW or Similar Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material 21 29 Pull Rope Shall be plastic having a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds Leave a minimum of 24 inches of slack at each end of the pull wires 1 10 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 467 Ground rods shall be copper clad steel with diameter adequate to permit driving to full length of the rod but not less than 3 4 inch in diameter and 10 feet long unless otherwise indicated 21221 Cable Tags Provide as specified in Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2 1 Me
212. ation k X Coordinates 1 Y Coordinates m Contract Number n Drawing Type Drawing Number p Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing H Du rh E Electrical Poles LEJEUNE utility pole tower point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Pole No b Date Acquired Year c Condition d Type pole riser down guy etc e Material f Pole Height g Units of Measure h Circuit ID previously Feeder ID RG2 AS1 ASL FC1 FC2 MAL etc i X Coordinates j Y Coordinates k Contract Number 1 Drawing Type m Drawing Number n Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing F Exterior Lighting LEJEUNE utility pole tower point H Locate GPS and collect the following attributes Light Type X Coordinates Y Coordinates Sensor YES NO Watts Voltage Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Acquired Year Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field PAU TOMO TD Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing G Electrical Switch LEJEUNE electrical switch point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes SECTION 01 77 00 Page 11 Circuit ID RG2 51 ASL FC2 MAL etc 05080050 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Subtype ID Circuit Breaker Fuse Cutout GOAB
213. ation between controllers allowing execution of dynamic control strategies and coordinated response to alarm conditions Minimum baud rate for the lowest level LAN shall be 9600 Baud Minimum baud rate for the highest level LAN shall be 9600 Baud Minimum baud rate for a DDC system consisting of a single LAN shall be 9600 Baud b On Site Interface Ports 1 All Controllers Provide a RS 232 RS 485 USB or RJ 11 Lon Bacnet communications port for each digital controller that allows direct connection of a computer or hand held terminal and through which the controller may be fully accessed Controller access shall not be limited to access through another controller On site interface communication ports shall be in addition to the communications port s supporting controller to controller communications Communication rate shall be 9600 Baud minimum 2 highest Level LAN Every controller on the highest level LAN shall have a communications port supporting direct connection of the workstation computer a hand held terminal port is not sufficient By connecting the workstation computer to this port every controller in the direct digital control system shall be able to be fully accessed and programmed The following operations shall be available downloading and uploading control programs modifying programs and program data base modifying set points and retrieving or accepting trend reports status reports messages and alarms C Si
214. ation in project Format for Product Data Present product data submittals for each section as a complete bound volume Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for product data Indicate by prominent notation each product which is being submitted indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist Identify this material as developed specifically for project Format for Shop Drawings Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1 2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches Present 8 1 2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for submittals required by section Present larger drawings in sets Include on each drawing the drawing title number date and revision numbers and dates in addition to information required in paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals Dimension drawings except diagrams and schematic drawings prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale Shop drawing dimensions shall be the same unit of measure as indicated on the contract drawings Identify materials and products for work shown Format of Samples Furnish samples in sizes below unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified 1 Sample of Equipment
215. ature parts which may be electrically energized and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated fully enclosed guarded or fitted with other types of safety devices Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS 749 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Stored items shall be protected from the weather humidity and temperature variations dirt and dust or other contaminants Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor s responsibility Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor s expense During installation piping and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter 5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 25 1 Verification of Dimensions The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work 252 Drawings Because of the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing fire protection SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 L electrical structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to
216. be made in accordance with Contract clause entitled Differing Site Conditions if appropriate l5 WEATHER PROTECTION Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are monitored carefully Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent and at the end of each workday Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage 1 55 L Building and Site Storm Protection When a warning of gale force winds is issued take precautions to minimize danger to persons and protect the work and nearby Government property Precautions shall include but are not limited to closing openings removing loose materials tools and equipment from exposed locations and removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work Close openings in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government property Hurricane Conditions of Readiness Unless directed otherwise comply with SECTION 01 50 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Condition FIVE Normal weather conditions are expected for the foreseeable future No action is required b Condition FOUR Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 72 hours Contractors shall continue normal daily clean up and good house keeping practices C
217. be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly furnishing required offsets fittings and accessories to meet such conditions The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings consisting of a Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details b Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for maintenance and operation c Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and all interconnected or interlocked relationships between components d Foundation drawings bolt setting information and foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations e Details if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated which include loadings and type of frames brackets stanchions or other supports 5 3 Spare Parts The Contractor shall submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified after approval of detail drawings and not later than 3 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of Supply a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis 6 MANUFACTURER S MULTI YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide a 5 year parts and labor includes refrigerant manufacturer s warran
218. burying covering or concealing Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing fittings bushings will not be permitted Install valves with stems horizontal or above Provide flanges or unions at valves traps strainers and connections to equipment unions are not required in copper tubing piping systems a Threaded connections Provide Teflon pipe thread paste on male threads Do not thread metal pipe into plastic piping b Pipe hangers and supports Provide additional pipe hangers and supports at in line water pumps and flanged valves C Piping to receive insulation Provide temporary wood spacers between the pipe hangers and supports and the pipe in order to properly slope the piping and establish final elevations Provide temporary wood spacers of same thickness as insulation to be provided under Section 23 07 00 Thermal Insulation For Mechanical Systems Support plastic piping every 4 feet Support metal piping as follows MAXIMUM SPACING FEET Nominal Pipe One and Size inches under 1 25 125 2 2 5 3 355 4 5 6 Copper Tubing 6 7 8 8 Steel Pipe 7 8 9 10 11 12 i3 14 16 1 7 Cleaning of piping Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing piping affected by Contractor s operations cleaned of SECTION 23 73 33 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 water and foreign matter during installation by usin
219. cable runs on each side of connection boxes and at points where connections are brought above ground Where cable is brought above ground leave additional slack to make necessary connections all acd Underground Conduit Duct Without Concrete Encasement Type of conduit shall be EPC 40 PVC d d Conduit Installation Top of the conduit shall be not less than 24 inches below grade and shall have a minimum slope of 3 inches in each 100 feet away from buildings and toward manholes and other necessary drainage points Run conduit in Straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary As each conduit run is completed for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit After which draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs For conduit sizes less than 3 inches draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench A minimum clearance of 2 1 2 inches shall be provided between adjacent conduits Grade bottom of trench smooth where rock soft spots or sharp edged materials are encountered excavate the bottom for an additional 3 inches fill and tamp lev
220. cardboard to the landfill Deliver usable pallets to the Base Recycling Center located at Building 982 If base personnel rejects the pellets take pallets to the landfill Deliver treated wood and such as piling and power poles to the landfill separated from any other items and place in locations as designated by the landfill operator SECTION 01 57 19 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 CATEGORY Untreated Unpainted Wood Organic Matter Fiberglass Tanks 550 Gallons or Less Asphalt Pavement kkkkxk KkKKKK 05080050 CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS DISPOSAL BASE SANITARY LANDFILL EXAMPLE GENERAL INFORMATION FOR DEPOSIT IN THE LANDFILL Deliver lumber trees stumps limbs tops tops and shrubs to the landfill separated from any other items and place in locations as designated by the landfill operator Deliver leaves pine straw grass clippings and shrub clippings to the landfill separated from any other items and place in locations as designated by the landfill operator No bags or containers are allowed Clean tanks before delivery to landfill Remove pavement from Government property and deliver to an asphalt recycling establishment Provide a record of the total tons of asphalt recycled and the corporate name and location of the recycling establishment receiving the removed asphalt Separate each category of construction debris debris at the construction site and deliver separately t
221. cate shall state that the crane and rigging gear meet applicable OSHA regulations with the Contractor citing which OSHA regulations are applicable e g cranes used in construction demolition or maintenance shall comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385 1 1 section 16 and Appendix H Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane operator s is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be used For cranes at DOD activities in foreign countries the Contractor shall certify that the crane and rigging gear conform to the appropriate host country safety standards The Contractor shall also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices e g anti two block devices These certifications shall be posted on the crane 1 14 7 Third Party Certification of Barge Mounted Mobile Cranes Barge mounted mobile cranes shall be certified in accordance with 29 CFR 1919 by an OSHA accredited person 1 15 HOT WORK Prior to performing Hot Work welding cutting etc or operating other flame producing spark producing devices a written permit shall be requested from the Fire Division CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED The Contractor will provide at least two 2 twenty 20 pound 4A 20 BC rated extinguishers for normal Hot Work All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged approved safety pin and tamper re
222. ccording to the insulation Specifications for this Project C Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable permanent identification material including damper control positions valve indicators fan speed control levers and similar controls and devices to show final settings 3 5 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES A Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets Obtain manufacturer s outlet factors and recommended testing procedures Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes B Prepare schematic diagrams of systems as built duct layouts C For variable air volume systems develop a plan to simulate diversity D Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements E Check the airflow patterns from the outside air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust air dampers through the supply fan discharge and mixing dampers F Locate start stop and disconnect switches electrical interlocks and motor starters G Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection H Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path I Check for airflow blockages J Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning K Check for proper sealing of air handling unit components 3 6 CONSTANT VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES A The procedures in this Article ap
223. ce army mil Internet http www usace army mil publications or http www hnd usace army mil techinfo engpubs htm U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA Order AMS Publications from AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE AMS Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch 801 Summit Crossing Place Suite C Gastonia NC 28054 2193 Ph 704 810 8870 Fax 704 852 4189 Internet http www ams usda gov lsg seed htm E mail seed amseusda gov Order Other Publications from U S Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service 14th and Independence Avenue SW Room 4028 S Washington DC 20250 Ph 202 720 2791 Fax 202 720 2166 Internet http www usda gov rus U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD Directorate for Public Inquiry and Analysis Office of the Secretary of Defense Public Affairs Room 3A750 The Pentagon 1400 Defense Pentagon Washington DC 20301 1400 Ph 703 428 0711 E mail pia hq afis asd mil Internet http www dod gov Order DOD Documents from National Technical Information Service NTIS 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Ph 703 605 6585 FAX 703 605 6900 E mail infoentis gov Internet http www ntis gov Order Military Specifications Standards and Related Publications from SECTION 01 42 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Department of Defense Single Stock Point for DODSSP Defense Automation and Production Service DAPS Building 4D 700 Robbins
224. channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay 2 12 4 Protection Circuits Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier illumination of a visual amplifier trouble indicator on the control panel appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions as specified 2513 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS FOR INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance 2 14 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK 2 14 1 Telephone A modem shall be provide for communication with the Central Control Monitoring System The modem shall be 56k compatible
225. cks that are securely mounted The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70 b Existing wiring to be reconnected shall be tested to ensure continuity and that no shorts or grounds are on the system 2 2 Terminal Cabinets Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser on each floor at each riser and where indicated on the drawings Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors their labels their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches 2 3 Alarm Wiring Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box housing or device except those containing power supplies and control relays Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer For shielded wiring the shield shall be grounded at only one point that shall be in or adjacent to the FACP Pigtail or T tap connections to Signal line circuits initiating device circuits supervisory alarm circuits and no
226. closure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet whichever is lower Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors their labels their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP b Smoke Sensors Locate sensors as shown on the drawings on a 4 inch SECTION 28 31 76 Page 23 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 mounting box Sensors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge Those located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets c The modification of any fire alarm system and the procedures shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 241 2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING 241 Wiring within Cabinets Enclosures Boxes Junction Boxes and Fittings Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box enclosure or cabinet Conductors that are terminated spliced or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure cabinet mounting or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blo
227. coat of vapor retarder coating The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un insulated surface 2 inches Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions j Where insulation standoff brackets occur insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket 3432 2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work a For rectangular ducts rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the insulation joints A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches Mechanical fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized steel and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall b Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams Each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners When the height of projections is less than the insulation thickness insulation shall be brought up to standing seams reinforcing and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over Vapor retarder barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams reinforcing and projections When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness insula
228. completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area Firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions Tested and listed firestop systems shall be provided in the following locations except in floor slabs on grade a Penetrations of duct conduit tubing cable and pipe through floors and through fire resistance rated walls partitions and ceiling floor assemblies b Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases elevator shafts and utility chutes Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls including inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab d Gaps at perimeter of fire resistance rated walls and partitions such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks e Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions SECTION 07 84 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 f Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction 21 Insulated Pipes and Ducts Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping unless in
229. compressive strength of 4000 psi at the age of 28 days Slump shall not exceed 4 inches Retempering of concrete will not be permitted Exposed unformed concrete surfaces shall be given a smooth wood float finish Concrete shall be cured for a period of not less than 7 days and concrete made with high early strength portland cement shall be repaired by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective areas with cement mortar as directed by the Contracting Officer Air entrain concrete exposed to weather using and air entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C 260 Air content shall be between 4 and 6 percent 3 1 3 Direct Burial System Bury cables directly in earth and install cables in conduit encased in concrete Install cables buried directly in earth in the following manner a Slope ducts to drain b Excavate trenches in which the cables are placed by hand or with mechanical trenching equipment and provide a minimum cable cover of 24 inches below finished grade for power conductors operated at 600 volts and less and 30 inches to the top of the cables for over 600 volts Trenches shall be not less than 6 inches wide and shall be in straight lines between cable markers Cable plows shall not be used Bends in trenches shall have a radius of not less than 36 inches Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same trench space cables laterally at not less than 3 inches apart Maintain at least 12 clearance from communications cab
230. conform to all Government regulations and are subject to such checks as may be deemed necessary to ensure that violations do not occur Employees shall not be permitted on base when such a check reveals that their presence would be detrimental to the security of the base Subject to security regulations the Government will allow access to an area for Servicing equipment and or performing required services Upon request the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer questionnaires and other forms as may be required for security purposes l 5 SUPERVISION Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading writing and conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working hours In addition if a Quality Control CQ representative is required on the contract then that individual shall also have fluent English communication skills 1 6 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the Site meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and safety program preparation of the schedule of prices shop drawings and other submittals scheduling programming and prosecution of the work Major subcontractors who will engage in the work shall also attend SECTION 01 30 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECU
231. connectors Dampers Diffusers registers and grilles Duct lining Valves Pipe and fittings Flexible Round Ducts SD 06 Test Reports Packaged Air Handling Units greater than 2 000 cfm Make up Air Units SD 07 Certificates Certification of welders qualifications SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Installation manual SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Packaged Air Handling Units Data Package 3 Make up Air Units Data package 3 Pumps Data Package 2 Fire dampers Data Package 1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data SD 11 Closeout Submittals Air filter inventory 1 3 1 Temperature Control Systems Drawings shall include point to point electrical wiring diagrams 1 3 2 Automatic Flow Control Valves AFCV Submit drawings showing location and model of each AFCV Show HVAC SECTION 23 73 33 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 equipment and requirements piping and pressure drops across the AFCV Show gpm size and spring ranges of AFCV 23 3 Equipment layout drawings Submit drawings showing equipment layout including foot print piping conduit control cabinets door swings and power disconnects 3 4 Installation Manual Provide for each item of equipment GU Certification of Welders Qualifications Submit copy of Welder Qualification Tests Form QW 482 prior to site welding 23 6 Air Filter Inventory Submit an inventory of sizes and quantity of air filters
232. core b Insulation Inner duct core shall be insulated with mineral fiber blanket type flexible insulation minimum of one inch thick Insulation shall be covered on exterior with manufacturer s standard fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct SECTION 23 73 33 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 3148 Duct Lining Provide where indicated Provide ASTM C 1071 fiberglass duct lining minimum of one inch thick with black pigmented fire resistant coating on Side exposed to airstream Secure to duct interior with 100 percent coverage of adhesive and with mechanical fastening devices spaced in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds Provide metal nosing at duct lining beginnings and endings 4 PIPING SYSTEMS Provide the following pipe and fittings Provide dielectric fittings unions or flanges between steel piping and copper tubing for all piping Sizes except that copper alloy valves and strainers may be used without dielectric fittings unions or flanges Water piping smaller than 3 shall be steel or copper tubing Water piping sizes 3 inches and larger shall be Steel piping 4 Copper Tubing Piping Systems Provide copper tubing for the following piping systems except water piping Sizes larger than 4 inches shall be steel piping a Cold drain piping from drain pans b Domestic water piping 4422 Copper Cold Drain Piping Provide copper tubing in accordance with paragraph
233. ct Field samples and mock ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work SD 05 Design Data Calculations mix designs analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work SD 06 Test Reports Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material product or system identical to the material product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site on portion of work during or after installation Investigation reports Daily checklists Final acceptance test and operational test procedure SD 07 Certificates Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product system or material attesting that product system or material meets specification requirements Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project Document required of Contractor or of a supplier installer or subcontractor throug
234. ct and turn in to the Pass amp ID Office all badges If the Contactor fails to obtain the employee s badge the Pass amp ID Office will be notified within 24 hours Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer 1 4 7 Contractor and Subcontractor Vehicle Requirements Each vehicle to be used in contract performance shall show the Contractor s or subcontractor s name so that it is clearly visible and shall always display a valid state license plate and safety inspection sticker To obtain a vehicle decal which will be valid for one year or contract period whichever is shorter Contractor or subcontractor vehicle operators shall provide to the Vehicle Registration Office 60 Molly Pitcher Road for vehicle decal 910 451 1158 a An installation sponsor request forwarded to provost Marshall office b A valid form of Federal or state government I D C If driving a motor vehicle a valid driver s license vehicle registration and proof of insurance Upon completion termination of this contract or an individual s employment the Contractor shall collect and turn in to Vehicle Registration all Government vehicle decals If any are not collected the Contractor shall notify the Vehicle Registration Office within 24 hours 1 4 8 Security Checks Contractor personnel and vehicles shall only be present in locations relevant to contract performance All Contractor personnel entering the base shall
235. cting Officer Common excavation shall consist of all excavation not classified as rock excavation 2343 Excavated Materials Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be Separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL 4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING Fill and backfill to contours elevations and dimensions indicated Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift S Common Fill Placement Provide for general site Use satisfactory materials Place in 8 inch lifts Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture content Finish to a smooth surface by blading rolling with a smooth roller or both 4 2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Provide for paved areas Place in 8 inch lifts Do not place over wet or frozen areas Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the structural elements are completed and accepted Backfill against concrete only when approved 4 3 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved underground utilities
236. ction engineer allow review period beginning when government receives submittal from QC organization of 45 working days for return of submittal to the contractor Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal 1 5 4 Variations Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant to contract Clause entitled FAR 52 236 21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction and will be considered where advantageous to government Considering Variations Discussion with contracting officer prior to submission will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal VECP SECTION 01 33 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 25 42 Proposing Variations 1 When proposing variation deliver written request to the contracting officer with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to government If lower cost is a benefit also include an estimate of the cost saving In addition to documentation required for variation include the submittals required for the item Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation 5 4 3 Warranting That Variation Are Compatible When delivering a variation for approval contract
237. ctly driven by the compressor driver Compressor shall allow access to internal compressor components for repairs inspection and replacement of parts b Rotors which are solid steel forging with sufficient rigidity for proper operation C A maximum rotor operating speed no greater than 3600 RPM d Casings of cast iron precision machined for minimal clearance about periphery of rotors e A lubrication system of the forced feed type that provides oil at the proper pressure to all parts requiring lubrication SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 f Shaft main bearings of the sleeve type with heavy duty bushings or rolling element type in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 Bearings shall be conservatively loaded and rated for an L 10 life of not less than 200 000 hours g A differential oil pressure or flow cutout to allow the compressor to operate only when the required oil pressure or flow is provided to the bearings h A temperature or pressure initiated hydraulically actuated single slide valve capacity control system to provide minimum automatic capacity modulation from 100 percent to 15 percent i An oil separator and oil return system to remove oil entrained in the refrigerant gas and automatically return the oil to the compressor j Crankcase oil heaters controlled as recommended by the manufacturer 25 26 Compressor Driver Electric Motor Motors starters wiri
238. cture of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening Mc Installer s Qualifications Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years 343 Surface Burning Characteristics Unless otherwise specified insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84 NFPA 255 or UL 723 Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to ASTM E 2231 Insulation materials located exterior to the building perimeter are not required to be fire rated 3 4 Identification of Materials Packages or standard containers of insulation jacket material cements adhesives and coatings delivered for use and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer s stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand and a description of the material Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free 4 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data General Materials Adhesives Sealants Duct Insulation Duct Insu
239. cuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal 2 11 5 Memory Provide each control unit with non volatile memory and logic for all functions The use of long life batteries capacitors or other age dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non volatile processors PROMS or EPROMS 2 11 6 Field Programmability Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control initiating supervisory and trouble functions of both input and output The system program configuration shall be menu driven System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment Any proprietary equipment and proprietary Software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract 2 11 7 Input Output Modifications Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote control unit the FACP and a printed output of the trouble condition 2 11 8 Resetting Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm SECTION 28 31 76 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 supervisory or trouble signal while the alarm s
240. d they must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking working level Posts shall be placed no more than 8 feet apart 29 CFR 1926 500 and USACE EM 385 1 1 3 8 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures When personal fall arrest systems are used the contracator must ensure that the mishap victim can self rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor and include a detailed discussion of the following methods of rescue methods of self rescue equipment used training requirement Specialized training for the rescuers procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance and transportation routes to a medical facility The Rescue and Evaluation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis AHA for the phase of work in the Fall Protection and Prevention FP amp P Plan and the Accident Prevention Plan APP SECTION 01 35 29 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 34 3 4 SCAFFOLDING Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited Access to scaffold platforms greater than 6 m 20 feet in height shall be accessed by use of a scaffold stair System Vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers shall not be used for accessing scaf
241. d Reports Pad mounted transformer design tests Pad mounted transformer routine and other tests SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Transformer s Data Package 5 SD 11 Closeout Submittals Transformer test schedule SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 s i 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 41 Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings Drawings shall indicate but not be limited to the following a An outline drawing with front top and side views b ANSI nameplate data C Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of watthour meter and current transformers d One line diagram including switch es current transformers meters and fuses e Manufacturer s published time current curves on full size logarithmic paper of the transformer high side fuses 2062 Transformer Losses Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled Specified Transformer Losses 4 3 Transformer Product Data Submittal shall include manufacturer s information for each component device and accessory provided with the transformer 4 4 Test Results Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled Field Quality Control 29 MAINTENANCE 5 2 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data In addition to requirements of Data Package 5 include the following on the actual transformer s provided a An instruction manual with perti
242. d for attachment to the rest of the system Only locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used Webbing straps and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 1 8 m 6 feet The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker pendulum like motion that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system 343 Fall Protection for Roofing Work Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed The roof area to be accessed shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight bearing capabilities for the projected loading a Low Sloped Roofs 1 For work within 1 8 m 6 feet of an edge on low slope roofs personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems guardrails or safety nets A safety monitoring system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized SECTION 01 35 29 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 2 For work greater than 1 8 m 6 feet from an edge warning lines shall be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 500 and USACE EM 385 1 1 b Steep Roofs Work on steep roofs requires a personal fall arrest System guardrails with toe boards or safety nets This requirement also includes residential or housing type construction
243. d local regulatory requirements identified in this contract Identify the qualified person s name and qualifications training and experience Delineate the qualified person s authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders If there is no confined space work include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created d Health Hazard Control Program The Contractor shall designate a competent and qualified person to establish and oversee a Health Hazard Control Program in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 Section 6 The program shall ensure that employees on site Government representatives and others are not adversely exposed to chemical physical and biological agents and that necessary controls and protective actions are instituted to ensure health e Crane Critical Lift Plan Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of capacity of the crane or hoist or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted movile crane s hoists at any radius of lift lifts involving more thatn one crane or hoist lifts of personnel and lifts involving more than rigging or operation sensitive equipment or unusual safety risks The plan shall be submitted 15 calendar day6s prior to on site work and include the requirements of USACE EM 385 1 1 paragraph 16 c 18 and t
244. d neutral conductor of wiring systems Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building Where ground fault protection is employed ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection 3e dc Resistance Maximum resistance to ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms contact Contracting Officer for further instructions 3 1 12 Equipment Connections Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified automatic control wiring control devices and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment 341 13 Repair of Existing Work Repair of existing work demolition and modification of existing electrical distribution systems shall be performed as follows 3 1 13 1 Workmanship Lay out work in advance Exercise care where cutting channeling chasing or drilling of floors walls partitions ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation support or anchorage of conduit raceways or other electrical work Repair damage to buildings piping and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved 3 1 13 2 Existing Concealed
245. d raise the set point by two degrees with a single command The following parameters shall be modifiable in this way a Set points b Dead band limits and spans c Reset schedules d Switchover points e PID gains and time between control output changes SECTION 23 09 54 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 f Time g Timed local override time h Occupancy schedules i Holidays j Alarm points alarm limits and alarm messages k Point definition database 1 Point enable disable and override m Trend points trend intervals trend reports n Analog input default values Passwords p Communications parameters including network and telephone communications setups 2 3 2 2 Differential Where set point is in response to some analog input such as temperature pressure or humidity include a set point differential for the control loop to prevent short cycling of control devices 2 3 3 Motor and Flow Status Delay Provide an adjustable delay between when a motor is commanded on or off and when the control program looks to the motor or flow status input for confirmation of successful command execution D aoa Runtime Accumulation Provide re settable run time accumulation for each controlled digital output 24 345 Timed Local Override Provide user definable adjustable run time for each push of a momentary contact timed local override Pushes shall reset clock with each push designating the s
246. d since last meeting Rework items identified since last meeting Rework items completed since last meeting c Review the status of submittals Submittals reviewed and approved since last meeting Submittals required in the near future d Review the work to be accomplished in the next 2 weeks and documen tation required Schedule the three phases of control and testing Establish completion dates for rework items Preparatory phases required Initial phases required Follow up phases required Testing required Status of off site work or testing Documentation required e Resolve QC and production problems and f Address items that may require revising the QC plan Changes in QC organization personnel Changes in procedures THREE PHASES OF CONTROL The QC Manager shall perform the three phases of control to ensure that work complies with Contract requirements The Three Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on site and off site work and shall include the following for each definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements 2929 Preparatory Phase Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours in advance of each preparatory phase Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the definable feature Document the results of the preparatory
247. d water flow within distribution systems including submains branches and terminals to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances 2 Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities 3 Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment 4 Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment 5 Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly 6 Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section B Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment C Provide all labor material equipment and services indicated on the Drawings or specified herein or reasonably necessary for and incidental to a complete job 1 3 SUBMITTALS A Quality Assurance Submittals Within 30 days from the date of the Contractor s Notice to Proceed submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing adjusting and balancing Agent and this Project s testing adjusting and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the Quality Assurance Article below B Contract Documents Examination Report Within 45 days from the date of the Contractor s Notice to Proceed submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section C Strategies and Procedures Plan Within 60 days from the date of the Contractor s Notice to Proceed submit 2 copies of the tes
248. d with a band Where penetrating floors the aluminum jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket Where penetrating waterproofed floors the aluminum jacket shall extend from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket Where penetrating exterior walls the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall Where penetrating roofs pipe shall be insulated as required for interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and sealed with vapor retarder coating The insulation for exterior application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior insulation The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing The flashing and counter flashing shall be sealed underneath with caulking Pipes Passing Through Hangers Insulation whether hot or cold application shall be continuous through hangers All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP 69 Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed or when the insulation or
249. damages the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause s of the accident complete the Navy Contractor Significant Incident Report CSIR form or USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 1 calendar day s of the accident The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms b For a weight handling equipment accident including rigging gear accidents the Prime Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause s of the accident complete the WHE Accident Report Crane and Rigging Gear form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report form 1 14 2 Accident Notification Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical but not later than four hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents property damage equal to or greater than 2 000 or any weight handling equipment accident Information shall include contractor name contract title type of contract name of activity installation or location where accident occurred date and time of accident names of personnel
250. der conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory To calculate system effects for air systems use tables and charts found in AMCA 201 Fans and Systems Sections 7 through 10 or in SMACNA s HVAC Systems Duct Design Sections 5 and 6 Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions D Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing cleaning adjusting and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed E Examine system and equipment test reports F Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices such as test ports gage cocks thermometer wells flow control devices balancing valves and fittings and manual volume dampers are properly installed and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment SECTION 23 05 93 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 operation G Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing H Examine air handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed bearings are greased belts are aligned and tight and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation I Examine terminal units such as variable air volume boxes and mixing boxes to verify that
251. dinates Y Coordinates Manhole ID Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing X Manholes LEJEUNE wastewater junction point T Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a b Q TQ aA p j k d Y Vent La Subtype ID Manhole Manhole ID Each section of the base has a unique numbering system for manholes please See Public Work GIS office for details Use Distribution Box Junction Box Manhole Valve Box Type Material Number of Pipes in manhole Rim Elevation Invert Elevation Elevations Units Manhole Diameter Diameter Units X Coordinates Y Coordinates Date Acquired Year Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing LEJEUNE wastewater vent point Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a b c d e g h i j k Date Acquired Year Valve Style Type Pressure Relief Regulating etc Use Control Valve Flush Valve etc Size in Diameters Units in Diameters X Coordinates Y Coordinates Subtype ID AIR GAP AIR CONTROL AIR RELEASE Etc Containment Type Contract Number Drawing Type SECTION 01 77 00 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 Drawing Number m Date Source S
252. dition g Water in insulating liquid h Measure dissipation factor or power factor Perform dissolved gas analysis DGA Test for presence of PCB Verify that the tap changer is set at specified ratio SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 92 3 6 1 2 Verify proper secondary voltage phase to phase and phase to neutral after energization and prior to loading Current Transformers a Electrical tests 4 3 65 153 Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter if applicable Perform insulation resistance test Perform a polarity test Perform a ratio verification test Watthour Meter b Electrical tests 3 6 1 4 Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer s published data Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter where applicable Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact Grounding System a Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and Specifications b Electrical tests 3 622 Perform ground impedance measurements utilizing the fall of potential method On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hour
253. dium Voltage Cable Tests Results of AEIC CS6 qualification and production tests as applicable for each type of medium voltage cable PART 3 EXECUTION 3 al INSTALLATION NFPA 70 and ANSI C2 E EE Contractor Damage The Contractor shall promptly repair any indicated utility lines or systems damaged by Contractor operations Damage to lines or systems not indicated which are caused by Contractor operations shall be treated as Changes under the terms of the General Provisions of the contract If the Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a nonindicated line or system such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with indicated status in determining liability for damages In any event the Contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer of any such damage 22 Concrete Shall be composed of fine aggregate coarse aggregate portland cement and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic workable mixture Fine aggregate shall be of hard dense durable clean and uncoated sand The coarse aggregate shall be reasonably well graded from 3 16 to one inch SECTION 33 71 02 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 The fine and coarse aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of dirt vegetable matter soft fragments or other deleterious substances Water shall be fresh clean and free from salts alkali organic matter and other impurities Concrete shall have a
254. ds e Terminations shall be properly corona suppressed by guard ring field reduction sphere or other suitable methods as necessary Ensure that the maximum test voltage does not exceed the limits for terminators specified in IEEE standard 48 or manufacturer s specifications g Apply the DC high potential test in at least five equal increments until maximum test voltage is reached No increment shall exceed the voltage rating of the cable Record DC leakage SECTION 33 71 02 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 current at each step after a constant stabilization time consistent with system charging current h Raise the conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and hold for fifteen 15 minutes Record readings of leakage current at 30 seconds and one minute and at one minute intervals thereafter Provide a graphic plot of readings with leakage current X axis versus voltage Y axis at each increment 1 Reduce the conductor test potential to zero and measure residual voltage at discrete intervals j Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored charge 3 27 3 Ground Rods Perform ground resistance tests for ground rods before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Ground resistance shall also be measured for each piece of equipment and medium voltage cable splice to the ground electrode Use a portab
255. e 1 50 degrees F span Room chilled water cooling coil discharge air return air sensors 2 100 degrees F span Outside air hot water heating coil discharge air mixed air sensors 3 200 degrees F span High temperature hot water heating hot water chilled hot water system sensors 6 2 Relative Humidity Transmitters Provide integral humidity transducer and transmitter Output of relative humidity instrument shall be a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal proportional to full range of relative humidity input Accuracy shall be 2 percent of full scale long term stability shall be less than one percent drift per year Range shall be 10 to 90 percent minimum relative humidity Sensing element shall be polymer or thin film polymer type 26 3 Pressure Transmitters Provide integral pressure transducer and transmitter Output of pressure instrument shall be a 4 to 20 mA signal proportional to the pressure span Accuracy shall be 1 0 percent Linearity shall be 0 1 percent Span shall be as follows 1 0 5 to 0 5 inches water differential range static pressure control of rooms 2 0 to 5 inches water differential range Duct static pressure 3 0 to 100 psig differential Water differential pressure 6 4 Current Transducers Provide current transducers to monitor amperage of motors Select current transducer for normal measured amperage to be near 50 percent of full scale range Current transducers shall have an accuracy o
256. e ASTM C 1136 2006 Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation ASTM C 1290 2006 Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts ASTM C 195 2000 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement ASTM C 449 C 449M 2000 Mineral Fiber Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement ASTM C 533 2004 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation ASTM C 534 2005 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form ASTM C 547 2006 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation ASTM C 552 2003 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation ASTM C 553 2002 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications ASTM C 591 2005 Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular SECTION 23 07 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation ASTM C 612 2004 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation ASTM C 647 1995 R 2000 Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation ASTM C 795 2003 Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel ASTM C 916 1985 R 2001e1 Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation ASTM C 920 2005 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM E 2231 2002 Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E 84 2007 Stand
257. e Certification Furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment request signed by the QC Manager attesting that as built drawings are current and attesting that the work for which payment is requested including stored material is in compliance with contract requirements 11253 Completion Certification Upon completion of work under this Contract the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that the work has been completed inspected tested and is in compliance with the Contract t13 DOCUMENTATION Maintain current and complete records of on site and off site QC program operations and activities 1 11 Contractor Production Report Reports are required for each day that work is performed and shall be attached to the Contractor Quality Control Report prepared for the same day Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract SECTION 01 45 10 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Production Reports are to be prepared signed and dated by the project superintendent and shall contain the following information a Date of report report number name of contractor contract number title and location of Contract and superintendent present b Weather conditions in the morning and in the afternoon including maximum and minimum temperatures C
258. e Contractor s Commissioning Authority CA shall review the commissioned Systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability The CA shall verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the requirements of the Contract documents and design intent particularly as they relate to functionality energy performance water performance maintainability sustainability system cost indoor environmental quality and local environmental impacts The CA shall communicate deficiencies to the Contracting Officer Upon a successful review of the corrections the CA shall recommend approval and acceptance of these O amp M manuals to the Contracting Officer This work shall be in addition to the normal review procedures for O amp M data 23 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED O amp M DATA PACKAGES Operating Instructions Include specific instructions procedures and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system 34 21 Safety Precautions List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions 2822 22 Operator Prestart Include procedures required to install set up and prepare each system for use Startup Shutdown Post Shutdown Procedures Provide narrative description for Startup Shutdown and Post shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure 31 4 Normal Opera
259. e conforming to ASTM C 260 Air content shall be between 4 and 6 percent 6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 6 1 Transformer Test Schedule The Government reserves the right to witness tests Provide transformer test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer s test facility Submit required test schedule and location and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date a Test Instrument Calibration 1 The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy 2 The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 2 of Standards and Technology 3 Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment 4 Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment 5 Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested 6 Keep up to date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis in lieu of third party calibration include the following a Maintain up to date instrument calibration instructions and procedures fo
260. e connections exterior to the air handler Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze up 5 Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel 211 6 FILTERS A Furnish angled filter section with 2 inch pleated MERV 7 filter Provide side loading and removal of filters B Filter media shall be UL 900 listed Class I or Class II e Filter Magnehelic gauge s shall be furnished and mounted by equipment manufacturer D Make up Air Units 22122 Make up Air Unit Unit shall include outdoor supply fan exhaust air fan dessicant type recovery wheel 2 inch thick outdoor air and exhaust air filters outdoor and exhaust shut off dampers chilled water coil hot water reheat coil microprocessor for supply air tempering and enthalpy control 2 1 2 1 Exhaust Discharge and Outside Air Intake Exhaust discharge and outside air intake shall not be located on the same side on roof top units Units shall be UL listed and bear the UL label Energy transfer ratings shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84 Performance to be as scheduled on plans Unit casing to be double wall construction insulated with 1 inch 3 rigid board fiberglass with fire resistant Foil Scrim Kraft facing All componenets shall be easily accessible throught removable access doors for both exhaust and supply compartments
261. e data 8 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system Check the sum of branch circuit flows against approved pump flow rate Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent SECTION 23 05 93 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 B Prepare schematic diagrams of systems as built piping layouts C Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above 1 Open all manual valves for maximum flow 2 Check expansion tank liquid level 3 Check makeup water station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent 4 Check flow control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow 5 Set differential pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open 6 Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers 7 Check pump motor load If motor is overloaded throttle main flow balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded 8 Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated 349 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES A Determine water flow at pumps Use the following proced
262. e design and actual values for the following Airflow rate in cfm Air velocity in fpm Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm Final airflow rate in cfm Final velocity in fpm Space temperature in deg F K System Coil Reports For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units include the following Unit Data Include the following System and air handling unit identification Location and zone Room or riser served Coil make and size Flowmeter type Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Airflow rate in cfm Entering water temperature in deg F Leaving water temperature in deg F Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig Entering air temperature in deg F Leaving air temperature in deg F L Heat Exchanger Converter Test Reports For steam and hot water heat exchangers include the following SECTION 23 05 93 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 N om 0000990 Unit Data Include the following Unit identification Location Service Make and type Model and serial numbers Ratings Steam Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Inlet pressure in psig Condensate flow rate in lb h Water Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Entering water temperature in deg F Leaving water temperature in de
263. e in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and applicable State regulations 6 5 Lead Acid Batteries Dispose of lead acid batteries that are not damaged or leaking at a SECTION 01 57 19 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 State approved battery recycle or at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility For lead acid batteries that are leaking or have cracked casings dispose of the electrolyte solution using one of the following alternatives a An industrial waste water treatment plant if available and approved by the Contracting Officer for disposing of lead acid battery electrolyte b Dispose of the lead acid battery electrolyte at a permitted or interim status hazardous waste TSD facility The management and disposal of waste lead acid batteries and electrolyte shall comply with requirements for management and disposal of hazardous wastes 3 6 6 Mercury Control Prior to starting work remove thermostats switches and other components that contain mercury Upon removal place items containing mercury in doubled polyethylene bags label and turn over to the Contracting Officer for disposal 3 67 Petroleum Products Protect against spills and evaporation during fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles Dispose of lubricants to be discarded and excess oil 3 7 DUST CONTROL Keep dust down at all times including nonworking periods Sprinkle or treat with dust suppressants the soil
264. e located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility 2 7 3 Smoke Sensor Testing Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer s recommended calibrated test method Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval 2 8 ELECTRIC POWER 2 8 1L Primary Power Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FACP from the normal AC service to the building 259 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure Transfer from normal to auxiliary secondary power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm 2 9 1 Batteries Provide sealed maintenance free lead calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power 295121 Capacity Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under supervisory and trouble conditions including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes 2 9 1 2 Ba
265. e of construction due to changes in personnel equipment systems or work habits The accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be kept and maintained at the job site for the duration of the project The Fall Protection Plan shall be included in the Accident Prevention Plan APP h Training Records and Requirements List of mandatory training and certifications which are applicable to this project e g explosive actuated tools confined space entry fall protection crane operation vehicle operator forklift operators personal protective equipment list of requiremetns for periodic retraining certification outline requirements for supervisory and employee safety meetings i Site Demolition Plan The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 00 Demolition and referenced sources Include engineering survey as applicable Js Crane Work Plan The contractor shall provide a crane work plan to the Contracting Officer for acceptance The crane work plan shall include the specific model of each crane and a drawing identifying their locations exact the dimensions wheel sizes number of wheels wheel spacing tire pressure 5 number of axles axle spacing minimum wheel load to be exerted during operatins and maximum outrigger load to be exerted during operations The Contractor shall allow at least 10 working days for acceptance non acceptance of the crane work plan No crane operations shall begin prior t
266. e steel enclosure as specified herein Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel the unit enclosures shall match exactly Each control unit shall provide power supervision control and logic for its portion of the entire system utilizing solid state modular components internally mounted and arranged for easy access Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt 60 hertz normal building power supply Provide each unit with supervisory functions for power failure internal component placement and operation 2 dL Cabinet Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate Lettering on the nameplate shall be labeled Remote Fire Alarm Control Unit and shall not be less than one inch high Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps circuits meters fuses and switches The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing complete with back box hinged steel door with cylinder lock and surface mounting provisions SECTION 28 31 76 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 11 2 Cont
267. e text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 709 2000 Laminated Thermosetting Materials U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 29 1910 147 Control of Hazardous Energy Lock Out Tag Out INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE Std 100 1996 Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms IEEE IEEE C2 2002 National Electrical Safety Code NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA C57 12 28 1999 Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity Revision of ANSI C57 12 28 88 NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2001 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures NEMA MG 1 2006 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 10 1994 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel Cage Polyphase Induction Motors NEMA MG 11 1977 R 1992 Energy Management Guide of Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to all sections of Division 16 Electrical of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections SECTION 26 00 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Ix 1 3 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100
268. e traversing of ducted air flows The resistance to airflow through the airflow measurement station shall not exceed 0 08 inch water gage at an airflow of 2 000 fpm Station construction shall be suitable for operation at airflow of up to 5 000 fpm over a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F and accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent over a range of 125 to 2 500 fpm scaled to air volume b Each transmitter shall produce a linear temperature compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output corresponding to the actual air flow The transmitter shall be a 2 wire loop powered device The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed 0 5 percent of the calibrated measurement 2 7 OUTPUT HARDWARE 2 7 1 Dampers Damper shall conform to SMACNA DCS a A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and shall be no higher than 72 inches Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inches Larger sized damper shall be made from a combination of sections b Dampers shall be steel or other materials where shown Flat blades shall be made rigid by folding the edges Blades shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact The channel frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage Dampers shall not leak in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gage static pressure when closed Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees
269. echanical Inspection 1 Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage 2 Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications 3 Inspect for proper shield grounding cable support and cable termination 4 Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer s minimum allowable bending radius 5 Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition 6 Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement b Electrical Tests 1 Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method Record ohmic value resistance values in excess of 10 ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified 22 Perform a DC high potential test on all cables Adhere to precautions and limits as specified in the applicable NEMA ICEA Standard for the specific cable Test procedure shall be as follows and the results for each cable test shall be recorded as Specified herein Field acceptance test voltage for 15 kV cable shall be 53 kV DC with insulated connectors a Current sensing circuits in test equipment shall measure only the leakage current associated with the cable under test and shall not include internal leakage of the test equipment b Record wet and dry bulb temperatures or relative humidity and temperature c Test each section of cable individually d Individually test each conductor with all other conductors grounded Ground all shiel
270. econdary UG Service OH Service UG Disposition Permanent Buried Abandoned etc Subtype Overhead Underground Date Acquired Year Disposition Permanent Temporary Demolished Abandoned etc Conduit Size Number of Phases Insulation Material Voltage Cable Length Size of Units Substation ID Circuit ID RG1 RG2 AS1 ASL FC2 MAL etc Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Secondary Voltage i e 12470N7200 4804277 120240 Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing C Electrical Meter LEJEUNE electrical meter point I Locate GPS and collect the following attributes Meter ID Voltage KW Rate Number of Phases Model Number Date Acquired Facility ID Substation ID Circuit ID RG1 RG2 AS1 ASL FC2 MAL etc X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Data Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing D Electrical Transformer LEJEUNE elect transformr bank point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a b c d e Subtype Pole Mount Pad Mount Transformer Id Date Installed Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage SECTION 01 77 00 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Number of Transformers Total KVA Substation ID Circuit ID RG1 RG2 AS1 ASL FC2 MAL etc j Inform
271. ect the following attributes Subtype ID Type Material Number of Pipes Diameter Diameter Units Rim Elevation Elevation Units Drain Type X Coordinate Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing PAUP os 8 S Inlet LEJEUNE storm sewer inlet point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes 9 Subtype ID Date Acquired Year Inlet Status Curb Opening Drop Inlet Surface Linear etc Invert Elevation Weir Elevation Elevation Units X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Qo HAUL BQ A Wastewater Collection Collect GPS data survey grade T Wastewater Lines LEJEUNE wastewater line 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Pipe ID by Manhole number b Date Acquired Year Use main line force main building facility service abandoned inactive pipe etc d Material e Size of Diameter SECTION O1 77 00 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 D Fh i j k 1 d ME ELE 5 oB Units Invert Elevation 1 Invert Elevation 2 Elevation Units Slope Slope Units Percent Building ID If building facility service line indicate Building number t
272. ed at the end of this section are acceptable for providing the information required by the paragraph entitled Documentation While use of these specific formats are not required any other format used shall contain the same information a Combined Contractor Production Report and Contractor Quality Control Report 1 sheet with separate continuation sheet b Testing Plan and Log c Rework Items List PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used SECTION 01 45 10 Page 12 CONTRACTOR PRODUCTION REPORT ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY WORK PERFORMED TODAY schedule WORK LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION Moe po HRS Activity No a Oe EUN CNN TE AS JOB SAFETY MEETING HELD THIS af YES attach copy of the meeting minutes WERE THERE ANY LOST TIME ACCIDENTS THIS DATE Clyves No UF YES attach copy of completed OSHA WAS ELECTRICAL HIGH WORK DONE YES NO Gf YES attach statement or checklist showing inspection performed WAS HAZARDOUS MATERIALANASTE RELEASED INTO THE ENVIRONMENT oO YES mi NO GF YES attacn description of Incident and proposed action LIST SAFETY ACTIONS TAKEN TODAY SAFETY INSPECT IONS CONDUCTED DATE Qs 2d SE a 28 m x 9 gt a CUMULATIVE TOTAL OF WORK HOURS FROM PREVIOUS REPORT SAFETY REQUIREMENT
273. ed for this project shall be provided on each type of CD DVD media utilized f Printouts of configuration settings for all devices g Routine maintenance checklist The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format The first column shall list all installed devices the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity and the fourth column for additional comments or reference 1 7 2 Technical Data and Computer Software Lesson plans operating instructions maintenance procedures and training data furnished in manual format for the training courses The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system The maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose repair maintain and expand functions inherent to the system 1 8 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS 1 8 1 Repair Service Replacement Parts Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for SECTION 28 31 76 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer During guarantee period the service technician shall be on site within 24 hours after notification All repairs shall be completed within 24 hou
274. ed solely for fire protection b Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures However fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain including the trap insulated where exposed Sanitary drain lines d Air chambers e Adjacent insulation f ASME stamps g Access plates of fan housings h Cleanouts or handholes i Components within factory preinsulated HVAC equipment j Factory preinsulated flexible ductwork k Factory preinsulated HVAC equipment l Manufacturer s nameplates m Vibration isolating connections Pipes Passing Through Walls Roofs and Floors a Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve SECTION 23 07 00 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 2 2 3 An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier weatherproofing self adhesive jacket minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 ply standard grade Silver white black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing Where pipes penetrate interior walls the aluminum jacket or vapor barrier weatherproofing self adhesive jacket minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 plys standard grade silver white black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each en
275. edded between coats Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above Molded PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed vapor barrier weatherproffing jacket less than 0 0000 permeability greater than 3 ply standard grade silver white black and embossed and UV resistant 3 2 4 3 PVC Jacket PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer s recommended adhesive Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion S23 DUCTWORK PLENUMS CASINGS AND ACCESSORIES INSULATION INSTALLATION Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket Air conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air or provided with a cooling device such as a fan coil unit and heated conditioned air or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater radiator or convector 3 2 1 Duct Insulation Thickness Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4 Table 4 Minimum Duct Insulation inches Cold Air Ducts Return Air Ducts 2 0 Make up
276. edded between the coats The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1 16 inch A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation and at all penetrations 3522 23 Other Equipment a Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment To ensure a tight fit on round equipment edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered b Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with contact adhesive Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles c Phenolic foam insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer Cellular glass shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a SECTION 23 07 00 Page 23 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 vapor retarder coating d Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male female shiplap type joint The entire surface o
277. eet the requirements of ASTM E 543 g Laboratories engaged in hazardous materials testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA 11 2 Accredited Laboratories Acceptable accreditation programs are the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program NVLAP the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO program and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation A2LA program Furnish to the Contracting Officer a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation Scope of Accreditation and latest directory of the accrediting organization for accredited laboratories The scope of the laboratory s accreditation shall include the test methods required by the Contract 11 3 Inspection of Testing Laboratories Prior to approval of non accredited laboratories the proposed testing laboratory facilities and records shall be subject to inspection by the Contracting Officer Records subject to inspection include equipment inventory equipment calibration dates and procedures library of test SECTION 01 45 10 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 procedures audit and inspection reports by agencies conducting laboratory evaluations and certifications testing and management personnel qualifications test report forms and the internal QC procedures 1 11 24 Capability Check The Contracting Officer retains the right to chec
278. eet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only 1 When approving authority is contracting officer QC organization will certify submittals forwarded to contracting officer with the following certifying statement T hereby certify that the equipment material article shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with contract Number N62470 08 B 0050 is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification can be installed in the allocated spaces and is submitted for Government approval Certified by Submittal Reviewer Date Signature when applicable Certified by QC manager Date Signature g Sign certifying statement or approval statement The person signing certifying statements shall be QC organization member designated in the approved QC plan The signatures shall be in original ink Stamped signatures are not acceptable h Update submittal register database as submittal actions occur and maintain the submittal register at project site until final acceptance of all work by contracting officer i Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site including contractor s copy of approved samples 14 5 7 Government s Responsibilities When approving authority is contracting Officer the Government will SECTION 01 33 00 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 L 1 Note date which submittal was received
279. egnated insulation For conductors No 4 AWG and larger diameter color coding shall be by plastic coated self sticking markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shrink type sleeves Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations 3 1 8 Splices Make splices in accessible locations Make splices in conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated pressure type connector Make splices in conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation 3 1 9 Covers and Device Plates Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices Plaster fillings are not permitted Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1 16 in Use of sectional type device plates are not permitted Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations 3 1 10 Electrical Penetrations Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance rated walls partitions floors or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping 3421411 Grounding and Bonding In accordance with NFPA 70 Ground exposed non current carrying metallic SECTION 26 20 00 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 parts of electrical equipment metallic raceway systems grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways telephone system grounds an
280. eground Hot Pipeline Above 60 deg F Insulation for outdoor indoor exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements Supply the insulation with manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket vapor barrier a Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 Types I II or III supply the insulation with manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket b Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 Type I indoor only or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe temperature Supply insulation with the manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket vapor barrier C Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Type II and Type III Supply the insulation with manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket SECTION 23 07 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 223 Above Ground Dual Temperature Pipeline Outdoors Indoor Exposed or Concealed Selection of insulation for use over a dual temperature pipeline system shall be in accordance with the most limiting restrictive case Find an allowable material from paragraph PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS and determine the required thickness from the most restrictive case Use the thickness listed in paragraphs INSULATION THICKNESS for cold amp hot pipe applications 223 DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION 2 331 Duct Insulation Provide factory applied insulation with insulation manufacturer s standard reinforced fire retardant vapor barrier 2 320 1 Rigid Insulation Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612
281. either by using EEPROM flash memory or by an uninterruptible power source battery or uninterruptible power supply UPS The backup power source shall have sufficient capacity to maintain volatile memory during an AC power failure Where the uninterruptible power source is rechargeable a rechargeable battery provide sufficient back up capacity for a minimum of seventy two hours The rechargeable power source shall be constantly charged while the controller is operating under normal line power Where a non rechargeable power source is used provide sufficient capacity for a minimum of two years accumulated power failure Batteries shall be replaceable without soldering 1 8 Inputs Provide input function integral to the direct digital controller Provide input type s as required by the DDC design For each type of input used on high level controllers provide at least one similar spare input point per controller a Analog Inputs Allowable input types are 100 ohm or higher platinum RTDs thermistors 4 to 20 mA and 0 10 VDC Thermistor and direct RTD inputs must have appropriate conversion curves stored in controller software or firmware Analog to digital A D conversion shall have 10 bit minimum resolution b Digital Inputs Digital inputs shall sense open close on off or other two state indications 25 9 Outputs Provide output function integral to the direct digital controller Provide output type s as required by the
282. el with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles that would be retained on a 1 4 inch sieve Provide warning tape 12 inches below grade 21 4 2 Encasement Where indicated install conduits in concrete encasement of rectangular cross section providing a minimum of 3 inch concrete cover around ducts 1 4 3 Multiple Conduits Separate multiple power conduits by a minimum distance of 2 1 2 inches Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows and layers to strengthen the conduit assembly Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally Spacer assembly shall consist of base spacers intermediate spacers and top spacers to provide a completely enclosed and locked in conduit assembly Install spacers per manufacturer s instructions but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly 2445 Buried Warning and Identification Tape Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements SECTION 33 71 02 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 34 1 9 Cable Pulling Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions including turnups into switches transformers switchgear Switchboards and other enclosures Cable with tape or wire shield shall have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable
283. ely after cleaning the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0 3 mil one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat b Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils c Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils SECTION 23 03 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 MAXIMO EQUIPMENT INVENTORY UPDATE Employee Phone Date Bldg Specific Location __ Computer Room __ Heat Pump Indoor Unit __ AC Package __ Heat Pump Outdoor Unit __ AC Package Terminal Heat Pump Package __ Assembly Trap line _ Heat Pump Package Terminal __ Backflow Preventer __ Pump Circulating Chilled Water __ Boiler Pump Circulating Domestic Water __ Chiller Air Cooled Recip Pump Circulating Dual Temp Water Chiller Air Cooled Screw Pump Circulating Heating Water Chiller Air Cooled Scroll __ Pump Condensate _ Chiller Water Cooled
284. em The report shall also include the following information and shall be taken at least three different times at outside dry bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 a Date and outside weather conditions b The load on the system based on the following 1 The refrigerant used in the system 2 Condensing temperature and pressure 3 Suction temperature and pressure 4 For absorption units the cooling water pressures and temperatures entering and exiting the absorber and condenser Also the refrigerant solution pressures concentrations and temperatures at each measurable point within the system 5 Running current voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors 6 The actual on site setting of all operating and safety controls 7 Chilled water pressure flow and temperature in and out of the chiller 5 DEMONSTRATIONS Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer The training period shall consist of a total 8 hours of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations End of Section SECTION 23 64 00
285. emperatures Do not locate sensors in dead air Spaces or positions obstructed by ducts or equipment Install gaskets between the sensor housing and duct wall Seal duct and SECTION 23 09 54 Page 30 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 insulation penetrations b String duct averaging sensors between two rigid supports ina serpentine position to sense average conditions Insulate temperature sensing elements from supports Provide hinged duct access doors to install averaging sensors if needed c Locate freeze protection sensors in appropriate locations to sense lowest temperatures to avoid potential problems with air stratification Immersion Temperature Sensors Provide thermowells for sensors measuring temperatures in liquid applications or pressure vessels Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions Do not install wells using extension couplings Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells provide wells in piping at elbows to sense flow across entire area of well Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of pipe area Increase piping Size as required to avoid restriction Provide thermowells with thermal transmission material within the well 3 1 3 4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors Provide outside air temperature sensor in weatherproof enclosure on north side of the building away from exhaust hoods air intakes and other areas that may affect temperature readings
286. ensity test results by performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 tested as specified herein a Bedding and backfill in trenches One test per 100 linear feet in each lift or minimum of three tests for every run of underground utility End of Section SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 lt l REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 4972 2001 pH of Soils U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA AMS Seed Act 1940 R 1988 R 1998 Federal Seed Act 2 DEFINITIONS 251 Stand of Turf 95 percent ground cover of the established species 3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements with additions and modifications herein 4 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Fertilizer Include physical characteristics and recommendations SD 07 Certificates State certification and approval for seed 225 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 25 2 Delivery S5 eres Seed Protection Protect from drying out and from contaminat
287. ent component and subassembly level Include an index preceding each submittal Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2 1 Package Quality Documents must be fully legible Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted 22 52 Package Content Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections including the content of the packages and addressing each product component and system designated for data package submission except as follows Commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections shall use Data Package 3 Commissioned items with a Data Package 1 or 2 requirement shall use instead Data Package 3 2 3 Changes to Submittals Manufacturer originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O amp M Data Changes additions or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement SECTION 01 78 23 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Jl 2 4 Review and Approval Th
288. equipment to support and assist testing adjusting and balancing activities B Notice Provide 7 days advance notice for each test Include scheduled test dates and times C Perform testing adjusting and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed 2 EXAMINATION A Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper testing adjusting and balancing of systems and equipment 1 Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract 2 Verify that balancing devices such as test ports gage cocks thermometer wells flow control devices balancing valves and fittings and manual volume dampers are required by the Contract Documents Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation B Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment C Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements including System effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed un
289. er Insulated conductors shall have 600 volt Type TW insulation meeting the requirements of UL 83 2 3 1 Flexible Jumper Cable Welding cable 2 0 AWG Provide flexible cable in areas where movement or vibration requires a grounding connections PART 3 EXECUTION 321 INSTALLATION Grounding installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and SECTION 26 06 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 ANSI C2 oJ Ground Rod Connections Connect ground conductor to the upper end of ground rod by exothermic weld or by compression connector Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with manufacturer s written recommendations Welds which have puffed up of which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable No mechanical connectors are required at exothermic weldments Compression connectors shall be type that uses a hydraulic compression tool to provide correct pressure Provide tools and dies recommended by compression connector manufacturer An embossing die or similar method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been fully compressed on ground wire 1 2 Grounding and Bonding NFPA 70 Ground noncurrent carrying metal parts of equipment or enclosure metallic raceway systems grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways and neutral conductor of wiring systems Make ground connection at main service equipment and extend grounding conductor t
290. er and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F Provide 0 05 inch minimum thick black polyethylene tag holder Provide a one piece nylon self locking tie at each end of the cable tag Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds The cable tags shall have black block letters numbers and symbols one inch high on a yellow background Letters numbers and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags orientation 1 11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein 2411 21 Motors Equipment Provide motors controllers integral disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment except controllers indicated as part of the motor control centers shall be provided under Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Motors controllers integral disconnects and contactors shall conform to Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted Control voltage for controllers and contactors shall not exceed 120 volts nominal When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer provide fused switches in lieu of non fused
291. er of the Plant Protection and Quarantine Program PPQ of the U S Department of SECTION 01 57 19 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Agriculture 1 Bulk soil 2 Used mechanized soil moving equipment Used mechanized soil moving equipment is exempt if cleaned of loose noncompacted soil 3 Other products articles or means of conveyances if it is determined by an inspector that they present a hazard of transporting spread of the imported fire ant and the person in possession thereof has been so notified b Authorization for movement of equipment outside the imported fire and regulated area shall be obtained from USDA Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service APHIS Plant Protection and Quarantine PPQ Box 28 Goldsboro North Carolina 27533 0028 Attn Mr William Scroggins or Mr Frank Best telephone 919 735 1941 If Mr Scroggins or Mr Best are not available contact Mr Jim Kelley at 910 815 4667 the supervisor s office in Wilmington Requests for inspection shall be made sufficiently in advance of the date of movement to permit arrangements for the services of authorized inspectors The equipment shall be prepared and assembled so that it may be readily inspected Soil on or attached to equipment supplies and materials shall be removed by washing with water or such other means as necessary to accomplish complete removal Resulting spoil shall be wasted as necessary and as directed SECT
292. er to establish the cable workman s competency the Contractor shall be required to submit the following within 30 calendar days prior to commencement of the splice termination 1 Documentation to verify that the individual has completed a splice termination of the type to be installed under this contract The test splice termination shall be performed at the job site for this contract under the supervision of the cable accessory manufacturer or his representative and witnessed by the Government 2 Documentation that said splice termination has undergone and passed the following tests by the splice termination manufacturer or an independent testing laboratory Minimum Value TEST 15 kV Discharge Ext Value with 3 pC or less 20 kV SECTION 33 71 02 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 Minimum Value TEST 15 kV AC withstand 1 minute 50 kV DC withstand 15 minutes 70 kV These results shall be attached for review 3 A statement of the number of years in which the individual has been splicing terminating medium voltage cable b Criteria for waiver Items a 1 and a 2 above may be waived on subsequent jobs provided the following criteria is satisfied 1 Documentation of prior completion of items a 1 and a 2 be submitted 2 A list of the last three jobs where the specific splices terminations were installed within the past 12 consecutive months The tabulation shall include splice terminatio
293. es Valves shall be ASME rated for capacity indicated 5 PIPING ACCESSORIES Sel Pipe Hangers and Supports Provide MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods except as specified or indicated otherwise Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21 28 29 or 30 clamps Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping 2582 Strainers Pressure and temperature range shall be for the intended service Provide blowoff outlet with pipe nipple gate valve and discharge pipe nipple Provide stainless steel strainer element with perforations of 0 047 inch for water 0 031 inch for steam mixed with condensate and 0 016 inch for Steam Provide copper alloy or cast iron body strainers in steam and SECTION 23 73 33 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 condensate systems up to 100 psig Provide steel body strainers in steam and condensate systems 100 psig and greater 2 5 3 Traps Provide traps of the types indicated with stainless steel internals Pressure and temperature range shall be for the intended service Traps for steam at 100 psig and
294. ess Contractor s name and address Report date Signature of testing adjusting and balancing Agent who certifies the report 10 Summary of contents including the following a Design versus final performance b Notable characteristics of systems c Description of system operation sequence 11 Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment 12 Data for terminal units including manufacturer type size and fittings 13 Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values 14 Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following a Settings for outside return and exhaust air dampers SQ 001 IKON UI e por SECTION 23 05 93 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Gy d e p f g h E Syst distrib followi 1 WN Air include Conditions of filters Cooling coil wet and dry bulb conditions Face and bypass damper settings at coils Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum itch diameter Inlet vane settings for variable air volume systems Settings for supply air static pressure controller Other system operating conditions that affect performance em Diagrams Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic ution systems Present with single line diagrams and include the ng Quantities of outside supply return and exhaust airflow
295. ess at the intended location 1522 Unsatisfactory Materials Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials Unsatisfactory materials also include man made fills trash refuse or backfills from previous construction Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter frozen material and stones larger than 2 inches The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials 215 3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW GP SW and SP Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC SC ML CL MH and CH Materials classified as GM GP GM GW GM SW SM SP SM and SM shall be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic plasticity index equals zero Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero 1 4 Common Fill Approved unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 1 5 Backfill and Fill Material ASTM D 2487 classification GW GP GM GC SW SP SM SC with a maximum ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35 maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12 and a maximum of 25 percent by weight passing
296. ess per controller Failure of any single controller will not cause the loss of more then 48 control points 2325 Dynamic Control A process that optimizes energy efficiency of HVAC systems air handling units converters chillers and boilers by increasing and decreasing set points or starting and stopping equipment in response to heating and cooling needs of the facility A requirement of dynamic control is knowing the heating cooling demand status of the process Therefore dynamic control requires controllers connected in a communications network 3 6 Firmware Firmware is software programmed into read only memory ROM and erasable programmable read only memory EPROM chips Software may not be changed without physically altering the chip 3 7 Hand Held Terminal A hand held terminal is a manufacturer specific device connected directly to a communications port on a controller through which the controller is accessed and in some cases programmed 3 8 Input Output I O Points I O points refer to analog inputs AI digital inputs DI analog outputs AO and digital outputs DO in a digital controller Another term for digital inputs and outputs is binary inputs and outputs Inputs are from analog sensors temperature pressure humidity flow and digital sensors motor status flow switches switch position and pulse output devices Outputs operate modulating and on off control devices 3 9 I O Expansion U
297. estricted work SECTION 01 35 29 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 4 Transfer to another job 5 Medical treatment beyond first aid 6 Loss of consciousness or 7 A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional even if it did not result in 1 through 6 above Site Safety and Health Officer SSHO superintendent or other qualified or competent person who is responsible for the on site safety and health required for the project The Contractor quality control QC person cannot be the SSHO even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of the QC duties o Steep roof A roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 vertical to horizontal USACE property equipment specified in USACE EM 385 1 1 should be interpreted as Government property and equipment q Weight Handling Equipment WHE Accident A WHE accident occurs when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death material or equipment damage dropped load derailment two blocking overload and collision including unplanned contact between the load crane and or other objects A dropped load derailment two blocking overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or injury occu
298. every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer l 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Full Owner Occupancy The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing adjusting and balancing period Cooperate with the Owner during testing adjusting and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner s operations 126 WARRANTY A General Warranty The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents B National Project Performance Guarantee Provide a guarantee on AABC S National Standards forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing adjusting and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED SECTION 23 05 93 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 ak COORDINATION The purpose of PART 3 is to describe installation or application including preparatory work and post installation cleaning and protection A Coordinate the efforts of factory authorized service representatives for systems and equipment HVAC controls installers and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
299. extual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in the fire alarm control panel The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers Each amplifier shall be single output channel 2 12 1 Construction Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system 2 12 2 Inputs Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance balanced line type Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier 2 12 3 Tone Generator The tone generator shall be of the modular plug in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone that shall slowly ascend from low 500 hertz to high SECTION 28 31 76 Page 21 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1200 hertz and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately 4 seconds The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per
300. f meeting for Design Build Contracts 1 7 322 Weekly Safety Meetings Conduct weekly safety meetings at the project site for all employees The Contracting Officer will be informed of the meeting in advance and be allowed attendance Minutes showing contract title signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed shall be attached to the Contractors daily report 1 73 3 Work Phase Meetings The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance documented by the Contractor at the preparatory initial and follow up phases of quality control inspection The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of safety and health controls 1 8 TRAINING 1 8 1 New Employee Indoctrination New employees prime and sub contractor will be informed of specific site hazards before they begin work Documentation of this orientation shall be kept on file at the project site 1 8 2 Periodic Training Provide Safety and Health Training in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 and the accepted APP Ensure all required training has been accomplished for all onsite employees 1 8 3 Training on Activity Hazard Analysis AHA Prior to beginning a new phase training will be provided to all affected employees to include a review of the AHA to be implemented SECTION 01 35 29 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 ds 9 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN APP The Contractor shall use a qualif
301. f one percent and 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal SECTION 23 09 54 Page 22 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 6 5 Input Switches 2 6 5 1 Insertion Freeze Protection Switch Electric switch shall be capillary type Provide special purpose insertion thermostats with flexible elements a minimum of 20 feet in length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet Switch contacts shall be rated for motor starter circuit voltage being interrupted Switch shall be equipped with auxiliary set of contacts for input of switch status to digital controller Provide additional elements or longer elements for larger coils at the rate of 1 foot of element per 4 square feet of coil Serpentine capillaries perpendicular to the air flow to uniformly sense the entire airflow A freezing condition at 18 inch increments along the sensing element shall activate the thermostatic switch Switch shall require manual reset after activation 2 6 5 2 Electronic Airflow Measurement Stations and Transmitters Provide one on supply and return of each make up air unit a Station Each station shall contain an array of velocity sensing elements and straightening vanes inside a flanged sheet metal casing The velocity sensing elements shall be of the RTD or thermistor type The sensing elements shall be distributed across the duct cross section in the quantity and pattern set forth for measurements and instruments of ASHRAE 3 and SMACNA HVACTAB for th
302. f the removable section shall be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1 16 inch e Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles f Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place or if approved by the Contracting Officer spot welded to the equipment over the ribs Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J hooks and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch centers 3 4 2 4 Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier Upon completion of installation of insulation penetrations shall be caulked Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall be applied over insulation including removable sections with a layer of open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1 16 inch Caulking or vapor barrier tape shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation 3 4 3 Insulation for Hot Equipment Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F including the following a Converters b Heat exchangers c Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F d Hot water storage tanks e Air separation tanks f Surge tanks 3 5 3 1 Insulation Insulation shall
303. f work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on site or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met Perform the following for each definable feature of work a Establish the quality of workmanship required b Resolve conflicts c Review the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met and d Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory 9 4 Follow Up Phase Perform the following for on going work daily or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report a Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements b Maintain the quality of workmanship required c Ensure that testing is performed by an approved laboratory and d Ensure that rework items are being corrected 9 5 Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off Site Work Notify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases 10 SUBMITTAL REVIEW Procedures for submittals are as described in Section entitled Submittal SECTION 01 45 10 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Ta 1 Procedures 11 TESTING Except a
304. faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board for sealing edges of and bonding fibrous glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations for pipe and duct insulation 22522 Contact Adhesive Adhesives may be any of but not limited to the neoprane based rubber based or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 The adhesive shall not adversely affect initially or in service the insulation to which it is applied nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous irritating or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant Natural cross ventilation local mechanical pickup and or general area mechanical ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier than air solvent vapors from lower levels of the works
305. ferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Q Underground Storage Tanks LEJEUNE underground storage tank point T AE Rer NE CEA ud H Fpurnmnonmooos GPS and collect the following attributes ENVUST ID for Under Ground Storage Tank Hazsite ID EH Tank Fuel Type Facility Number X Coordinates Y Coordinates Installation Date YEAR Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing R Aboveground Storage Tanks LEJEUNE aboveground storage tank site 1 GPS and collect the following attributes a b ENVAST ID for Above Ground Storage Tank Hazmat Site ID POL HM etc Contents Facility Number X Coordinates Y Coordinates Date Acquired Year Drawing Number Drawing Type SECTION 01 77 00 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 Contract Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Au S Other Infrastructure Features 1 All newly constructed Infrastructure items may require GIS data Confirmation for such items that have not been referenced in 1 2 2 2 Specific Tasks Section G can be obtained by contacting the Installations and Environment Public Works Department GIS Section At a minimum the following will be required a Facility ID b Installation Date Type Description d Material e Drawing Number f Drawing Type g
306. fication Tests identify determine causes replace repair or calibrate equipment that fails to meet the specification and submit a written report to the Government b Document all tests with detailed test results Explain in detail the nature of each failure and corrective action taken Provide a written report containing test documentation after the Field Tests and again after the Performance Verification Tests Convene a test review meeting at the job site to present the results to the Government As part of this test review meeting demonstrate by performing all portions of the field tests or performance verification test that each failure has been corrected Based on the report and test review meeting the Government will determine either the restart point or successful completion of testing Do not retest until after receipt of written notification by the Government At the conclusion of retest assessment will be repeated 3 3 Contractor s Field Tests Field tests shall include the following sas wl System Inspection Observe the HVAC system in its shutdown condition Check dampers and valves for proper normal positions Document each position for the test report 3 3 2 Calibration Accuracy and Operation of Inputs Test Verify correct calibration and operation of input instruments For each sensor and transmitter including those for temperature pressure humidity and air quality record the reading at the sensor or transmitte
307. fire alarm control panel FACP 3 Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances 4 Recording of the event electronicly in the history log of the fire control system unit 5 Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the SECTION 28 31 76 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph q A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel 2 Transmission of a supervisory signal to a UL listed central station 3 Recording of the event electronicly in the history log of the fire control system unit S A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel 22 Transmission of a trouble signal to a UL listed central station t The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 10 seconds u The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds 3 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS sued Notification Appliance Network The Mass Notification System announcements shall ta
308. fold platforms greater than 6 m 20 feet in height The use of an adequate gate is required Contractor shall ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward Special care shall be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self supported scaffold Systems for the storage of material is prohibited The first tie in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base Work platforms shall be placed on mud sills Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than six feet Delineate fall protection requirements when working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention FP amp P Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis AHA for the phase of work 4 1 Stilts The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction renovation repair or maintenance work is prohibited 5 EQUIPMENT 5 1 Material Handling Equipment a Material handlin
309. from QC manager each submittal for which the contracting officer is approving authority b Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents c Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible and with markings appropriate for action indicated 5 8 Actions Possible Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations a Submittals marked not reviewed will indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and approved is not required does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by contractor or is not complete A submittal marked not reviewed will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete with appropriate action coordination or change b Submittals marked approved approved as submitted authorize contractor to proceed with work covered c Submittals marked approved as noted authorize contractor to proceed with work as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the notations d Submittals marked revise and resubmit or disapproved indicate submittal is incomplete or does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract documents and shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes No work shall proceed fo
310. g g High Visibility Accident Any mishap which may generate publicity and or high visibility h Low slope roof A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 vertical to horizontal i Medical Treatment Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel j Multi Employer Work Site MEWS A multi employer work site as defined by OSHA is one in which many employers occupy the same site The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors k Operating Envelope The area surrounding any crane Inside this envelope is the crane the operator riggers rigging gear between the hook and the load the load and the crane s supporting structure ground rail etc 1 Qualified Person for Fall Protection A person with a recognized degree or professional certifictae extensive knowledge training and experience in the field of fall protection who is capable of performing design analysis and evaluation of fall protection systems and equipment m Recordable Injuries or Illnesses Any work related injury or illness that results in 1 Death regardless of the time between the injury and death or the length of the illness 2 Days away from work 3 R
311. g SD 06 Test Reports Field tests Performance verification tests SD 07 Certificates SECTION 23 09 54 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 6 Contractors Qualifications Training SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Controls and HVAC System Operators Manual DDC Manufacturer s Hardware and Software Manuals SD 11 Closeout Submittals Posted operating instructions Provide administrative and closeout submittals Training course documentation Service organizations Contractor certification OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Protect components from humidity and temperature variations dust and other contaminants within limits published by the manufacturer dr 157 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 Standard Products a Material and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such product using Similar materials design and workmanship The standard products shall have been in commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of similarly sized equipment and materials used under similar circumstances and sold on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures b Products are supported by a local service organization ek 1 DDC Hardware a 1 0 type and characteristics b Resident programs c Communications ports d Protected memory e Operating temperature limits 21 22 DDC C
312. g F Entering water pressure in feet of head or psig Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig Water flow rate in gpm M Pump Test Reports For pumps include the following data Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves AUP TO MOdAaAATWN woop SrPWUHPTOAMAAATAH Unit Data Include the following Unit identification Location Service Make and size Model and serial numbers Water flow rate in gpm Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig Pump rpm Impeller diameter in inches Motor make and frame size Motor horsepower and rpm Voltage at each connection Amperage for each phase Full load amperage and service factor Seal type Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Static head in feet of head or psig Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig Actual impeller size in inches Full open flow rate in gpm Full open pressure in feet of head or psig Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig Final total pressure in feet of head or psig Final water flow rate in gpm Voltage at each connection Amperage for each phase N Instrument Calibration Reports For instrument calibration include the following 1 Report Data Include the following a Instrument type and make b Serial number SECTION 23 05 93
313. g equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer s printed operating instructions b The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions Cx Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA 5 2 Weight Handling Equipment a Cranes must be equipped with 1 Load indicating devices LIDs and a boom angle or radius indicator 2 or load moment indicating devices LMIs 3 Anti two block prevention devices 4 Boom hoist hydraulic relief valve disconnect or shutoff stops hoist when boom reaches a predetermined high angle SECTION 01 35 29 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 5 Boom length indicator for telescoping booms 6 Device to prevent uncontrolled lowering of a telescoping hydraulic boom 7 Device to prevent uncontrolled retraction of a telescoping hydraulic boom b The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated Contractor s operator shall remain with the crane during the spot check c The Contractor shall comply with the crane manufacturer s specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
314. g plugs or other approved methods When work is not in progress securely close open ends of pipe and fittings to prevent entry of water and foreign matter Inspect piping before placing into position e Demolition Remove materials so as not to damage materials which are to remain Replace existing work damaged by Contractor s operations with new work of same construction 23 ADJUSTMENTS Adjust controls and equipment so as to give satisfactory operation Adjust entire water temperature control system and place in operation so that water quantities circulated are as indicated Air duct systems shall be adjusted and balanced so that air quantities at outlets are as indicated and so that distribution from supply outlets is free from drafts and has uniform velocity over the face of each outlet 4 PUMPS After testing adjusting and balancing trim the impellers on all pumps 10 hp and greater to actual flow conditions plus 10 percent discharge head Readjust throttling device to correct flow rate INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL Upon completion of work and at time designated by Contracting Officer provide services of competent technician for period of not less than one 8 hour working day for instruction of Government operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion and before final acceptance of work test each system in Service to demonstrate compliance with t
315. gerants in Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Equipment and Systems ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME ANSI B16 5 1996 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1 2 Through NPS 24 ASME B31 1 2001 Power Piping ANSI ASME B40 1 1991 Special Notice 1992 Gauges Pressure Indicating Dial Type Elastic Element ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 126 1995 Gray Iron Castings ASTM D 638 1995 Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D 792 1991 Density and Specific Gravity Relative Density of Plastics by Displacement ASTM D 1238 1995 Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer ASTM D 1693 1995 Environmental Stress Cracking of Ethylene Plastics SECTION 23 09 54 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code NFPA 90A 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2005 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA SMACNA DCS 1995 Addendum 1997 HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible SMACNA HVACTAB 1993 HVAC Systems Testing Adjusting and Balancing UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 506 1994 R 1994 Bul 1994 1995 and 1996 Specialty Transformers UL 916 1994 Bul 1994 and 1996 R 1996 Energy Management Equipment UL 1449 1985 Errata 1986 Bul 1993 1994 and 1995 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors l2 RELATED REQUIREMEN
316. gid steel conduit IMC rigid nonmetallic conduit or EMT except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral SECTION 26 20 00 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 conductor Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit s installed in conduit and raceways Minimum conduit size shall be 1 2 in in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire rated shafts Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 in Conduit which penetrates fire rated walls fire rated partitions or fire rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping 3513 1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT a Do not install underground b Do not encase in concrete mortar grout or other cementitious materials c Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT d Do not use in areas subject to moisture such as pump rooms e Do not use outdoors 3 1 3 2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit a PVC Schedule 40 1 Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to mechanical equipment
317. greater shall be minimum of ASME Class 150 2 5 4 Pressure Gages Provide single style pressure gage with 4 5 inch dial brass or aluminum case bronze tube gage cock pressure snubber and syphon Provide scale range for intended service 26565 Thermometers Shall be glass filled tube type with non mercury fill All angle adjustable with aluminum housing and 9 inch scale to match intended temperature range Thermometer shall be accurate to 1 scale division 2 5 6 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes entirely through walls ceilings roofs and floors Secure sleeves in position and location during construction Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls ceilings roofs and floors Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve or core drilled hole Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation Seal Space at both ends of sleeve or core drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal In fire walls and fire floors seal both ends of sleeves or core drilled holes with UL listed fill void or cavity material 2 5 6 1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core drilled
318. gth The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal For force mains the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe S47 COMPACTION 3474 Utility Trench in Grass Area Compact full depth of trench to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 3 7 2 Paved Areas Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 98 percent of ASTM D 698 Compact fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 3 8 FINISH OPERATIONS 3 81 Grading Finish grades as indicated within one tenth of one foot Grade areas to drain water away from structures Maintain areas free of trash and debris For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor s operations grade as directed 3 8 2 Topsoil and Seed Provide as specified in Section 32 92 19 SEEDING Scarify existing subgrade Provide 4 inches of topsoil for areas disturbed by the Contractor if this amount of topsoil is available from stripping operations Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen excessively wet extremely dry or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding planting or proper grading Additional topsoil will not be required if work is performed in compliance with stripping and stockpiling requirements Seed shall match existing vegetation Provide seed at 5 pounds per 1000 square feet Provide CID A A 1909 Type I Class 2 10 10 10 anal
319. h Contractor the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications Confined space entry permits SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Preprinted material describing installation of a product system or material including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances hazards and safety precautions SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer s representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer s SECTION 01 33 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 standards or instructions Factory test reports SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals SD 11 Closeout Submittals Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism As built drawings Special warranties Posted operating instructions Training plan 1 2 4 Approving Authority Person authorized to approve submittal 1 2 5 Work As used in this section on and off site construction required by contract documents including labor necessary to produce construction and materials products equipment and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with the requi
320. hall be one foot in length for each 4 square feet of ductwork cross sectional area with a minimum length of 6 feet Probe type duct sensors of one foot length minimum are acceptable in ducts 12 feet square and less Immersion Type Three inches total immersion for use with sensor wells unless otherwise indicated d Sensor Wells Stainless steel material Provide heat sensitive transfer agent between exterior sensor surface and interior well surface e Outside Air Type Provide element on the buildings north side with sunshade to minimize solar effects Mount element at least 3 inches from building outside wall Sunshade shall not inhibit the flow of ambient air across the sensing element Shade shall protect sensing element from snow ice and rain SECTION 23 09 54 Page 21 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2s 2 6 1 4 Temperature Transmitters Transmitters shall have 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output linearly scaled to the temperature sensed Transmitter shall be matched to the sensor factory calibrated and sealed Total error shall not exceed 0 1 percent at any point across the measured span Supply voltage shall be 24 volts ac or dc Transmitters shall have non interactive offset and span adjustments For temperature sensing transmitter stability shall not exceed 0 05 degrees C a year 6 1 1 Temperature Transmitter Spans and Ranges Transmitter spans or ranges shall meet the following a Temperatur
321. hat the line services Contract Number Drawing Number Drawing Type Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing U Demolished Lines LEJEUNE demolished wastewater line 175 Existing attribute information will be copied into the demolished feature class Please add the following attribute data once updated a Date b Drawing Number c Drawing Type d Contract Number e Data Source Existing GIS Data Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing V Fitting LEJEUNE wastewater fitting point 1 Georeference Fitting data and collect the following attributes a Subtype ID BEND CAP CLEANOUT REDUCER TEE WYE etc b Date Acquired Year d Material Size of Diameter f Units g User Flag Named Area h Contract Number i Drawing Type j Drawing Number k X Coordinates 1 Y Coordinates m Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing W Valves LEJEUNE wastewater valve point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a b c d Valves ID Manhole Number associate with valve Date Acquired Year Valve Style Group Gate Check etc Valve Use SECTION 01 77 00 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Ao p Du ho m n Size in Diameter Units of Diameter Valve Elevation Units of Elevation X Coor
322. he intended service Provide full face gaskets for flat face flanged joints and ring gaskets for raised face flanged joints Bolts Provide ASTM A 193 A 193M Grade B7 bolts Nuts ASTM A 194 A 194M Grade 7 Washers Provide steel flat circular washers under bolt heads and nuts Valves Valves shall have flanged end connections except valves smaller than 2 5 inches may have threaded end connections with a union on one side of the valve Solder end connections may be used for connections between copper SECTION 23 73 33 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 alloy valves and copper tubing 2 4 5 1 Gate Valves MSS SP 80 Class 125 except sizes 2 5 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP 70 Class 125 2 4 5 2 Globe and Angle Valves MSS SP 80 Class 125 except sizes 2 5 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP 85 Class 125 2 4 5 3 Check Valves MSS SP 80 Class 125 swing check except sizes 2 5 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP 71 Class 125 2 4 5 4 Butterfly Valves MSS SP 67 except sizes 2 5 inches and larger shall have lugged or wafer body designed for installation between ASME Class 150 flanges Valves shall have two position lever handles except when infinite position lever handles are indicated 2 4 5 5 Ball Valves Full port design copper alloy body except sizes 2 5 inches and larger shall be cast iron body Valves shall have two position lever handles Ball valves may be
323. he Contractor shall also be required to pay any fines penalties or fees related to the illegal disposal of construction debris 6 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE 46 1 Hazardous Waste Generation Handle generated hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 262 6 2 Hazardous Waste Disposal Dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with Federal State and local regulations especially 40 CFR 263 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 265 Removal of hazardous waste from Government property shall not occur without prior notification and coordination with the Contracting officer Transport hazardous waste by a permitted licensed or registered hazardous waste transported to a TSD facility Hazardous waste shall be properly identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 49 CFR 172 Provide completed manifest for hazardous waste disposed of off site to the Contracting Officer within 7 days of disposal Hazardous waste shall not be brought onto the station 6 3 Hazardous Waste Storage Store hazardous waste in containers in accordance with 49 CFR 178 Identify hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261 and 40 CFR 262 Identify hazardous waste generated within the confines of the station by the station s EPA generator identification number 6 4 Spills of Oil and Hazardous Materials Take precautions to prevent spills of oil and hazardous material In the event of a spill immediately notify the Contracting Officer Spill response shall b
324. he Contractor shall use the critical path method CPM to schedule and control construction activities The Network shall have a minimum of 25 SECTION 01 32 16 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 I activities and a maximum of 50 activities The schedule shall identify as a minimun a Construction time for all major systems and components b Manpower requirements for each activity c Major submittals and submittal processing time and d Major equipment lead time 4 1 CPM Submittals and Procedures Submit all network analysis and updates in hard copy Also submit CPM network schedule on compact disk CD The network analysis system shall be submitted using SureTrak 3 0 software and be capable of running on an IBM compatible computer IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines operating with Microsoft Windows XP The network analysis system shall be kept current with changes made to reflect the actual progress and status of the construction 5 UPDATED SCHEDULES Update the construction schedule and equipment delivery schedule at monthly intervals or when schedule has been revised Reflect any changes occurring since the last update Submit copies of the purchase orders and confirmation of the delivery dates as directed PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 32 16 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050
325. he QC program shall cover construction operations on site and off site and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence 1 5 QC ORGANIZATION 1 5 1 QC Manager 1 5 1 1 Duties Provide a QC Manager at the work site to manage and implement the QC program The QC Manager is required to attend the QC Plan meeting attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting conduct the QC meetings perform the three phases of control perform submittal review ensure testing is performed and prepare QC certifications and documentation required in this Contract The QC Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and documentation performed by the QC specialists In addition to managing and implementing the QC program the QC Manager may perform the duties of project superintendent 15 2 Qualifications An individual with a minimum of five years experience as a foreman super intendent inspector QC Manager project manager or construction manager on similar size construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract SECTION 01 45 10 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1252123 Construction Quality Management Training In addition to the above experience and education requirements the QC Manager shall have completed the course entitled Construction Quality Management for Contractors This course is periodically offered by the Navy and the C
326. he contract requirements Adjust controls and balance systems prior to final acceptance of completed Systems Test controls through every cycle of operation Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of required function Correct defects in work provided by Contractor and repeat tests Furnish steam fuel water electricity instruments connecting devices and personnel for tests Flush and clean piping before placing in operation Clean equipment piping strainers ducts and filters 6 1 Air Ducts Obtain approval before applying insulation 25622 Equipment 6 22 Field Testing Test each item of equipment in operation for continuous period of not less than 24 hours under every condition of operation in accordance with each equipment manufacturer s recommendation Verify that the equipment operating parameters are within limits recommended by the manufacturer 6 3 Additional Field Testing Provide testing adjusting and balancing TAB of ducts piping and SECTION 23 73 33 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 equipment under Section 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting Balancing End of Section SECTION 23 73 33 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL s al REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in th
327. he following 1 For lifts of personnel the plan shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926 500 g 2 For barge mounted mobile cranes barge stability calculations identifying barge list and trim based on anticipated loading and load charts based on calculated list and trim Teh amount of list and trim shall be within the crane manufacturer s requirements f Alcohol and Drug Abuse Plan 1 Describe plan for random checks and testing with pre employment screening in accordance with the DFAR Clause subpart 252 223 7004 Drug Free Work Force 2 Description of the on site prevention program SECTION 01 35 29 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 des g Fall Protection and Prevention FP amp P Plan The plan shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction It shall address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 1 8 m 6 feet A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the plan The plan shall include fall protection and prevention systems equipment and methods employed for every phase of work responsibilities assisted rescue self rescue and evacuation procedures training requirements and monitoring methods Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be revised every six months for lengthy projects reflecting any changes during the cours
328. he location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency phone number 911 ANY FIRE NO MATTER HOW SMALL SHALL BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY g Obtain services from th FIRE DIVISION for HOT WORK within or around flammable materials such as fuel systems welding cutting on fuel pipes or confined spaces such as sewer wet wells manholes vaults etc that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 1 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE The Contractor shall provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers for all required confined spaces Signs wording DANGER PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DO NOT ENTER in bold letters a minimum of 25 mm one inch in height and constructed to be clearly legible with all paint removed The signal word DANGER shall be red and readable from 1 52 m 5 feet 2 FALL PROTECTION ANCHORAGE Fall protection anchorage conforming to ANSI Z359 1 installed under the Supervision of a qualified person in fall protection shall be left in place for continued customer use and so identified by signage stating the capacity of the anchorage strength and number of persons who may be tied off to it at any one time PART 3 EXECUTION 3 35 24 CONSTRUCTION AND OR OTHER WORK The Contractor shall comply with USACE EM 385 1 1 NFPA 241 the APP the AHA Federal and or State OSHA regulations and other related submittals and activity f
329. hese areas 6 2 Special Restrictions Regarding Access of Vehicles and Parking Contractor is to submit a schedule of vehicles and personnel to the Contracting Officer at least 5 days prior to commencing work Contracting Officer shall direct the Contractor as to the permits and passes required 26 2 1 Interruption of Vehicular Traffic If during the performance of work it becomes necessary to modify vehicular traffic patterns at any locations notify the Contracting Officer at least 15 calendar days prior to the proposed modification date and provide a Traffic Control Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval The plan shall be in accordance with State and local regulations and the FHWA MUTCD Part VI Make all notifications and obtain any permits required for modification to traffic movements outside Station s jurisdiction Provide cones signs barricades lights or other traffic control devices and personnel required to control traffic zd STORAGE AREAS The Contract Clause entitled FAR 52 236 10 Operations and Storage Areas and the following apply Tal Storage Size and Location The location and size of storage area shall be coordinated through the Contracting Officer Tr 2 Storage in Existing Buildings The Contractor shall be working in the existing building the storage of material will not be allowed in the building Provide 8 foot high security fence with a lockable gate around the storage area
330. hlorinated biphenyls di isocynates lead based paint are prohibited The Contracting Officer upon written request by the Contractor may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials 3 1 3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material The design should have identified materials such as PCB lead paint and friable and non friable asbestos If additional material not indicated that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous If material is not hazardous or poses no danger the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52 243 4 Changes and FAR 52 236 2 Differing Site Conditions 342 PRE OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING Contractors are required to apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance As a minimum the request should include the location of the outage utilities being affected duration of outage and any necessary Sketches Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section Once approved and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down the Contractor shall attend
331. hms b Full as built sequence of operations c Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor not Cx tests d Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system e Full as built print out of software program f Electronic copy on disk or CD of the entire program for this facility g Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES Furnish the O amp M data packages specified in individual technical sections The required information for each O amp M data package is as follows 1 5 Data Package 1 a Safety precautions b Cleaning recommendations Maintenance and repair procedures d Warranty information e Contractor information f Spare parts and supply list Data Package 2 a Safety precautions b Normal operations c Environmental conditions d Lubrication data e Preventive maintenance plan and schedule f Cleaning recommendations g Maintenance and repair procedures h Removal and replacement instructions i Spare parts and supply list SECTION 01 78 23 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Parts identification Warranty information Contractor information Data Package 3 Safety precautions Operator prestart Startup shutdown and post shutdown procedures Normal operations Emergency o
332. hority having jurisdiction to mean the Contracting Offices SECTION 28 31 76 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Designated Representative COR b The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer s literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather humidity and temperature variation dirt and dust and other contaminants 14 7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE O amp M INSTRUCTIONS de Pl System and System Equipment The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include a Manufacturer Data Package 5 as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA b Operating manual outlining step by step procedures required for system startup operation and shutdown The manual shall include the manufacturer s name model number service manual parts list and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features c Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and troubleshooting guide The manuals shall include conduit layout equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed d The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion detailing both equipment and software requirements e Software deliver
333. iance with contract requirements 3522441 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations NFPA 70B NETA ATS and referenced ANSI standards Include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS 3x21 1 600 Volt Cable Tests Perform tests after wiring is completed connected and ready for operation but prior to placing system in service and before any branch circuit breaker is closed a Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with contract plans and specifications 2 Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer s recommended values using a calibrated torque wrench In the absence of manufacturer s data use NETA recommended values 3 Check cable color coding for compliance with contract Specifications b Electrical Tests 1 Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductor applied potential shall be 1000 volts DC for 1 minute minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 2 megohms 2 Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection SECTION 33 71 02 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 2 152 Medium Voltage Cables Perform tests after installation of cable splices and terminators and before terminating to equipment a Visual and M
334. iar with HVAC systems 3 4 1 DDC Training Phase I The first class shall be taught for a period of 2 consecutive training days at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled Performance Verification Test The first course shall be taught in a government provided facility on base Training shall be classroom but have hands on operation of similar digital controllers A maximum of 5 personnel will attend this course Upon completion of this course each student using appropriate documentation should be able to perform elementary operations with guidance and describe the general hardware architecture and functionality of the system This course shall include but not be limited to a Theory of operation b Hardware architecture C Operation of the system d Operator commands e Control sequence programming f Data base entry g Reports and logs h Alarm reports i Diagnostics 3 4 2 DDC Training Phase II The second course shall be taught in the field using the operating equipment at the project site for a total of 2 consecutive days A SECTION 23 09 54 Page 35 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 maximum of 5 personnel will attend the course The course shall consist of hands on training under the constant monitoring of the instructor Course content should duplicate DDC Training Phase I course as applied to the installed system The instructor shall determine the level of the password to be issued to each student before each
335. ic waterways and flanges a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert or dowel as required at support point method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap circumferential lap butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs and terminating points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines both interior and exterior even when the same type of insulation is used for these services Duct Insulation Display Sections Display sample sections for rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the job A temporary covering shall be used to enclose and protect display sections for duct insulation exposed to weather 5 STORAGE Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer s unopened containers Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather humidity dirt dust and other contaminants The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty dusty wet or contaminated by some other means 6 RECYCLED MATERIALS Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable provided that the materials meets all other requirements of this section The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight Fiberglass 20 25 percent glass cullet by weight Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material PART 2 PRODUCTS 235 1 GENERAL MAT
336. ied for product data b Submit administrative submittals required under SD 19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals to conform to Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 8 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS 1 8 1 Samples and Submittalsr Except as otherwise noted submit samples and submittals to DAVIS amp FLOYD INC 1319 HWY 72 221 EAST GREENWOOD SOUTH CAROLINA 29649 a ees gt ees Administrative Submittals Submit administrative submittals for asbestos lead removal and environmental protection plan to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction 1 8 1 2 Fire Protection and Fire Alarm System Submittals Submit fire protection and fire alarm system submittals to NAVFAC MidLant NAVFAC MIDLANT Fire Protection Engineer 9742 Maryland Ave Building Z 140 Room 219 Norfolk VA 23511 ROICC OICC 1 8 1 3 TAB Submittals Submit to ROICC OICC for all projects 1 8 2 Shop Drawings Product Data and O amp M Data As soon as practicable after award of the contract and before procurement or fabrication submit shop drawings product data and O amp M Data required in the technical sections of this specification PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used SECTION 01 33 00 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 33 00 Page 13 CONTRACT NO SUBMITTAL REGISTER TITLE AND LOCATION HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Q o z 5 2 d o 2
337. ied person to prepare the written Site specific APP Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385 1 1 and as supplemented herein Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in USACE EM 385 1 1 Appendix A Minimum Basic Outline for Preparation of Accident Prevention Plan Where a paragraph or subparagraph element is not applicable to the work to be performed indicate Not Applicable next to the heading Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below at paragraph 1 8 1 The APP shall be job specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written The APP shall interface with the Contractor s overall safety and health program Any portions of the Contractor s overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made site specific The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the Controlling authority for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out The APP shall be signed by the per
338. ific names and telephone numbers for reference Testing inspection calibration and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies NICET with a minimum of 5 years experience inspecting testing and calibrating electrical distribution and generation equipment systems and devices 4 2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements identify deficiencies and recommend corrective action when appropriate Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10 days after test is completed 4 3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date Do not perform testing until after test procedure has been approved PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 24 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections Test methods procedures and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with NETA ATS the manufacturer s recommendations and paragraph entitled Field Quality Control of each applicable specification section Tes
339. ifications specified herein 29 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance tests and inspections SD 07 Certificates Qualifications of organization and lead engineering technician Acceptance test and inspections procedure 4 OUALITY ASSURANCE 4 1 Qualifications Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide inspection testing calibration and adjustment of the electrical distribution system equipment listed in paragraph entitled Acceptance Tests and Inspections herein Organization shall be independent of the supplier manufacturer and installer of the equipment The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor No work required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a second tier subcontractor a Submit name and qualifications of organization Organization shall have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials devices installations and systems for a minimum of 5 years The organization shall have a calibration program and test instruments used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS b Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician performing the required testing services Include a list of three SECTION 26 08 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 comparable jobs performed by the technician with spec
340. induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads UFC 3 310 03A uses parameters for the building not for the equipment in the building therefore corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required Loadings determined using UFC 3 310 03A are based on strength design therefore AISC 325 shall be used for the design The bracing for the following electrical equipment and systems shall be developed by the Contractor Conduit runs cable bus 23 5 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2 1 2 inches trade size and fastened directly to the building structural system All other interior conduit shall be seismically protected as specified 4 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 242 Rigidly Mounted Equipment The following specific items of equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3 310 03A Chapter 10 Each item of rigid electrical equipment shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint Piping electrical conduit etc which cross the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal directions Engine Generators Transformers Switch Boards and Switch Gears SECTION
341. ineer and shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace Contractor Designed Bracing Copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings Calculations shall be approved certified stamped and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer Calculations shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace SECTION 26 05 48 00 10 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 i L Ls 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 General Requirements The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below 3 2 Electrical Equipment Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications Control Panels Air Handling Units Switchboards Floor Mounted Switchgear Transfer Switches Unit Substations Transformers 2353 3 Electrical Systems The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this specification Standby Generator 3 4 Contractor Designed Bracing The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3 310 03A and additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer Resistance to lateral forces
342. ing programs between the workstation and digital controllers c Provide the quantity of digital controllers indicated on the drawings or as required to perform required climate control energy management and alarm functions The quantity of controllers shall be no less than the number shown on drawings All material used shall be currently in production sd Direct Digital Controllers DDC hardware shall be UL 916 rated 1 2 Distributed Control Apply digital controllers in a distributed control manner 2123 I O Point Limitation Total number of I O hardware points including those communicated over a LAN used by a single stand alone digital controller including I O expansion units shall not exceed 48 1 4 Environmental Operating Limits Provide digital controllers that operate in environmental conditions between 32 and 120 degrees F 1 59 Stand Alone Control Provide stand alone digital controllers 1 6 Internal Clock Provide a clock with each stand alone controller Each controller shall have its clock backed up by a battery or capacitor with sufficient capacity to maintain clock operation for a minimum of 72 hours during power outage led Memory a Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support required control communication trends alarms and messages SECTION 23 09 54 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 b Memory Protection Programs residing in memory shall be protected
343. ing Survey Grade GPS The Geoid99 CONUS epoch shall be used for survey grade data collection or a more current epoch if available at the time of this contract Horizontal accuracy for survey grade GPS data collection shall be 1 centimeter at 1 sigma 2 PPM Every effort shall be made to capture feature locations without using offsets unless obstructions are present 2 Infrastructure Field verify and collect GPS coordinates for all new Infrastructure data utilizing Sub meter Grade GPS The Geoid99 CONUS epoch shall be used for survey grade data collection or a more current epoch if available at the time of this project Horizontal accuracy for Sub meter grade GPS data collection shall be 1 meter at 1 sigma 2 PPM Creation of GIS Spatial data 1 Locate verify and or GPS all newly constructed features in order to create spatial and non spatial GIS data 2 Spatially reference in data deliverable where new utility features tie in from construction to existing utility systems 33 All utility data will be created using GIS spatially connectivity rules which specifies that vertex edge and endpoints be snapped to features within the utility system Features will be snapped to the appropriate utility item 4 Correct Topology will be used for all features Feature where edges meet should not overlap The contractor shall review current GIS data for the MCB Camp Lejeune s IGIR database and update the newly demolished utility for
344. ing angle of fire dampers which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation Duct insulation and vapor retarder vapor barrier shall cover the collar neck and any un insulated surfaces of diffusers registers and grills Vapor retarder vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation Sheet Metal Duct shall be sealed Installation on Concealed Duct a For rectangular oval or round ducts flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers b For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners c For rectangular oval and round ducts mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners d Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners self stick pins where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze t
345. ing factors E Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals SECTION 23 05 93 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 35 3 1 Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents 2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts 7 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES A Compensating for Diversity When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the fan design airflow volume place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts B Pressure Independent Variable Air Volume Systems After the fan Systems have been adjusted adjust the variable air volume systems as follows 1 Set outside air dampers at minimum and return and exhaust air dampers at a position that simulates full cooling load 2 Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply fan airflow and static pressure Measure static pressure Adjust system static pressure so the entering
346. ing normal operations the control system shall be capable of monitoring and displaying the following operating parameters Access and operation of display shall not require opening or removing any panels or doors a Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures b Self diagnostic C Operation status d Operating hours e Number of starts f Compressor status on or off g Refrigerant discharge and suction pressures h Oil pressure 2 5 4 3 Programmable Setpoints The control system shall be capable of being reprogrammed directly at the unit The programmable setpoints shall include the following as a minimum a Leaving Chilled Water Temperature b Time Clock Calender Date 2 5 4 4 Safety Controls with Manual Reset Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which require manual reset a Low chilled water temperature protection b High condenser refrigerant discharge pressure protection c Low evaporator pressure protection d Chilled water flow detection e High motor winding temperature protection SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 f Low oil flow protection if applicable 2 5 4 5 Safety Controls with Automatic Reset Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which provide automatic reset a Over under voltage protection b Chilled water flow interl
347. ing that furnished by the Government shall become the property of Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune and will not be issued distributed or published by the Contractor 1 2 2 7 Milestones and Meetings The Consultant shall comply with the schedule submittal dates presented in tThe Consultant shall comply with the schedule submittal dates presented in the following table Each Phase of large projects will follow the schedule submittal All meetings will be held with a GIS Specialist present from Camp Lejeune s I amp E Public Works GIS Section Schedule Date No later than Submittal Date Kick off meeting Before GPS GIS Work Commence 10 15 completion Review GIS Data Comments 50 completion Review GIS Data Comments 100 completion Draft Review GIS Data Comments 20 Days After Receipt of Comments Final Product Due 1 2 3 As Built Record of Materials Furnish a record of materials Where several manufacturers brands types or classes of the item listed have been used in the project designate specific areas where each item was used Designations shall be keyed to the areas and spaces depicted on the contract drawing Furnish the record of materials used in the following format MATERIALS SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER MATERIALS USED WHERE DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER S USED DESIGNATION 1 3 EQUIPMENT PRODUCT WARRANTIES 1 31 Equipment Product Warranty List Furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing
348. injured extent of property damage if any extent of injury if known and brief description of accident to include type of construction equipment used PPE used etc Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on site and Government investigation is conducted l 14 3 Monthly Exposure Reports Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be attached to the monthly billing request This report is a compilation of employee hours worked each month for all site workers both prime and subcontractor The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special forms SECTION 01 35 29 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 14 4 Regulatory Citations and Violations Contact the Contracting Officer immediately of any OSHA or other regulatory agency inspection or visit and provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of each citation report and contractor response Correct violations and citations promptly and provide written corrective actions to the Contracting Officer 1 14 5 Crane Reports Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections 1 14 6 Certificate of Compliance The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity under this contract see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate Certifi
349. insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used If nesting size insulation is used the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12 20 Mitered Insulation Elbow Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges unions valves anchors fittings and accessories terminations seams joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1 16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape standard grade silver white black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1 16 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation
350. inuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection e Include training information for employees who will be involved as entrants and attendants for the work Conform to Section 06 1 06 of USACE EM 385 1 1 f Daily Entry Permit Post the permit in a conspicuous place close to the confined space entrance SECTION 01 35 29 Page 24 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 3 9 CRYSTALLINE SILICA Grinding abrasive blasting and foundry operations of construction materials containing crystalline silica shall comply with OSHA regulations such as 29 CFR 1910 94 and USACE EM 385 1 1 Appendix C The Contractor shall develop and implement effective exposure control and elimination procedures to include dust control systems engineering controls and establishment of work area boundaries as well as medical surveillance training air monitoring and personal protective equipment HOUSEKEEPING 10 1 Clean Up All debris in work areas shall be cleaned up daily or more frequently if necessary Construction debris may be temporarily located in an approved location however garbage accumulation must be removed each day 10 2 Falling Object Protection All areas must be barricaded to safeguard employees When working overhead barricade the area below to prevent entry by unauthorized employees Construction warning tape and signs shall be posted so they are clearly visible from all possible access point
351. ion during delivery on site storage and handling SECTION 32 92 19 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 12521422 Fertilizer Sulfur and Lime Delivery Deliver to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer s chemical analysis name trade name trademark and indication of conformance to state and federal laws Instead of containers fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information 1 542 Storage 1 5 2 1 Seed Fertilizer Sulfur and Lime Storage Store in cool dry locations away from contaminants 1 5 2 2 Topsoil Prior to stockpiling topsoil treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non selective herbicide Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil 1 5 2 3 Handling Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles 1 6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS 1 6 1 Restrictions Do not plant when the ground is frozen snow covered muddy or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit 1 7 TIME LIMITATIONS 14 7 1 Seed Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2d SEED 221 71 Classification Provide State certified seed of the latest season s crop delivered in original sealed packages bearing producer s guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures purity germination weedseed content and inert material Label in conformance wi
352. ire and safety regulations The most stringent standard shall prevail i 1 Hazardous Material Use Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material Any work or storage involving hazardous chemicals or materials must be done in a manner that will not expose Government or SECTION 01 35 29 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Contractor employees to any unsafe or unhealthful conditions Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent Government or Contractor employees from being exposed to any hazardous condition that could result from the work or storage The Prime Contractor shall keep a complete inventory of hazardous materials brought onto the work site Approval by the Contracting Officer of protective measures and storage area is required prior to the start of the work 3 142 Hazardous Material Exclusions Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing non ionizing radiation with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources as well as materials which contain asbestos mercury or polyc
353. iscovered before and during performance of testing adjusting and balancing procedures 39 PREPARATION A Prepare a testing adjusting and balancing plan that includes Strategies and step by step procedures B Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports Verify the following Permanent electrical power wiring is complete Hydronic systems are filled clean and free of air Automatic temperature control systems are operational Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed Balance smoke and fire dampers are open Hn SECTION 23 05 93 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 6 Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational 7 Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided 8 Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met 3 4 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section B Cut insulation ducts pipes and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures After testing and balancing close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed Restore vapor barrier and finish a
354. isting surface 342542 Stripping Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for backfilling Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed 3 4263 Unsuitable Material Remove vegetation debris decayed vegetable matter sod mulch and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs Bad EXCAVATION Excavate to contours elevation and dimensions indicated Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location Keep excavations free from water Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor s operations soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed Refill with backfill and fill material satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Unless specified otherwise refill excavations cut below indicated depth with satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated without specific di
355. it shall not exceed 0 5 degree F which includes sensor error and digital controller A D conversion resolution error Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded cable for thermistors 262122 Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Provide RTD sensors with 1000 ohm or higher platinum elements that are compatible with the digital controllers Sensors shall be encapsulated in epoxy series 300 stainless steel anodized aluminum or copper Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0 1 percent 1 ohm of expected ohms 1000 ohms at 32 degrees F Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0 25 degree F cumulative Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without transmitters is preferred provided controller supports direct connection of RTDs When RTDs are connected directly to the controller keep lead resistance error to 0 25 degree F or less Total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0 5 degree F which includes sensor error lead resistance error or 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC transmitter error and A D conversion resolution error 6 1 3 Temperature Sensor Details a Room Type Conceal element behind protective cover matched to the room interior Room temperature sensors connected directly to application specific controllers shall have integral pushbutton System override digital input button and a setpoint adjustment lever b Duct Averaging Type Continuous averaging RTDs for ductwork applications s
356. it the following in accordance with section 01 33 00 Submittals Procedures SD 02 Shop Drawings Layout and location drawings SECTION 26 06 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SD 03 Product Data Ground rods Grounding and bonding connectors Grounding and bonding conductors sD 06 Test Reports Submit report of results of acceptance checks and tests specified by paragraph entitled Field Quality Control Ground resistance tests 122 1 Layout and location drawings Provide shop drawings showing location and size of ground rod 1 22 Ground resistance tests Upon completion and before final acceptance of the work submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system including the location of the rod and grounding system and soil conditions at the time the measurements were taken PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GROUND RODS Provide ground rods made of copper clad steel conforming to UL 467 Provide ground rods that are not less than 3 4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length 2 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTORS IEEE 837 UL 467 pressure type connector bolted compression clamp and exothermic weld Provide type and size of connectors required for the installation 2 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS Solid bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 1 for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller and stranded bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8 for sizes No 6 AWG and larg
357. itions will initiate a call and report to the computer Otherwise alarms will be stored and automatically downloaded when a communications link occurs The following conditions shall generate alarms a Motor is commanded on or off but the motor status input indicates no change b Temperature humidity or pressure strays outside selectable limits C analog input takes a value indicating sensor failure d A module is not communicating on the LAN e A power outage occurs 3 10 Messages Messages shall be operator defined and assigned to alarm or status conditions Messages shall be displayed on the workstation or printer when these conditions occur 43 Lil Trending DDC system shall have the capability to trend all I O and virtual points Points may be associated into groups A trend report may be set up for each group The period between logging consecutive trend values shall range from one minute to 60 minutes at a minimum The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 30 per variable When trend memory is full the most recent data shall overwrite the oldest data Trend data shall be capable of being uploaded to computer Trend data shall be available on a real time basis trend data shall appear numerically and graphically on a connected computer s screen as the data is processed from the DDC system Trend reports shall be capable of uploading to computer for storage 23212 Status Display Current
358. itors to the work site 1 13 2 Contractor Quality Control Report Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every Seven consecutive calendar days of no work and on the last day of a no work period Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule Contractor Quality Control Reports are to be prepared signed and dated by the QC Manager and shall contain the following information SECTION 01 45 10 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Identify the control phase and the definable feature of work b Results of the Preparatory Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the drawings and specifications have been reviewed submittals have been approved materials comply with approved submittals materials are stored properly preliminary work was done correctly the testing plan has been reviewed and work methods and schedule have been discussed c Results of the Initial Phase meetings held including the location of the definable feature of work and a list of personnel present at the meeting Indicate in the report that for this definable feature of work the preliminary work was done correctly samples have been prepared and approved the workm
359. ize 3 4 inch with maximum 3 percent retained on 1 4 inch screen The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972 Topsoil shall be free of sticks stones roots and other debris and objectionable materials 2 53 SOIL CONDITIONERS Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with Composition standard for topsoil as specified herein 25 3 1 Lime Standard grade hydrate or burnt limestone SECTION 32 92 19 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 3 2 Aluminum Sulfate Commercial grade 245 343 Sulfur Standard grade 2 3 4 Sand Clean and free of materials harmful to plants 2 4 FERTILIZER 2 4 Granular Fertilizer Organic granular controlled release fertilizer 1 15 15 15 50 slow release N2 with trace elements for seeded areas 2 5 MULCH Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds mold and other deleterious materials 2 51 Straw Stalks from oats wheat rye barley or rice Furnish in air dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Straw shall contrain no fertile seed 2 6 WATER Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no elements toxic to plant life PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Se Led EXTENT OF WORK Provide soil preparation including soil conditioners as required fertilizing seeding and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surf
360. jacket is not required In high abuse areas such as traffic areas in equipment rooms and mechanical rooms aluminum jackets or SECTION 23 07 00 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 greater than 3ply vapor barrier weatherproofing self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed product less than 0 0000 permeability standard grade embossed silver white amp black shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level 3 6 2 a Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than 1 1 2 inches Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for circumferential joints Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on 4 inch centers if not factory self sealing If staples are used they shall be sealed per item e below Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems Factory self sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation The lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Stapler shall be used only if specifically recommended by
361. k laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician s testing procedures techniques and other items pertinent to testing for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract 11 25 Test Results Cite applicable Contract requirements tests or analytical procedures used Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters CONFORMS or DOES NOT CONFORM to the specification requirements whichever is applicable Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports Furnish the signed reports certifications and other documentation to the Contracting Officer via the QC Manager Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month Attach a copy of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month 1 12 QC CERTIFICATIONS 142 426 Contractor Quality Control Report Certification Each Contractor Quality Control Report shall contain the following statement On behalf of the Contractor I certify that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best of my knowledge except as noted in this report 1122 Invoic
362. ke priority over all other function of the system including the audible and visual output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state All fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the audible and visual notification appliances 902 Base Wide Control If a base wide control system for mass notification exists on the base the autonomous control unit shall communicates with the central control unit of the base wide system The autonomous control unit shall receive commands messages from the central control unit and provide status information 4 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION AL Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection For systems having circuits located outdoors communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62 41 Cables and conductors that serve as communications links shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform s a A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage SECTION 28 31 76 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes b An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes Protection shall be provided at the equipment Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors r
363. l Relays Shall be double pole double throw DPDT UL listed with contacts rated to the application indicator light and dust proof enclosure Light indicator is lit when coil is energized and is off when coil is not energized Relays shall be socket type plug into a fixed base and replaceable without need of tools or removing wiring Encapsulated PAM type relays are permissible for terminal control applications 2 52 Solenoid Air Valves Each valve shall have three port operation common normally open and normally closed Internal parts shall be brass bronze or stainless Steel Valves shall be rated at 50 psig minimum when used in a control System operating at 25 psig or less or 150 psig when used in a control System operating in the range 25 to 100 psig 2 8 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION For control power provide a new dedicated source 120 volts or less 60 Hz three wire black white and green Run green ground wire to panel ground conduit grounds are not sufficient SECTION 23 09 54 Page 26 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 24 8 1 Transformers Transformers shall conform to UL 506 Power digital controllers and terminal control units TCU s from dedicated circuit breakers with surge protection specified Transformers for digital controllers serving terminal equipment on lower level LANs may be grouped to have specified surge protection sized for the number of controllers on a single transfor
364. l includes a document which is to be used in project or become part of project record other than as a submittal do not apply contractor s approval stamp to document but toa separate sheet accompanying document Operation and Maintenance Manual Data Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data Include components required in that section and the various technical sections QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS Number of Copies of Product Data Submit five copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval only by the Contracting Officer Submit three copies of submittals of product data for operation and maintenance manuals Number of Copies of Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data SECTION 01 33 00 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 7 3 Number of Samples a Submit two samples or two sets of samples showing range of variation of each required item One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be returned to contractor b Submit one sample panel Include components listed in technical section or as directed c Submit one sample installation where directed d Submit one sample of non solid materials 1 7 4 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals a Unless otherwise specified submit administrative submittals compliance with quantity requirements specif
365. l shall be steel galvanized 16 gage for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 in and 14 gage for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 in Provide in length required for the application with screw cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 PART 3 EXECUTION Sd INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and to requirements specified herein 3 1 1 Underground Service Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection 3 1 2 Service Entrance Identification Service entrance disconnect devices switches and enclosures shall be labeled and identified as such 321221 Labels Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure as permitted by NFPA 70 each enclosure new and existing shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices Label at minimum shall indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph entitled Nameplates Use lettering of at least 0 25 in in height and engrave on black on white matte finish Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70 3 123 Wiring Methods Provide insulated conductors installed in ri
366. lation Jackets Pipe Insulation Materials Jackets A complete list of materials including manufacturer s descriptive technical literature performance data catalog cuts and installation instructions The product number k value thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included Materials furnished under this section of the specification shall be submitted at one time SECTION 23 07 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 des SD 04 Samples Thermal Insulation After approval of materials actual sections of installed systems properly insulated in accordance with the specification requirements shall be displayed Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site Each material used shall be identified by indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material and the material by each manufacturer intended to meet the requirement The Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the construction period Upon completion of construction the display sample sections will be closed and sealed Pipe Insulation Display Sections Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee a valve dielectr
367. le and other utilities c When rock is encountered remove to a depth of at least 3 inches below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 1 4 inch d Do not unreel and pull cables into the trench from one end Cable bedding and cover shall consist of material which would pass a 1 4 inch screen with no sharp material e Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified on the plans and herein 31 3 Restoration Replace sod which has been removed as soon as possible after backfilling is completed Restore areas disturbed by trenching storing of dirt cable laying pad construction and other work to original condition and maintain until final acceptance Provide necessary topsoiling fertilizing liming Seeding sodding sprigging or mulching 3 1 3 52 Crossing Cables Separate cables crossing other cables or metal piping from each other by not less than 12 inches of well tamped earth 3 1 3 3 Splicing Provide cables in one piece without splices between connections except SECTION 33 71 02 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 3 3 where the distance exceeds the lengths in which cables are manufactured 1 3 4 Bends Bends in cables shall have an inner radius not less than those specified in NFPA 70 for the type of cable specified 1 3 5 Horizontal Slack Leave approximately 3 feet of horizontal slack in the ground on each end of
368. le ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer s instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground electrode under test End of Section SECTION 33 71 02 Page 14
369. le of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge In the event the batteries are fully discharged 18 Volts dc the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided 10 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL FACP FMCP Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel the unit enclosures shall match exactly Each control unit shall provide power supervision control and logic for the entire system utilizing solid state modular components internally mounted and arranged for easy access Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt 60 hertz normal building power supply Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure internal component placement and operation Visual indication of alarm Supervisory or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters that at least 32 are field changeable The MNS
370. led Work Outside Regular Hours Interruption timeframe shall be estimated to the closest hour and provided in writing to the Contracting Officer for approval The interruption timeframe includes time for deactivation and reactivation Do not proceed without written approval of outage from the Contracting Officer d Coordination All Contractors shall coordinate their respective tie ins to occur during one outage per barracks if possible Reasons justifying additional or separate outages must be presented in writing to the Contracting Officer for approval Additionally only one outage at the central chiller plant will be allowed unless justified in writing and approved by the Contracting Officer e Operation of Station Utilities The contractor shall not operate nor disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system including water sewer electrical and steam Services The Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of work The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required 12 2 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS Contract Clause FAR 52 204 2 Security Requirements and Alternate II PAC 5252 236 9301 Special Working Conditions and Entry to Work Area PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 14 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 20 00
371. lished as basis of a submittal in time to allow submittal to occur as scheduled g Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as approved or approved as noted except to the extent that a portion of work must be accomplished as basis of submittal 5 6 QC Organization Responsibilities a Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each submittal SECTION 01 33 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents c Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents d Act on submittals determining appropriate action based on QC organization s review of submittal 1 When QC manager is approving authority take appropriate action on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph entitled Actions Possible 2 When contracting officer is approving authority or when variation has been proposed forward submittal to Government with certifying statement or return submittal marked not reviewed or revise and resubmit as appropriate The QC organization s review of submittal determines appropriate action e Ensure that material is clearly legible f Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or approving statement except that data submitted in bound volume or on one sh
372. lists 1 4 2 Identification Badges Identification badges will be furnished without charge Application for and use of badges will be as directed below Immediately report instances of lost or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer 1 4 3 Business Access Security Requirements AER E Business Access Definition Contractor subcontractor employees requiring installation access to MCB Camp Lejeune or MCAS New River N C must obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for that particular installation Regularly scheduled delivery personnel to include FEDEX UPS Pick up and deliveries should also follow the Business Access guidelines described below Personnel requiring Business Access Identification Badges shall submit all documentation listed below Badges are not required if the contracted position requires the employee to obtain a Common Access Card CAC which will be identified separately within the Government contract 1 4 3 2 Installation Security Access Requirements Contractor shall accomplish the security requirements below within 10 days after award or prior to performance under the contract 1 4 3 3 Business Access Identification Badge Requirement In order to obtain a Business Access Identification Badge for access to MCB Camp Lejeune and satellite activities or MCAS New River NC all personnel providing services under this contract shall be required to present the documentation below to the following offices
373. lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building b Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional remote microphone stations or allow a telephone interface 2 10 6 Memory Provide each control unit with non volatile memory and logic for all functions The use of long life batteries capacitors or other age dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non volatile processors PROMS or EPROMS 2 10 7 Field Programmability Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control initiation notification supervisory and trouble functions of both input and output The system program configuration shall be menu driven System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract 2 10 8 Input Output Modifications The FACP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs These control SECTION 28 31 76 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP 2 10 9 Resetti
374. lowing shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Include annotated catalog data in table format on the drawings showing manufacturer s name model voltage and catalog numbers for equipment and components Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1 Provide plan view drawing showing device locations terminal cabinet locations junction boxes other related equipment conduit routing wire counts circuit identification in each conduit and circuit layouts for all floors Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170 Fire Safety Symbols Wiring Diagrams Provide point to point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system including interconnections between the equipment or Systems that are supervised or controlled by the system Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units initiating circuits switches relays and terminals Provide complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment Include a color code schedule for the wiring Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment System Operation SECTION 28 31 76 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Provide a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages Amplifiers
375. ls equipment and devices shall as a minimum meet requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items and requirements of NFPA 70 2 2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Shall conform to the following 2 2 1 Rigid Metallic Conduit 2 2 1 1 Rigid Threaded Zinc Coated Steel Conduit NEMA C80 1 UL 6 2 2 2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC Type EPC 40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2 UL 651 2 2 3 Electrical Zinc Coated Steel Metallic Tubing EMT UL 797 NEMA C80 3 2 2 4 Flexible Metal Conduit Hb 3 SECTION 26 20 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 4 1 Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Steel UL 360 24245 Fittings for Metal Conduit EMT and Flexible Metal Conduit UL 514B Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium or zinc coated in accordance with UL 514B 2 20 55 1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Threaded type Split couplings unacceptable 2 2 5 2 Fittings for EMT Die cast compression type 2 2 6 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit NEMA TC 3 UL 514B 2 2 7 Liquid Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit UL 1660 253 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS UL 514A cadmium or zinc coated ferrous metal 2 4 CABINETS JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES Volume greater than 100 cubic inches UL 50 hot dip zinc coated if sheet steel 265 WIRES AND CABLES Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation jacket and conductor specified or indicated Wires and cables ma
376. ltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance Minimum resistance shall be 250 000 ohms 22 3 Ground Fault Receptacle Test Test ground fault receptacles with a load such as a plug in light to verify that the line and load leads are not reversed 2 4 Grounding System Test Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made End of Section SECTION 26 20 00 Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ds 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST ANSI 83 2 1989 R 1999 Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems ASA 85 FM GLOBAL FM FM P7825 2005 Approval Guide FM P7825a 2005 Approval Guide Fire Protection INSTITUTE OF ELECTRI
377. lude a combination of text and illustrations 1 3 3 5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead time to obtain 1 3 4 Corrective Maintenance Work Hours Include manufacturer s projection of corrective maintenance work hours including requirements by type of craft Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately 1 3 5 Appendices Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment Include the following 1 33521 Product Submittal Data Provide a copy of all SD 03 Product Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections 1 31552 Manufacturer s Instructions Provide a copy of all SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions submittals required in the applicable technical sections 120355209 O amp M Submittal Data Provide a copy of all SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals required in the applicable technical sections SECTION 01 78 23 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 3 5 4 Parts Identification Provide identification and coverage for all parts
378. ly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of a Similar material design and workmanship Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period SECTION 23 03 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 3 2 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a two year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer s factory or laboratory tests can be shown 3 3 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications These Service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 23 4 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed i
379. m control panel b Provide self restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke automatic fire sensors c Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor s operation Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber d Provide twist lock bases for the sensors The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation e The sensor address shall identify the particular unit its location within the system and its sensitivity setting Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system f An operator at the control panel having a proper access level shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device 1 Primary status 2 Device type 3 Present average value 4 Present sensitivity selected 5 Sensor range normal dirty etc 7 2 Duct Smoke Sensors Duct mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in acc
380. make size in inches and bore f Sheave dimensions center to center and amount of adjustments in inches g Number of belts make and size 3 Test Data Include design and actual values for the following a Total airflow rate in cfm b Total system static pressure in inches wg c Fan rpm d Discharge static pressure in inches wg e Suction static pressure in inches wg I Round Flat Oval and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports Include a SECTION 23 05 93 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 diagram with a grid representing the duct cross section and record the following 1 Report Data Include the following a System and air handling unit number b Location and zone C Traverse air temperature in deg F d Duct static pressure in inches wg e Duct size in inches f Duct area in sq ft g Design airflow rate in cfm h Design velocity in fpm i Actual airflow rate in cfm j Actual average velocity in fpm k Barometric pressure in psig J Air Terminal Device Reports For terminal units include the following Qrmoogooost Unit Data Include the following System and air handling unit identification Location and zone Test apparatus used Area served Air terminal device make Air terminal device number from system diagram Air terminal device type and model number Air terminal device size Air terminal device effective area in sq ft Test Data Includ
381. make up air units will bring the barracks up to code on ventilation standards as well as save energy Each make up air unit will be supplied hot water via a new T E package The central chiller plant will be modified to be a true primary secondary system with variable speed pumping The existing chillers will be retained and decoupled A new DDC control system will vary the speed of the system pumps and stage the starting of the chillers as necessary for optimal performance and energy conservation Electrical service will be upgraded to support the additional pumping capacity g2 Location The work shall be located at Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune North Carolina approximately as shown The exact location will be indicated by the Contracting Officer v2 EXISTING WORK In addition to FAR 52 236 9 Protection of Existing Vegetation Structures Equipment Utilities and Improvements a Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain b Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work as approved by the Contracting Officer At the completion of operations existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started 3 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a profes
382. mance verification test shall ensure proper execution of the sequence of operation and proper tuning of control loops C Obtain approval of the field test plan and performance verification test play for each phase of testing before beginning that phase of testing Give to the Contracting Officer written notification of planned testing at least 30 days prior to test Notification shall be accompanied by the proposed test procedures SECTION 23 09 54 Page 32 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 In no case will the Contractor be allowed to start testing without written Government approval of field test plan and performance verification test plan d Before scheduling the performance verification test furnish field test documentation and written Certified Statement of Field Test Completion to the Contracting Officer for approval The Statement certified by the DDC system provider states that the installed system has been calibrated tested and is ready for the performance verification test Do not start the performance verification test prior to receiving written permission from the Government e Tests are subject to oversight and approval by the Contracting Officer The testing shall not be run during scheduled seasonal off periods of heating and cooling systems 3 2 Test Reporting for Field Testing and Performance Verification Tests a During and after completion of the Field Tests and again after the Performance Veri
383. mationefmglobal com Internet http www fmglobal com FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH FCCCHR University of South California Kaprielian Hall 200 Los Angeles CA 90089 2531 Ph 213 740 2032 or 800 545 6340 Fax 213 740 8399 E mail fccchreGusc edu Internet http www usc edu dept fccchr INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE 445 Hoes Lane Piscataway NJ 08855 1331 Ph 732 981 0060 Fax 732 981 1712 E mail customer services ieee org Internet http www ieee org INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA P O Box 687 106 Stone Street Morrison CO 80465 Ph 303 697 8441 Fax 303 697 8431 E mail netaenetaworld org Internet http www netaworld org INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC 3 rue de Varembe P O Box 131 CH 1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland SECTION 01 42 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Ph 41 22 919 0211 Fax 41 22 919 0300 E mail custserv iec ch Internet http www iec ch MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS 127 Park Street NE Vienna VA 22180 4602 Ph 703 281 6613 Fax 703 281 6671 E mail info mss hq com Internet http www mss hq com MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION MICA 16712 elm Circle Omaha NE 68130 Ph 800 747 6422 Fax 402 330 9702 E mail infoemicainsulation org Internet http www micainsula
384. mer Provide a fuse on the secondary side of the transformer 8 2 Surge Protection Surge and transient protection consist of devices installed externally to digital controllers 28 241 Power Line Surge Protection Surge suppressors external to digital controller shall be installed on all incoming AC power Surge suppressor shall be rated by UL 1449 have a fault indicating light and have clamping voltage ratings below the following levels a Unit is a transient voltage surge suppressor 120 VAC 1 phase 2 wire plus ground hard wire individual equipment protector b Unit must react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset Voltage protection threshold line to neutral starts at no more than 211 volts peak on the 120 VAC line d The transient voltage surge suppressor must have an independent secondary stage equal to or greater than the primary stage joule rating e The primary suppression system components must be pure Silicon Avalanche Diodes f Silicon Avalanche Diodes or Metal Oxide Varistors are acceptable in the independent secondary suppression system g The Transient Suppression System shall incorporate an indication light which denotes whether the primary and or secondary transient protection components is are functioning h All system functions of the Transient Suppression System must be individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time i The Transient Suppression System shall i
385. mployees Submit the installers training history for the employees involved with this contract 4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 4 1 Scope This work includes completion of design and providing a new complete and modifying the existing fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings The system shall include wiring raceways pull boxes terminal cabinets outlet and mounting boxes control equipment alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices supervising SECTION 28 31 76 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 des ds 1 station fire alarm system transmitter and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described Provide systems complete and ready for operation Equipment materials installation workmanship inspection and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72 IEC 60849 IEC 60268 16 except as modified herein 4 2 Definitions Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings the equipment devices and functions shall be defined as follows a Analog Addressable System A system where multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response b Hard Wired S
386. ms and grounds not otherwise covered 5 ohms SECTION 26 06 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 3 When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed in order to obtain the specified ground resistance the provisions of the contract covering changes shall apply 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 2222 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations NETA ATS and referenced standards specified herein Include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS 2 2 Grounding System a Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plan and Specifications b Electrical tests 1 Perform ground impedance measurements utilizing the three point method End of Section SECTION 26 06 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2003 Acceptance Testing Specifications 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and mod
387. n manufacturer catalog number and the number of Splice terminations installed c Requalifications Requalification to items a 1 and a 2 in above paragraph may be required if the splice installer can not demonstrate a prior history of splice termination installation during the previous 12 consecutive months The contractor shall furnish the material for splices and terminations PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2 11 Conduit 2 1 1 1 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 6 galvanized steel threaded type 2 1 1 2 Rigid Metal Conduit PVC Coated UL 6 galvanized steel threaded type coated with a polyvinyl chloride PVC sheath bonded to the galvanized exterior surface nominal 40 mils thick conforming to NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A durometer dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi and aging shall be minimum 1000 hours in an Atlas Weatherometer 2 1 1 3 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 1242 galvanized steel threaded type 2 1 1 4 Intermediate Metal conduit PVC Coated UL 1242 galvanized steel threaded type coated with a polyvinyl chloride SECTION 33 71 02 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PVC sheath bonded to the galvanized exterior surface nominal 40 mils thick conforming to NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A durometer dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts
388. n remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed Removal of trees and the procedure for removal requires approval of the Contracting Officer 3 1 1 2 Landscape Replacement Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations and replace with equivalent undamaged trees and landscape features Obtain Contracting Officer s approval before removal or replacement 3 1 1 3 Temporary Construction Remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads work area structures foundations of temporary structures stockpiles of excess or waste materials and other signs of construction Grade temporary roads parking areas and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours 3 1 2 Water Resources 314 241 Oily Wastes Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground drainage areas or local bodies of water Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size SECTION 01 57 19 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 3 and strength to contain the contents of the tanks in the event of leakage or spillage 2 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES Carefully protect in place and report immediately to the Contracting Officer historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work Stop work in the immediate area of the
389. na conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 3 5 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer 23515 1 Definitions For the International Code Council ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory the word should shall be interpreted as Shall Reference to the code official shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer For Navy owned property references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer For leased facilities references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the lessor References to the permit holder shall be interpreted to mean the Contractor a2 Administrative Interpretations For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents the provisions of Chapter 1 Administrator do not apply These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project References in the ICC Codes to section
390. ncluding steel door frame for with continuous hinges and turn screw operated latch Provide door frame installation in plaster and masonry walls Furnish doors under this section install doors under appropriate section of this specification 8 CHEMICAL FEED TANK Construct of steel for minimum working pressure of 125 psig Provide SECTION 23 73 33 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 chemical pipe fittings and valves as specified for water piping Add borate nitrite corrosion inhibitors to initial fill water for heating and cooling water systems in concentrations of one half ounce per gallon of system water PART 3 EXECUTION 3 INSTALLATION Sud HVAC System Installation of HVAC system including equipment materials installation workmanship fabrication assembly erection examination inspection and testing shall be in accordance with ASME B31 1 ASME ANSI B31 5 NFPA 70 and in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations 3 1 2 Connections to Existing Systems Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required Obtain approval before interrupting service Furnish materials required to make connections into existing systems and perform excavating backfilling compacting and other incidental labor as required Furnish labor and tools for making actual connections to existing systems 3 2 PIPING Test inspect and approve piping before
391. ncorporate an EMI RFI noise filter with a minimum attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz j The system must comply with IEEE C62 41 Class B requirements and be tested according to IEEE C62 45 k The system shall operate at 20 degrees C to 50 degrees C SECTION 23 09 54 Page 27 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 8 2 2 Controller Input Output Protection Controller input output points shall surge protection with optical isolation metal oxide varistors MOV or silicon avalanche devices Fuses are not permitted for surge protection 2 8 3 Wiring Provide complete electric wiring for DDC System including wiring to transformer primaries Control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts Circuits operating at more than 100 Volts shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Circuits operating at 100 Volts or less shall be defined as low voltage and shall be run in rigid or flexible conduit metallic tubing metal raceways or wire trays armored cable or multi conductor cable Provide circuit and wiring protection as required by NFPA 70 Aluminum sheathed cable or aluminum conduit may be used but shall not be buried in concrete Use conduit or plenum rated cable in HVAC plenums HVAC plenums include the space between a drop ceiling and the architectural ceiling within walls and within ductwork Protect exposed wiring from abuse and damage 2 8 3
392. nd DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters The word DANGER shall be in white letters on a red background and the words HIGH VOLTAGE shall be in black letters on a white background Decal shall be Panduit No PPSO710D72 or approved equal 1 10 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES HANDHOLES AND VAULTS Provide tags for each cable or wire located in manholes handholes and vaults Tag new wire and cable provided under this contract and existing wire and cable which are indicated to have splices and terminations provided by this contract The first position on the tag shall denote the voltage The second through sixth positions on the tag shall identify the circuit The next to last position shall denote the phase of the circuit SECTION 26 00 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 and shall include the Greek phi symbol The last position shall denote the cable size The tags shall be polyethylene Do not provide handwritten letters As an example a tag could have the following designation 11 5 NAS 1 8 Phase A 500 denoting that the tagged cable is on the 11 5kV system circuit number NAS 1 8 underground Phase A sized at 500 kcmil 1 10 1 Polyethylene Cable Tags Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250 pounds per square inch and that are 0 08 inch thick minimum non corrosive non conductive resistive to acids alkalis organic Solvents and salt wat
393. nd Cone Method ASTM D 1557 2002e1 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56 000 ft lbf cu ft 2 700 kN m cu m ASTM D 2321 2005 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications ASTM D 2487 2006 Soils for Engineering Purposes Unified Soil Classification System ASTM D 2922 2005 Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods Shallow Depth ASTM D 3017 2005 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods Shallow Depth ASTM D 4318 2005 Liquid Limit Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D 698 2000ae1 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 12 400 ft lbf cu ft 600 kN m cu m U S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION GSA CID A A 1909 Basic Notice 1 Canc Notice 2 Fertilizer SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 dee L 2 DEFINITIONS 2 1 Degree of Compaction Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 698 for general soil types abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density 2 2 Hard Materials Weathered rock dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of rock but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal
394. nd at the job site The APP shall be continuously reviewed and amended as necessary throughout the life of the contract Unusual or high hazard activities not identified in the original APP shall be incorporated in the plan as they are discovered 385 1 1 Contents In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385 1 1 the following is required SECTION 01 35 29 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Names and qualifications resumes including education training experience and certifications of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs CIHs STSs CHSTs The duties of each position shall be specified b Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons Asa minimum competent persons shall be designated and qualifications submitted for each of the following major areas excavation scaffolding fall protection hazardous energy confined space health hazard recognition evaluation and control of chemical physical and biological agents personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection use and maintenance c Confined Space Entry Plan Develop a confined space entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 applicable OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910 29 CFR 1915 and 29 CFR 1926 and any other federal state an
395. nd or SSHO and a project work stoppage The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement 1 7 2 2 Certified Safety Professional CSP Certified Industrial Hygienist CIH Associate Safety Professional ASP Certified Safety Trained Supervisor STS and or Certified Construction Health amp Safety Technician CHST a Perform safety and occupational health management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the project Perform the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385 1 1 Cu Be on site whenever work or testing is being performed d Conduct and document safety inspections e Shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract If the CSP CIH ASP STS CHST is appointed as the SSHO all duties of that position shall also be performed 1 7 3 Meetings Preconstruction Conference a The Contractor will be informed in writing of the date of the preconstruction conference The purpose of the preconstruction conference is for the Contractor and the Contracting Officer s representatives to become acquainted and explain the functions and operating procedures of their respective organizations and to reach mutual understanding relative to the administration of the overall project s Accident Prevention Plan APP before the initiation of work b Contracto
396. nd valve operators F Verify sequence of operation of control devices Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements Note the speed of response to input changes G Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers H Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems I Verify main control supply air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations J Record voltages of power supply and controller output Determine if the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply K Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail safe operations 15 TOLERANCES A Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances Supply Return and Exhaust Fans Plus 5 to plus 10 percent Air Outlets and Inlets 0 to minus 10 percent Heating Water Flow Rate 0 to minus 10 percent Cooling Water Flow Rate 0 to minus 5 percent L6 REPORTING A Initial Construction Phase Report Based on examination of the Contract SECTION 23 05 93 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Documents as specified in Examination Article above prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to
397. ndle s access to oil immersed fuses dead front surge arresters tap changer handle connector parking stands protective caps and ground pad a Insulated high voltage load break connectors IEEE Std 386 rated 15 kV 95 kV BIL Current rating 200 amperes rms continuous Short time rating 10 000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0 17 seconds Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook stick eye grounding eye test point and arc quenching contact material b Bushing well inserts and feed thru inserts IEEE Std 386 200 amperes 15 kV Class Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise Load break switch Loop feed sectionalizer switches Provide three two position oil immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV 95 kV BIL with a continuous current rating and load break rating of 200 amperes and a make and latch rating of 10 000 rms amperes symmetrical Locate the switch handles in the high voltage compartment Operation of switches shall be as follows SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 DESCRIPTION SWITCH POSITION ARRANGE OF SWITCH LINE A SW LINE B SW XFMR SW MENT NO ARRANGEMENT CLOSE CLOSE OPEN CLOSE Line X X X connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer 2 Transformer X X X connected to Line A only 3 Transf
398. nent items and information highlighted b An outline drawing front top and side views c Prices for spare parts and supply list d Routine and field acceptance test reports e Fuse curves for primary fuses f Information on watthour demand meter CT s and fuse block g Actual nameplate diagram h Date of purchase SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 5 2 Operation and Maintenance Data Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data and as specified herein PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PRODUCT COORDINATION Products and materials not considered to be pad mounted transformers and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 Underground Transmission and Distribution and Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System 242 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS NEMA C57 12 26 NEMA C57 12 28 NEMA C57 12 29 and as specified herein 2 2 1 Compartments The high and low voltage compartments shall be separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments Compartment doors hinged lift off type with stop in open position and three point latching 22 1 High Voltage Dead Front High voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line insulated high voltage load break connectors bushing well inserts six high voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed application load break switch ha
399. ng Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm supervisory or trouble signal while the alarm supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists 2 10 10 Instructions Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FACP The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions normal alarm supervisory and trouble The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted 210 11 Walk Test The FACP shall have a walk test feature When using this feature operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer but no other outputs occur 2 10 12 History Logging In addition to the required printer output the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log These events shall be stored in a battery protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory 24 14 REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITS Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockabl
400. ng etc shall be in accordance with paragraph ELECTRICAL WORK Motor starter shall be unit mounted as indicated with Starter type wiring and accessories coordinated with the chiller manufacturer Starter shall be able to operate in temperatures up to 120 degrees F i587 Liquid Cooler Evaporator Cooler shall be of the shell and coil or shell and tube type design Condenser s refrigerant side shall be designed and factory pressure tested to comply with ASHRAE 15 Condenser s water side shall be designed and factory pressure tested for not less than 250 psi Cooler shell shall be constructed of seamless or welded steel Coil bundles shall be totally removable and arranged to drain completely Tubes shall be seamless copper plain integrally finned with smooth bore or integrally finned with enhanced bore Each tube shall be individually replaceable Tubes shall be installed into carbon mild steel tube sheets by rolling Tube baffles shall be properly spaced to provide adequate tube support and cross flow Performance shall be based on a water velocity not less than 3 fps nor more than 12 fps and a fouling factor of 0 0001 h ft2 degrees F Btu 5 8 Air Cooled Condenser Coil Condenser coil shall be of the extended surface fin and tube type and shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes with compatible copper or aluminum fins Fins shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to the tubes and installed in a metal casing Coils shall be circui
401. ng the top cover removable Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied over insulation including removable sections with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1 16 inch Caulking shall be applied to parting line of the removable sections and penetrations 344343 Other Equipment a Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment To ensure a tight fit on round equipment edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered b Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles c On high vibration equipment cellular glass insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound Mineral fiber joints shall be filled with finishing cement d Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable The SECTION 23 07 00 Page 25 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male female shiplap type joint En
402. ngle and multiconductor cables shall include the securing and sealing of the sheath and insulation of the cable conductors stress relief and grounding of cable shields of shielded cable and grounding of neutral conductors metallic sheaths and armor Adequately support cables and cable terminations to avoid any excessive strain on the termination and the conductor connection 1 10 Cable End Caps Cable ends shall be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps Cables ends shall be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job Site while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable The caps shall remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected SECTION 33 71 02 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 354 41 Grounding Systems Noncurrent carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding the following values Pad mounted transformers without protective fences 5 ohms Grounding other metal enclosures of primary voltage electrical and electrically operated equipment 5 ohms Grounded secondary distribution system neutral and noncurrent carrying metal parts associated with distribution systems and grounds not otherwise covered 5 ohms
403. nit An I O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller and communicates with the stand alone digital controller on a LAN An I O unit is not stand alone because the control program does not reside in the I O unit An I O expander which connects directly to a stand alone controller through a multi line microprocessor bus is restricted to reside within 3 feet of the stand alone controller and is considered part of the stand alone controller 3 LO Local Area Network LAN a A communications bus that interconnects digital controllers for peer to peer see peer to peer below communications Different levels of LANs are possible within a single DDC system In this case a digital controller on a higher level LAN acts as a network controller to the controllers on the lower level LAN The network controller then has at least two LAN communications ports One port supports peer to peer communications with other digital controllers on the higher level LAN The other port supports communications with the digital controllers on the lower SECTION 23 09 54 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 level LAN b LANs permit sharing global information This allows building and site wide control strategies such as peak demand limiting dynamic control strategies coordinated response to alarm conditions and remote monitoring and programming of digital controllers 1 3 11 Microprocessor A microprocessor
404. nk type sleeves Control circuit terminations shall be properly identified Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper Conductors No 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper All conductors shall be copper a Colors for coding conductors shall be 208 VOLT SYSTEM 480 VOLT SYSTEM Neutral White Neutral White Phase A Black Phase Brown Phase B Red Phase B Orange Phase C Blue Phase C Yellow Grounding conductor Green Grounding conductor Green SECTION 33 71 02 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 2 54 600 Volt Wire Connector Terminals Shall provide a uniform compression over the entire contact surface Solderless terminal lugs shall be used on stranded conductors a For use with copper conductors UL 486A 1 5 Medium Voltage Cable Cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge AWG and Thousand Circular Mils Kcmil Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be accepted Cable for 12 47 kV underground distribution system shall be ozone resistant ethylene propylene rubber insulated EPR cable conforming to NEMA WC 8 as applicable and AE
405. nnual Report of Products Containing Recovered Materials 4 1 Solid Waste Disposal Permit Submit one copy of a State and local permit or license for the solid waste disposal facility 4 2 Disposal Permit for Hazardous Waste Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and State permits manifests or licenses for transportation treatment storage and disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities 4 3 Permit to Transport Hazardous Waste Submit one copy of the EPA or State permit license or regulation for the transporter who will ship the hazardous waste to the permitted Treatment Storage and Disposal TSD facility SECTION 01 57 19 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 s 1 1 4 4 Hazardous Waste Certification Submit written certification that hazardous waste turned in for disposal was generated on Government property and is identified packaged and labeled in accordance with 40 CFR 261 40 CFR 262 and 40 CFR 263 25 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Provide and maintain during the life of the contract environmental protection as defined in this Section Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction practice Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project Comply with
406. nt Major components include but are not limited to the following a FACPS b Automatic transmitter Furnish to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls oL WIRING Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein Pg Alarm Wiring The SLC wiring shall be copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum Notification appliance circuit conductors that contain audible alarm devices other than speakers shall be solid copper No 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage Power wiring operating at 120 VAC minimum shall be a minimum No 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES a FACP FMCP Locate the FACP FMCP where indicated on the drawings Surface mount the en
407. nt and time information from a stand alone digital controller A TCU is commonly application specific and is used for distributed control of specific HVAC subsystems A TCU communicates with other digital controllers Typically a TCU communicates on a lower level LAN Examples where TCUs are used include small air handling units AHUs variable air volume VAV boxes fan coil units and heat pumps 2220 Workstation The workstation is a computer with installed software to provide an interface for monitoring troubleshooting and making adjustments to the program or operating parameters of all DDC controllers including TCU s 4 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION a Remove existing and provide new DDC systems including associated equipment and accessories Manufacturer s products including design materials fabrication assembly erection examination inspection and testing shall be in accordance with ASME B31 1 and NFPA 70 except as modified herein or indicated otherwise b Provide the DDC systems to maintain stable temperature control and all other conditions as indicated The end to end accuracy of the system including temperature sensor error wiring error A D conversion and display shall be 1 degree F or less 4 1 Design Requirements 4 1 1 Control System Schematic Provide control system schematic that includes the following a Location of each input and output device b Flow diagram of each HVAC component for instance flow thr
408. nt necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke 5 Provide space to identify the date and time of each test Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test Tests Stages a Preliminary Testing Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled Minimum System Tests After preliminary testing is complete provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments b Request for Formal Inspection and Tests When tests have been completed and corrections made submit a signed dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Comtracting Offices Designated Representative COR c Final Testing Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date The tests shall be performed in accord
409. ntal conditions Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring and control diagrams SECTION 01 78 23 Page 8 05080050 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 i Maintenance and repair procedures j Removal and replacement instructions k Spare parts and supply list l Product submittal data m Manufacturer s instructions n O amp M submittal data Parts identification p Testing equipment and special tool information q Warranty information r Testing and performance data s Contractor information PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 78 23 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ds 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM E 119 2000a Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials ASTM E 1399 1997 R 2000 Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems ASTM E 1966 2001 Fire Resistive Joint Systems ASTM E 814 2002 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops ASTM E 84 2007 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials FM GLOBAL FM FM AS 4991 2001 Approval of
410. nufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used 2 5 1 Conductors Conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid except that conductors for remote control alarm and signal circuits classes 1 2 and 3 shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise Conductor sizes and ampacities shown are based on copper unless indicated otherwise All conductors shall be copper 2 5 5 1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements When manufacturer s equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment provide copper conductors or splices splice boxes and other work required to satisfy manufacturer s requirements SECTION 26 20 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 5 1 2 Minimum Conductor Sizes Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No 12 AWG for Class 1 remote control and signal circuits No 14 AWG for Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuits No 16 AWG and for Class 3 low energy remote control alarm and signal circuits No 22 AWG 4542 Color Coding Provide for service feeder branch control and signaling circuit conductors Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in Same raceway or box other neutral
411. nventory Update form for each individual item of inventoried equipment that is demolished removed replaced or installed ex three new condensing units would require the submission of three Equipment Inventory Update forms The replacement of two existing air handling units with two new air handling units would require the submission of two Equipment Inventory Update forms The contractor shall prepare and submit a VAV TAB Room Number List for each VAV Tab model installed in a single building Only one Maximo Equipment Inventory Update form is required for each model of VAV or TAB in a single building SECTION 23 03 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 15 97210 Demolition of all equipment structure or facility When all the inventoried equipment in a building or structure is demolished or removed and not replaced an Equipment Inventory Update form is not required eis D2 Standards The contractor shall provide accurate complete and legible information on all required forms All required forms shall be completed and delivered to the Contracting Officer on or before the Beneficial Occupancy Date 11 information on Equipment Inventory Update forms shall be obtained by visual inspection of equipment data plate s 1 9 1 3 Form Preparation Each required Maximo Equipment Inventory Update form shall contain the following information 1 The name and telephone number of an individual who can be cont
412. nvoice Certification Furnish as specified in Section 01 45 10 Quality Control Submit one original sos dad Progress Payments In addition to the requirements stated in Paragraph 1 5 1 Proper Payment Request above the Contractor s request for progress payments shall include the following a Updated Progress Schedule Furnish an updated progress schedule as specified in contract clause FAR 52 236 15 Schedules for Construction Contracts and Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Submit one copy 256152 Final Payments The request for final payment is submitted after completion and acceptance of all work and all other requirements of the contract Before submitting the final invoice the Contractor shall meet with the appropriate Government representatives to determine the final invoice amount including the assessment of liquidated damages if any and to make sure the final release is complete and accurate In addition to the requirements in Paragraph 1 5 1 Proper Payment Request above the Contractor s request for final payment shall include the following a A final release executed on the standard form provided by the Contracting Officer Submit two originals with final payment request b NC Tax certified statement and report for the prime and each subcontractor FAR 52 229 7 Submit two copies c As built drawings if applicable SECTION 01 20 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 050800
413. o domestic water lines Final taps and tie ins to the Government utility grid will be made by the Contractor after approval by the Contracting Officer Tap in cost if any shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Under no circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining domestic water 1 4 2 Trailers Electrical service will be supplied by the Government when available except at Tarawa Terrace where Carolina Power and Light Company will be the supplier 1 4 3 Energy and Utilities Conservation The Contractor shall carefully conserve utilities furnished without charge The Contractor at his own expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines and remove the same prior to final acceptance of the construction 1 4 4 Location of Underground Utilities Location and Protection of underground utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor Where existing to remain piping utilities and underground obstructions of any type are indicted in locations to be traversed by new piping ducts and other excavations the SECTION 01 50 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 elevations of the existing utilities and obstructions shall be determined before the new work is completed a In addition the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining the services of a professional utility locator pri
414. o or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and or fire department responses End of Section SECTION 28 31 76 Page 29 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL Lel SUBMITTALS None required PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION 321 Roads Walks Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times 3 1 2 Trees Shrubs and Existing Facilities Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing grubbing and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require 3 2123 Utility Lines Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown existing utility line The Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing grubbing and construction operations When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in ample time to minimize interruption of the service 3 2 CLEARING Clearing shall consist of the felling trimming and cutting of
415. o point of entrance of metallic water service Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee If flange pipes are encountered make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70 Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building Where ground fault protection is employed ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection 143 Surge Arresters Connect grounding terminal of each arrester to ground 21 4 Pad Mounted Transformer Grounding Provide a 4 0 bare copper ground girdle around transformer Girdle shall be buried one foot deep and placed 3 feet laterally from the equipment enclosure Connect girdle to enclosure at two opposite places using 4 0 copper conductor Exothermically weld joints 21 5 Ground Resistance Noncurrent carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding the following values a Pad mounted transformers 5 ohms b Ground in manholes handholes and vaults 5 ohms c Grounding other metal enclosures of primary voltage electrical and electically operated equipment 5 ohms d Grounded secondary distribution system neutral and noncurrent carrying metal parts associated with distribution Syste
416. o the landfill Place each category of construction debris in the landfill at a location designated by the landfill operator Weigh each and every vehicle delivering debris upon entrance and exit Cover debris Metals Metals will not be accepted at the landfill Remove metals from each and every category before delivery to landfill Example Remove hardware from doors and windows Dispose of metal construction debris at Defense Reutilization Maintenance Office DRMO Aluminum brass copper lead other metal electrical wiring cable cut in 3 foot or less sections SECTION 01 57 19 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 3 3 2543 Garbage Disposal Place garbage in approved containers and move to a pickup point or disposal area where directed 2 5 4 Disposal Off Base a Provide 24 hour advance written notice to the Contracting Office of Contractor s intention to dispose of off base b Disposal at sites or landfills not holding a valid State of North Carolina permit is specifically prohibited The prohibition also applies to sites where a permit may have been applied for but not yet obtained Off base disposal of construction debris outside the parameters of this paragraph at site without State permits and or not in accordance with regulatory requirements shall require the Contractor at his own expense to remove transport and relocate the debris to a State approved site T
417. o written acceptance of the crane plan by the Government ROICC shall be the government approving authority 10 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS AHA The Activity Hazard Analysis AHA format shall be in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase Format subsequent AHA as amendments to the APP An AHA will be developed by the Contractor for every operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform work The analysis must identify and evaluate hazards and outline the proposed methods and techniques for the safe completion of each phase of work Ata minimum define activity being performed sequence of work specific safety and health hazards anticipated control measures to include personal protective equipment to eliminate or reduce each hazard to acceptable levels equipment to be used inspection requirements training requirements for all involved and the competent person in charge of that phase of work For work with fall hazards including fall hazards associated with scaffold erection and removal identify the appropriate fall protection methods used For work with materials handling equipment SECTION 01 35 29 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 address safeguarding measures related to materials handling equipment For work requiring excavations
418. ock 2 5 4 6 Energy Management Control System EMCS Interface The control system shall be capable of communicating all data to a remote integrated DDC processor through a single shielded cable The data shall include as a minimum all system operating conditions capacity controls and safety shutdown conditions The control system shall also be capable of receiving at a minimum the following operating commands a Remote Unit Start Stop b Remote Chilled Water Reset 255435 Compressor s 255 51 Scroll Compressor s Compressors shall be of the hermetically sealed design Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators to minimize vibration and noise Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to minimize vibration Lubrication system shall be centrifugal pump type equipped with a means for determining oil level and an oil charging valve Crankcase oil heater shall be provided if standard or if available as an option If provided the crankcase oil heater shall be controlled as recommended by the manufacturer 2 5 5 2 Rotary Screw Compressor s Compressors shall operate stably for indefinite time periods at any stage of capacity reduction without hot gas bypass Provision shall be made to insure proper lubrication of bearings and shaft seals on shutdown with or without electric power supply Rotary screw compressors shall include a An open or hermetic positive displacement oil injected design dire
419. of each component assembly subassembly and accessory of the end items subject to replacement Include special hardware requirements such as requirement to use high strength bolts and nuts Identify parts by make model serial number and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification Provide clear and legible illustrations drawings and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items When illustrations omit the part numbers and description both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index reference or key number that will cross reference the illustrated part to the listed part Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components assemblies and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer s standard practice Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment components assemblies subassemblies attachments or accessories such as typically shown in a master parts catalog 1 3 5 5 Warranty Information List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force Include warranty information for primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system 1 3 5 6 Personnel Training Requirements Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate
420. of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section 6 2 Regulatory Requirements Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 6 3 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished 6 4 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 6 5 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a namepl
421. ollect and store in piles or containers scrap lumber waste material and rubbish for removal and disposal at the close of each work day Stack lumber in neat piles less than 4 feet high Prepare to remove or secure all debris trash or stored materials that could become missile hazards during high wind conditions Meetings should be held on site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to need to be taken should the base go to a higher readiness condition Contact the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions c Condition THREE Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 48 hours Once Condition 3 is set contractors shall shift their focus from their normal activities to taking the actions that are required to prepare the job site for the potential of destructive weather All debris and rubbish shall be removed form the site at the end of the workday All stored materials shall either be removed from the job site or secured metal straps or heavy lines ropes All tools equipment and gear shall be secured at the end of the workday Begin preparations to adequately secure the facility windows boarded up etc Meetings should be held on site with all subcontractors to review the measures that are going to be taken should base go to a higher readiness condition Contract the ROICC for any additional updates and upon completion of all required actions d Condition TWO S
422. onnected to a single module to power and supervise the circuit 6 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay dry contact form C for interfacing the control panel with other systems The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Style Y notification appliance circuits The system shall be capable of supervising audible visual and dry contact circuits The control module shall have both an input and output address The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel s SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed 27 SMOKE SENSORS ay Photoelectric Smoke Sensors Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows SECTION 28 31 76 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 a Provide analog addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268 Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alar
423. oordinated with station utility departments in addition to a private locating Service Outages on system utilities shall be used in circumstances where concrete chipping saw cutting or core drilling is required and utilities are unable to be completely identified 6 4 Shoring Systems Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan and AHA Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily available on site for review Job made shoring or shielding shall have the registered professional engineer stamp specifications and tabulated data Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electric underground cables 862 9 Trenching Machinery Trenching machines with digging chain drives shall be operated only when the spotters laborers are in plain view of the operator Operator and spotters laborers shall be provided training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain is operating Documentation of the training shall be kept on file at the project site 7 ELECTRICAL Tad Conduct of Electrical Work Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de energized prior to performing each cut Positive cable identification
424. or Device Full size 2 Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches Built up to 8 1 2 by 11 inches SECTION 01 33 00 Page 10 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 ls lg 1 2 3 Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1 2 by 11 inches Cut down to 8 1 2 by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color texture and material variations 4 Sample of Linear Devices or Materials 10 inch length or length to be supplied if less than 10 inches Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails 5 Sample of Non Solid Materials Pint Examples of non solid materials are sand and paint 6 Color Selection Samples 2 by 4 inches 7 Sample Panel 4 by 4 feet 8 Sample Installation 100 square feet Samples Showing Range of Variation Where variations are unavoidable due to nature of the materials submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range Reusable Samples Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use Recording of Sample Installation Note and preserve the notation of area constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project When color texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style include one sample of that manufacturer and style for comparison Format of Administrative Submittals When submitta
425. or to digging Contractor will provide documentation that the site has been surveyed and checked for underground utilities All utilities must be located including but not limited to power water sewer storm drains fiber optics T V cable telephone and intrusion detection wiring A set of known utility drawings will be available in the ROICC office for review to assist the locator b It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact the Base Telephone Office 451 2531 prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune A telephone office representative will assist in locating telephone lines C It is mandatory that the Contractor also contact Charter Communications cable TV service prior to accomplishing any digging at Camp Lejeune to ensure that all buried cable lines are identified Contact Mr Olin Criswell at 353 8677 for assistance 1 4 4 1 The Locations of Underground Utilities shown at only approximate and the information provided may be incomplete Contractor shall attempt to ascertain locations of existing underground utilities prior to and during digging operations 1 4 4 2 Damage to Underground Utilities Immediate notice shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer of any damage The Contractor shall make temporary repairs immediately and shall provide permanent repairs as soon as practicable For any additional work required by reason of conflict between the new and existing work an adjustment in contract price will
426. or warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation if incorporated will be compatible with other elements of work 5 4 4 Review Schedule Is Modified In addition to normal submittal review period a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations 5 5 Contractor s Responsibilities a Determine and verify field measurements materials field construction criteria review each submittal and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and contract documents b Transmit submittals to QC organization in accordance with schedule on approved Submittal Register and to prevent delays in the work delays to government or delays to separate contractors c Advise contracting officer of variation as required by paragraph entitled Variations d Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority When resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal the contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments for use by approving authority Direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted submittal to revisions not requested by approving authority on previous submissions e Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by contracting officer to a limit of 20 copies per submittal f Complete work which must be accomp
427. ordance with NFPA 90A Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct Detectors shall have a manual reset Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A UL 268A and shall be UL listed for use in air handling systems The control functions operation reset and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place Detectors mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet that cannot be easily accessed while standing on the floor shall be provided with a remote detector indicator panel containing test and reset switches Remote SECTION 28 31 76 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control interlock and shutdown functions Auxiliary contacts provided for this function shall b
428. ore than 12 inch intervals throughout Horizontal joints shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o clock position Joints shall be sealed with caulking to prevent moisture penetration Where jacketing abuts an un insulated surface joints shall be sealed with caulking 3 91 5723 Fittings Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for rectangular ducts 3 3 5 4 Rectangular Ducts Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface Each coat of weatherproof mastic shall be 1 16 inch minimum thickness The exterior shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather protection and secured with screws 3 4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION 3 4 1 General Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers fasteners flanges and accessories Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following a Hand holes b Cleanouts ASME stamps d Manufacturer s nameplates e Duct Test Balance Test Holes 3 4 2 Insulation for Cold Equipment Cold equipment below 60 degrees F Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following a Chilled water pumps 3 4 2 1 Insulation Type Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered Material and thicknesses sh
429. ormer X X X connected to Line B only 4 Transformer X X X open and loop closed 5 Transformer X X X open and loop open d Provide bayonet type oil immersed expulsion fuses in series with oil immersed partial range current limiting fuses Bayonet fuse links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low current faults and current limiting fuse clearing high current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse In order to eliminate or minimize oil spills the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield Warning shall be conspicuously displayed within the high voltage compartment cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the load break switch is in the open position and the tank pressure has been released Bayonet fuse assembly 150 kV BIL Oil immersed current limiting fuses NEMA C37 47 50 000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified e Surge arresters IEEE C62 11 rated 10 kV fully shielded dead front metal oxide varistor elbow type with resistance graded gap suitable for plugging into inserts Provide three arresters for loop feed circuits f Parking stands Provide a parking stand near each bushing well
430. orps of Engineers However it is sponsered by both the AGC and the ABC of Charlotte North Carolina Call one of the following to sign up for the next available class The Army Corps of Engineers Baltimore District Offered in Baltimore MD Contact Corps of Engineers Baltimore District 10 South Howard Street Baltimore MD 21201 Phone 410 962 2323 The Associated General Contractors AGC Virginia Chapter in Cooperation with the Army Corps of Engineers Norfolk District and the Naval Facilities Engineering Command Atlantic Division Offered at rotating locations in Norfolk Williamsburg and Richmond Contact AGC of Virginia 8631 Maylan Drive Parham Park Richmond VA 23294 Phone 804 346 3383 Carolinas Associated General Contractors CACG Contact CACG 1100 Euclid Avenue Charlotte NC 28203 Phone 704 372 1450 ext 5248 Associated Builders and Contractors ABC Carolinas Chapter Contact ABC Carolinas Chapter 3705 Latrobe Drive Charlotte NC 28211 Phone 704 367 1331 Or 877 470 4819 1 25 2 Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications Designate an alternate for the QC Manager at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QC Manager s absence The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC Manager shall be three years of experience in one of the specified positions l 6 QC PLA
431. orting of alarm conditions Force alarms conditions for each alarm and ensure that workstation receives alarms d Reporting trend and status reports Demonstrate ability of Software to receive and save trend and status reports 3 3 4 Performance Verification Tests Conduct the performance verification tests to demonstrate control system maintains setpoints control loops are tuned and controllers are programmed for the correct sequence of operation Conduct performance verification test during seven days of continuous HVAC and DDC systems operation and before final acceptance of work Specifically the performance verification test shall demonstrate the following 3 3 4 1 Execution of Sequence of Operation Demonstrate the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of operation for example seasonal occupied unoccupied and warm up Demonstrate proper control system response for abnormal conditions by simulating these conditions Demonstrate hardware interlocks and safeties work Demonstrate the control system performs the correct sequence of control after a loss of power 3 3 4 2 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy Furnish the Government graphed trends of control loops to demonstrate the control loop is stable and that setpoint is maintained Control loop response shall respond to setpoint changes and stabilize in 3 minutes Control loop trend data shall be real time and the time between data points SECTION 23 09
432. otection systems such as guardrails personnel fall arrest system safety nets etc are required when working within 1 8m 6 feet of any leading edge In addition to the required fall protection systems safety skiff personal floatation devices life rings etc are required when working above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385 1 1 paragraphs 05 1 05 02 Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom swing stages or suspended platform addition personal fall arrest systems may be required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase The need for tying off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising lowering or travel Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926 500 Subpart M and USACE EM 385 1 1 eae d Personal Fall Arrest Equipment Personal fall arrest equipment systems subsystems and components shall meet ANSI 7359 1 Only a full body harness with a shock absorbing lanyard or self retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest device Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support usually a Dorsal D ring and specifically designate
433. ough coils fans dampers c Name or symbol for each component such as V 1 DM 2 and T 1 for a SECTION 23 09 54 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 valve damper motor and temperature sensor respectively d Set points e Sensor range f Actuator range g Valve and damper schedules and normal position h Switch points on input switches i Written sequence of operation for each schematic j Schedule identifying each sensor and controlled device with the following information 1 LAN and Software point name with send and receive address if applicable 2 Point type AO AI DO DI 3 Point range 4 Digital controller number for each point 1 4 1 2 Electrical Equipment Ladder Diagrams Submit diagrams showing electrical equipment interlocks including voltages and currents 1415 3 Component Wiring Diagrams Submit a wiring diagram for each type of input device and each type of output device Diagram shall show how the device is wired and powered showing typical connections at the digital controller and each power supply as well as at the device itself Show for all field connected devices including but not limited to control relays motor starters electric or electronic actuators and temperature pressure flow proof and humidity sensors and transmitters 1 4 1 4 Terminal Strip Diagrams Submit a diagram of each terminal strip including digital controller terminal strips terminal strip location
434. ours in a salt spray fog test Salt spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117 and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows immediately after completion of the test the paint shall show no signs of blistering wrinkling or cracking and no loss of adhesion and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0 125 inch on either side of the scratch mark The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment Shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen If manufacturer s standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service 2122 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces Clean pretreat prime and paint metal surfaces except aluminum surfaces need not be painted Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces Clean the surfaces to remove dust dirt rust oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal Where more than one coat of paint is specified apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray a Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F Immediat
435. out connection to another digital controller or computer Requirements for stand alone control are a time clock a microprocessor resident control programs PID control and I O All stand alone controllers have a communication port and firmware for direct connection and interrogation with a laptop computer or similar hand held device This interrogation includes parameter changes and program downloads SECTION 23 09 54 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 2 2 I 1 3 18 Site Building Controller SBC The SBC is an interface controller between the Sitenet central server and the DDC system installed in the building Unless otherwise specified there is one SBC located in each building 23 19 SiteNet SiteNet is the centrally located intranet based Energy Management and Control System installed at Camp Lejeune It consists of two computer servers labeled SiteNet EA and SiteNet DB located in Building 1202 The SiteNet EA Server communicates over the Camp Lejeune Intranet with the Site Building Controllers located in each building on the system SiteNet provides access to DDC input output devices floor plans and mechancial system graphics via the Camp Lejeune intranet and through a standard web browser 3 20 Terminal Control Unit TCU An off the shelf stand alone digital controller equipped for communication on a lower level LAN TCUs may deviate from stand alone only in receiving energy manageme
436. ove accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project 3 1 4 1 Conduit Support Support conduit by pipe straps wall brackets hangers or ceiling trapeze Fasten by wood screws to wood by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick and by machine screws welded threaded studs or spring tension clamps on steel work Threaded C clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one fourth proof test load Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock resistant Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1 2 in in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3 4 in in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars Fill unused holes In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws In suspended ceiling construction run conduit above ceiling Do not support conduit by ceiling support system Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both a tie wires supporting ceiling grid system and b ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts Installation shall be coordinated with above ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems Spring steel fasteners may be used for
437. paces Gloves and spectacle type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices 2 1 3 Caulking ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use A SECTION 23 07 00 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 1 4 Corner Angles Nominal 0 016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing Aluminum shall be ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003 3105 or 5005 2 51 55 Finishing Cement ASTM C 449 C 449M Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic Stainless steel must comply with ASTM C 795 2 1 6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape Fibrous glass cloth with 20X20 maximum mesh size and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls Class 3 tape shall be 4 5 ounces square yard 24 1 7 Staples Outward clinching type ASTM A 167 Type 304 or 316 stainless steel 2 1 8 Jackets 2 1 8 1 Aluminum Jackets Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated embossed or smooth sheet 0 016 inch nominal thickness ASTM B 209 Temper H14 Temper H16 Alloy 3003 5005 or 3105 with factory applied moisture retarder Corrugated aluminum jacket Shall not be used outdoors Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel 0 015 inch thick 1 2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3 4 inch
438. pe Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated Bodies shall be of ivory as per NEMA WD 1 Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6 Provide screw type side wired wiring terminals Connect grounding pole to mounting strap The receptacle shall contain triple wipe power contacts and double or triple wipe ground contacts 2 9 1 Weatherproof Receptacles Provide in cast metal box with gasketed weatherproof cast metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening Provide caps with a spring hinged flap Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in wet locations with plug in use 2 9 2 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles UL 943 duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices Provide screw type Side wired wiring terminals or pre wired pigtail leads 2 10 PANELBOARDS UL 67 and UL 50 having a short circuit current rating of 10 000 amperes symmetrical minimum Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A Panelboards shall be circuit breaker equipped Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required b
439. pecified by the COR Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated using specified security t The contractor shall demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as specified by the COR Dial in capability shall also be demonstrated using specified security 3e7 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises Instructor Include in the project the services of an instructor who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection testing and maintenance of the system provided The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer in the care adjustment maintenance and operation of the fire alarm system 3 74 2 Qualifications Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O amp M work SECTION 28 31 76 Page 28 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 33 05080050 7 3 Required Instruction Time Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer The instruction may be divided into tw
440. perations Environmental conditions Lubrication data Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Cleaning recommendations Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring diagrams and control diagrams Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Product submittal data O amp M submittal data Parts identification Warranty information Testing equipment and special tool information Testing and performance data Contractor information Data Package 4 Safety precautions Operator prestart Startup shutdown and post shutdown procedures SECTION 01 78 23 Page 7 05080050 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 Normal operations Emergency operations Operator service requirements Environmental conditions Lubrication data Preventive maintenance plan and schedule Cleaning recommendations Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques Wiring diagrams and control diagrams Maintenance and repair procedures Removal and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply list Corrective maintenance man hours Product submittal data O amp M submittal data Parts identification Warranty information Personnel training requirements Testing equipment and special tool information Testing and performance data Contractor information Data Package 5 Safety precautions Operator prestart Start up shutdown and post shutdown procedures Normal operations Environme
441. permitted Remove material in an approved manner 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 1 Utilities Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor s risk Perform work adjacent to non Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company Excavation made with power driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government owned utility or subsurface construction For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction excavate by hand Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 1 SOIL MATERIALS Satisfactory Materials Any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW GP GM GP GM GW GM GC GP GC GM GC SW SP SM SW SM SC SW SC SP SM SP SC CL ML CL ML free of debris roots wood scrap material vegetation refuse soft unsound particles and frozen deleterious or objectionable materials Unless specified otherwise the maximum particle diameter shall be one half the lift thickn
442. pes g Installation Date h Size Diameter SECTION 01 77 00 Page 22 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 i Unit Diameter j X Coordinates Coordinates 1 Contract Number m Drawing Type n Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing KK Fire Hydrant LEJEUNE water fire connection point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes Hydrant ID TBD by Fire Department Date Acquired Year Disposition Valve Connector Type Valve Size Inlet Diameter Units of measure Water Source Tank Plant etc X Coordinates Y Coordinates Contract Number Drawing Type Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing d 5 PAUP LL Other Utility Features 1 All newly constructed utility items may require GIS data Confirmation for such items that have not been referenced in 1 2 2 2 Specific Tasks Section G can be obtained by contacting the Installations and Environment Public Works Department GIS Section At a minimum the following will be required a Facility ID b Installation Date Type Description d Material e Drawing Number Drawing Type g Contract Number h Date Source Survey Grade GPS Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing I Non Compliance 1 Failure to following Specific
443. ply to constant volume supply return and exhaust air systems Additional procedures are required for SECTION 23 05 93 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 variable air volume multizone dual duct induction unit supply air systems and process exhaust air systems These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section B Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer 1 Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows a Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions b Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection c Measure inlet static pressure of single inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions 2 Measure static pressure across each air handling unit component a Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters 3 Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices under final balanced conditions 4 Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identif
444. pplier or subcontractor and provided t othe prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Offficer 1 5211 DISPLAY SAFETY INFORMATION Within 1 calendar days after commencement of work erect a safety bulletin board at the job site The following information shall be displayed on the safety bulletin board in clear view of the on site construction personnel maintained current and protected against the elements and unauthorized removal a Map denoting the route to the nearest emergency care facility b Emergency phone numbers c Copy of the most up to date APP d Current AHA s e OSHA 300A Form f OSHA Safety and Health Protection On The Job Poster g Confined space entry permit h Hot work permit i A sign indicating the number of hours worked since last lost workday accident 1 Safety and Health Warning Posters SECTION 01 35 29 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 12 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS Maintain safety related references applicable to the project including those listed in the article References Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer s manuals 113 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment Teata REPORTS 1 14 1 Accident Reports a For recordable injuries and illnesses and property damage accidents resulting in at least 2 000 in
445. procedures Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified within the paragraphs a Liquid Chiller b Chiller Components c Accessories If vibration isolation is specified for a unit vibration isolator literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators provided meet the manufacturer s recommendations Spare Parts SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified Posted Instructions Posted instructions at least 2 weeks prior to construction completion including equipment layout wiring and control diagrams piping valves and control sequences and typed condensed operation instructions The condensed operation instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system The posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer Verification of Dimensions A letter at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction including the date the site was visited conformation of existing conditions and any discrepancies found Manufacturer s Multi Year Compressor Warranty Manufacturer s multi year warranty for compressor s in air cooled li
446. provided in lieu of gate valves 2 4 5 6 Square Head Cocks Provide copper alloy or cast iron body with copper alloy plugs suitable for 125 psig water working pressure 2 4 5 7 Air Venting Valves Provide copper alloy body valves with automatic or manual air vent as indicated 2 4 5 8 Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003 copper alloy body automatic reseating with test lever 2 4 5 9 Water Temperature Regulating Valves Provide copper alloy body direct acting pilot operated for the intended service 2 4 5 10 Flow Control Balancing Valves Circuit Setters Copper alloy or cast iron body copper alloy or stainless internal working parts and integral pointer that indicates the degree of valve opening Valves shall be suitable for 125 psig at 190 degrees F hot water Valve shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position Valve body shall have factory installed tappings for differential pressure meter connections for verification of pressure differential across valve orifice Meter connections shall have positive check valves or shutoff valves Each valve shall have metal tag showing the gallons per minute SECTION 23 73 33 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 2 flow for each differential pressure reading Backflow Prevention Assemblies Provide reduced pressure principle type backflow prevention assemblies which are approved by and has a current Certificate of Approval
447. ps shall be applied prior to completion of enclosing walls or assemblies Cast in place firestop devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement Pipe conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast in place device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made inaccessible PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 s FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured asbestos free noncombustible products FM P7825a approved or UL listed for use with applicable construction and penetrating items complying with the following minimum requirements lo Fire Hazard Classification Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723 Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resist Dir or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory 2 Toxicity Material shall be nontoxic to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions 21 3 Fire Resistance Rating Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resist Dir listed or FM P7825a approved with F rating at least equal to fire rating of fire wall or floor in which penetraded openings are to be protected except that F rating may be 3 hours in through penetrations of 4 hour fire rated wall or floor Firestop systems shall also have T rating where required SECTION 07 84 00 Page 3
448. quid chillers as specified System Performance Tests A schedule at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing for the system performance tests The schedules shall identify the proposed date time and location for each test Demonstrations A schedule at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course which identifies the date time and location for the training SD 07 Certificates Refrigeration System Where the system components or equipment are specified to comply with requirements of AGA NFPA ARI ASHRAE ASME or UL 1 copy of proof of such compliance shall be provided The label or listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence In lieu of the label or listing a written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency may be submitted When performance requirements of this project s drawings and specifications vary from standard ARI rating conditions computer printouts catalog or other application data certified by ARI or a nationally recognized laboratory as described above shall be included ARI does not have a current certification program that encompasses such application data the manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies with project performance requirements in accordance with
449. quipment shall have tags removed and the existing equipment shall be tagged NOT IN SERVICE until removed from the building a After acceptance of the new system by the Contracting Officer existing equipment not connected to the new system shall be removed unused exposed conduit shall be removed and damaged surfaces shall be restored The material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor b Disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm and smoke detection systems where indicated and elsewhere in the specification c Properly dispose of fire alarm outlet and junction boxes wiring conduit supports and other such items 3 4 FIRESTOPPING Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs fire rated walls partitions with fire rated doors corridor walls and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 345 PAINTING Paint exposed electrical fire alarm conduit and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas Paint junction boxes red in unfinished areas 3226 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 6 1 Testing Procedures Detailed test procedures prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician and signed by representative of the installing company for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the
450. quired by structural conditions are approved Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 in square except that 4 by 2 in boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet SECTION 26 20 00 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 5152 Pull Boxes Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code gauge galvanized sheet steel except where cast metal boxes are required in locations specified herein Provide boxes with screw fastened covers Where several feeders pass through common pull box tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics circuit number and panel designation 3 1 5 3 Extension Rings Extension rings are not permitted for new construction Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish 3 1 6 Mounting Heights Mount panelboards enclosed circuit breakers motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 in above floor Mount lighting switches 48 in above finished floor receptacles 18 in above finished floor unless otherwise indicated Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets to center of device or outlet 3441 7 Conductor Identification Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap splice or termination is made For conductors No 6 AWG and smaller diameter color coding shall be by factory applied color impr
451. r location using calibrated test equipment On the same table record the corresponding reading at the digital controller for the test report The test equipment shall have been calibrated within one year of use Test equipment calibration shall be traceable to the measurement standards of the National Institute of Standards and Technology SECTION 23 09 54 Page 33 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 3423 Actuator Range Adjustment Test With the digital controller apply a control signal to each actuator and verify that the actuator operates properly from its normal position to full range of stroke position Record actual spring ranges and normal positions for all modulating control valves and dampers Include documentation in the test report 3 3 3 4 Digital Controller Startup and Memory Test Demonstrate that programming is not lost after a power failure and digital controllers automatically resume proper control after a power failure 3 3 3 5 Surge Protection Test Show that surge protection meeting the requirements of this specification has been installed on incoming power to the digital controllers and on communications lines 3 3 3 6 Application Software Operation Test Test compliance of the application software for a Ability to communicate with the digital controllers uploading and downloading of control programs b Text editing program Demonstrate the ability to edit the control program off line C Rep
452. r each test instrument b Identify the third party laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met 6 2 Design Tests IEEE C57 12 00 and IEEE C57 12 9D Section 5 1 2 in IEEE C57 12 80 states that design tests are made only on representative apparatus of basically the same design Submit design test reports complete with test data explanations formulas and results in the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for the specified transformer Design tests Shall have been performed prior to the award of this contract a Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional engineer b Temperature rise Basically the same design for the temperature rise test means a pad mounted transformer with the same coil construction such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary the same kVA the same cooling type ONAN the same temperature rise rating and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified C Lightning impulse Basically the same design for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad mounted transformer with the same BIL the same coil construction such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary and a tap changer if specified Design lightning impulse tests shall include both the primary and secondary windings of that transformer 1 IEEE C57 12 90 paragraph 10 3 entitled Lightning Impulse Test Procedures and IEEE C57 98 2 S
453. r representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference This includes the project superintendent SECTION 01 35 29 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 site safety and health officer quality control supervisor or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP including the Activity Hazard Analyses AHAs and special plans program and procedures associated with it c The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans programs procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer s representative as to which phases will require an analysis In addition a schedule for the preparation submittal review and acceptance of AHAs shall be established to preclude project delays d Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re submit it for acceptance Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP e The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the Post Award Kickof
454. r this item until resubmittal is approved 6 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS 6 1 Transmittal Form Transmit each submittal except sample installations and sample panels to office of approving authority Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by contracting officer and standard for project The transmittal form shall identify contractor indicate date of submittal and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in paragraph entitled Identifying Submittals Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding sample panels and sample installations 6 2 Identifying Submittals Identify submittals except sample panel and sample installation with the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form Mark each copy of each submittal identically with the following a Project title and location b Construction contract number SECTION 01 33 00 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required Submittal description SD number of each component of submittal When a resubmission alphabetic suffix on submittal description for example SD 10A to indicate resubmission Name address and telephone number of subcontractor supplier manufacturer and any other second tier contractor associated with submittal Product identification and loc
455. ract provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910 147 Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 15 Mechanical PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used SECTION 26 00 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 3 24 PAINTING EQUIPMENT cdd Factory Applied Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion resistance test 22 Field Applied Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment 2 NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible Side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart 4 CABLE TAG INSTALLATION Install cable tags in each manhole handhole and
456. racteristics curves of fuses serving SECTION 26 20 00 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 motors or connected in series with circuit breakers shall be coordinated for proper operation Submit coordination data for approval Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage 2 12 1 Cartridge Fuses Current Limiting Type Class R UL 198E Class RK 5 time delay type Associated fuseholders shall be Class R only 24 13 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS MOTOR RATED SWITCHES Three pole designed for surface mounting with overload protection 2 14 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS UL 845 NEMA ICS 2 NEMA ICS 3 Wiring shall be Class I Type B in NEMA Type 12 enclosure Provide control centers suitable for operation on 480 volt 3 phase 3 wire 60 Hz system and shall have minimum short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of 42 000 amperes rms symmetrical Incoming power feeder shall be cable entering at the top of enclosure and terminating on terminal lugs Interconnecting wires shall be copper Terminal blocks shall be plug in type so that controllers may be removed without disconnecting individual control wiring 2 14 1 Bus Systems Provide the following bus systems Power bus shall be braced to withstand fault current of 42 000 amperes rms symmetrical Wiring troughs shall be isolated from horizontal and vertical bus bars 2 14 1 1 Horizontal and Main Buses Horizontal bus shall have continuous current rating of 600 amperes
457. raph DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION 345 252 Optional Panels At the option of the Contractor prefabricated metal insulation panels may be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified Thermal performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field applied insulation Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a manufacturer of metal insulation panels Fastenings flashing and support System shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the insulation Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or permanent damage to the insulation Exterior metal cover sheet shall be aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum End of Section SECTION 23 07 00 Page 26 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 23 09 54 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Iy 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL AMCA AMCA 500 1991 Louvers Dampers and Shutters AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE ASHRAE 3 1998 Reducing Emission of Fully Halogenated Refri
458. rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided Series rated circuit breakers and plug in circuit breakers are unacceptable 2 10 2 1 Multipole Breakers Provide common trip type with single operating handle Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A B and C respectively 2 10 2 2 Circuit Breaker With GFCI UL 943 and NFPA 70 Provide with push to test button visible indication of tripped condition and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices for personnel protection 2 10 2 3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors group or individual shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type 2 l1 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS MCP Motor circuit protectors UL 489 MCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor circuit overload and short circuit protection MCPs shall be rated in accordance with NFPA 70 2 12 FUSES NEMA FU 1 Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch and control center Time current cha
459. re cornered tile type or standard boxes having square cornered tile type covers Provide gaskets for cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided Support boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and with machine screws or welded studs on steel Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws expansion shields or machine screws In open overhead spaces cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers Where bar hangers are used attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box and support raceway with approved type fastener maximum 24 in from box When penetrating reinforced concrete members avoid cutting reinforcing steel Jele Syl Boxes Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1 2 in deep except where shallower boxes re
460. recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured A brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed The adhesive shall be allowed to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application Insulation that can be pulled apart one SECTION 23 07 00 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 hour after installation shall be replaced 1 4 Welding No welding shall be done on piping duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct 1 5 Pipes Ducts Equipment which Require Insulation Insulation is required on all pipes ducts or equipment except for omitted items as specified 2 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION 4241 Pipe Insulation v2 lil General Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline Systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder barrier including straight runs fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following a Pipe us
461. rection of the Contracting Officer shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer 3 3 1 Pipe Trenches Excavate to the dimension indicated Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length Rock where encountered shall be excavated to a SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe 2920 Hard Material and Rock Excavation Remove hard material and rock to elevations indicated in a manner that will leave foundation material in an unshattered and solid condition Protect shale from conditions causing decomposition along joints or cleavage planes and other types of erosion Removal of hard material and rock beyond lines and grades indicated will not be grounds for a claim for additional payment unless previously authorized by the Contracting Officer Excavation of the material claimed as rock shall not be performed until the material has been cross sectioned by the Contractor and approved by the Contra
462. red amperage each phase Starter thermal protection element rating 3 912 HEAT TRANSFER COILS A Water Coils Measure the following data for each coil Entering and leaving water temperatures Water flow rate Water pressure drop Dry bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air Wet bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air Airflow Air pressure drop SECTION 23 05 93 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 3 243 TEMPERATURE TESTING A During testing adjusting and balancing report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature control system B Measure indoor wet and dry bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8 hour days in each separately controlled zone to prove correctness of final temperature settings Measure when the building or zone is occupied C Measure outside air wet and dry bulb temperatures 14 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VERIFICATION A Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned B Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions C Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements D Verify operation of limiting controllers i e high and low temperature controllers E Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper a
463. refers to the central processing unit CPU that contains all registers and logic circuitry that allow digital controllers to function 1 3 12 Output Signal Conversion Output signal conversion refers to changing one kind of control output into a proportionally related signal appropriate for direct actuation of the controlled device An example is converting a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal to a proportional 3 to 15 psig signal to operate a pneumatic actuator 1 3 13 Optimum Start Optimum start is a method of starting HVAC equipment prior to scheduled occupancy in order to have the building at set point when occupied Optimum start is based on the zone temperatures zone set points and outdoor temperature 1 3 14 Peer to Peer Peer to peer refers to controllers connected on a communications LAN that act independently as equals and communicate with each other to pass information Ld cet PID PID refers to proportional integral and derivative control the three types of action that are used in controlling modulating equipment 1 3 16 Resolution Refers to the number of possible states an input value or output value can take and is a function of the digital controller I O circuitry the A D converter for input and the D A converter for output Ten bit resolution has 1024 possible states 1 3 17 Stand Alone Control Refers to the digital controller performing required climate control and energy management functions with
464. rements of this section SD 11 Closeout Submittals Submittal register 1 4 USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER DATABASE Prepare and maintain submittal register as the work progresses Use electronic submittal register program furnished by the Government or any other format Do not change data which is output in columns c d e and f as delivered by government retain data which is output in columns a g h and i as approved 1 4 1 Submittal Register Submit submittal register as an electronic database using submittals Management program furnished to contractor Submit with quality control plan and project schedule required by Section 01 45 10 01 45 00 Ouality Control and Section 01 32 17 Network Analysis Schedules Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation Do not change data in columns c d e and f as delivered by the government Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing submittals Complete the following on the register database SECTION 01 33 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Column a Activity Number Activity number from the project schedule Column g Contractor Submit Date Scheduled date for approving authority to receive submittals Column h Contractor Approval Date Date contractor needs approval of submittal Column i Contractor Material Date that contractor needs material delivered to contractor control
465. rences to Units of Measure Units and Size Units are defined in Camp Lejeune existing GIS data for specific feature classes D Geographic Data Documentation the creation of Metadata 1 For each digital file delivered containing geographic information regardless of format the Contractor shall provide documentation consistent with the Federal Geographic Data Committee FGDC Content Standards for Digital Geospatial Metadata CSDGM 2 Data sets derived from GPS data collection efforts shall include metadata to record descriptions of the receiver and other equipment used during collection and processing base stations used for differential corrections software used for performing differential corrections estimated horizontal and vertical accuracies obtained and conversion routines used to translate the data into final geographic data delivery format E Geospatial Data Projection 1 Geographic data regardless of format shall be provided in meters and projected into the Universal Transverse Mercator UTM coordinate system 2 The maps and data shall use UTM Zone 18N the GRS 1980 spheroid and the North American Datum 1983 WGS 84 3 Each data set shall have a projection file if appropriate based on format The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative if applicable will determine map or drawing scales 4 Mapping accuracy for the agreed scales will conform to the American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing
466. required to be replaced Inventory shall indicate location or each piece of equipment Include sketches or drawings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 zl EQUIPMENT Av Packaged Air Handling Units Provide units factory assembled designed tested and rated in accordance with ARI 430 Units shall be ARI certified for cooling Provide heating and cooling units including chilled hot water coils Unit shall include fan section coil section with drain pan variable frequency motor controller filter section and access panels Insulate interior or casing with manufacturer s standard insulation elel Unit Construction A Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners All panels access doors and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb type gasket Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed B Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2 inch nominal thick thermal broke double wall assembly injected with foam insulation with an R value of not less than R 13 The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel 2 The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel Ba The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner 4 Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners Cy Panel deflection shall not exceed L 240 ratio at 125 of design static pressure maximum 5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure Deflection
467. rks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used Attach a copy of the updated Testing Plan and Log to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month 1 13 4 Rework Items List The QC Manager shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract identifying what items need to be reworked the date the item was originally discovered and the date the item was corrected There is no SECTION 01 45 10 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered Attach a copy of the Contractor Rework Items List to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the Contracting Officer 1 13 5 As Built Drawings The QC Manager is required to review the as built drawings required by Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work to ensure that as built drawings are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract drawings The QC Manager shall initial each deviation and each revision Upon completion of work the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as built drawings prior to submission to the Contracting Officer 1 13 6 Report Forms The following forms which are attach
468. rm mass notification devices cabinets and panels The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation adjustment testing and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings SECTION 28 31 76 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 t Manufacturer s Representative The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer s representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel The Manufacturer s Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training on the system being installed 562 Manufacturer Qualifications Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation Provide design materials and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system complete conforming to NFPA 72 except as otherwise or additionally specified herein 2553 Regulatory Requirements Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM P7825a 2 De ed Requirements for Fire Protection Service Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM P7825 Where the terms listed or approved appear in this specification they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a The omission of these terms under the description of any
469. rol Modules Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote control unit Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw type terminals with each terminal marked for identification Locate diodes and relays if any on screw terminals in the remote control unit Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25 percent spare capacity for any circuit 2 11 3 Silencing Switches Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall Silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm Provide trouble and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal but not extinguish the visual indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or Supervisory signal Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated 2 11 4 Non Interfering Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device Cir
470. rom a digital controller on a higher level LAN TCUs do not require an internal clock if they get time information from a higher level digital controller 23 DDC SOFTWARE 2 2 Programming Software All controllers except TCU s shall be programmable The operating software shall be created using a windows based drag and drop graphical programming Software TCU s may have permanently installed un modifiable programs with modifiable parameters 2 3 2 Sequence of Control The sequence of control shall be as shown on the drawings 2 35241 Parameter Modification Provide software to modify control parameters Parameter modification shall be accomplished for all controllers high level and low level application specific through the laptop workstation computer or keypad terminal directly at each controller Modifications shall be accomplished without having to make changes directly in un compiled programming Database parameters in the following list that take real number values shall require assignment of variable names so parameters can be changed without modifying programming Alternatively block programming languages shall provide for modification of these database parameters in fill in the blank screens Parameters of like type including those in different high level and low level controllers may be grouped together for a single global change For example an operator may group all second floor space temperature set points into a group an
471. roposed variance Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation Sow seed by approved sowing equipment Sow one half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing 3 2 2 Seed Application Method Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding 3 2 2 1 Broadcast and Drop Seeding Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate indicated in section titled Seed Mixture by Weight pounds per 1000 square feet Use broadcast or drop seeders Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1 4 inch in clay Soils and 1 2 inch in sandy soils by means of spike tooth harrow cultipacker raking or other approved devices 3 253 Mulching 3 2534 Hay or Straw Mulch Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre Mulch shall be spread by hand blower type mulch spreader or other approved method Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes and continued uniformly until the area is covered The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding Mulch shall be anchored immediately following Spreading 32243212 Asphalt Adhesive Tackifier Asphalt adhesive tackifier shall be sprayed at a rate between 10 to 13 gallons per 1000 square feet Sunlight shall not be completely e
472. rs A component failure e g motor burnout gear tooth failure bearing failure is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components e g dropped boom dropped load roll over etc 1 4 CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF EVALUATION CHECKLIST Contracting Officer will provide a Contractor Safety Self Evaluation checklist to the Contractor at the pre construction conference The checklist will be completed monthly by the Contractor and submitted with each request for payment voucher An acceptable score of 90 or greater is required Failure to submit the completed safety self evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least 90 will result in a retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher l45 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract work performed shall comply with USACE EM 385 1 1 and the following laws ordinances criteria rules and regulations Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work Where the requirements of this Specification applicable laws criteria ordinances regulations and referenced documents vary the most stringent requirements shall apply 1 6 DRUG PREVENTION PROGRAM Conduct a proactive drug and alcohol use prevention program for all SECTION 01 35 29 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235
473. rs of arrival on site 8 2 Interchangeable Parts Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate tagging or stamping Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing 8 3 Special Tools Software connecting cables and proprietary equipment necessary for the maintenance testing and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer 49 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE Technical data and computer software meaning technical data that relates to computer software that is specifically identified in this project and may be defined required in other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished Data to be submitted shall include complete system equipment and software descriptions Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract The data package shall also include the following 1 Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities 2 Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software
474. rson must evaluate all hazards including atmospheric that may be associated with the work and shall have the resources necessary to correct hazards promptly The competent person shall perform soil classification in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 SECTION 01 35 29 Page 22 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3s 6 1 Utility Locations Prior to digging the appropriate digging permit must be obtained 11 underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a private utility locating service in addition to any station locating Service and coordinated with the station utility department Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract 264 2 Utility Location Verification The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground System Digging within 061 m 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed by means of mechanical equipment hand digging shall be used If construction is parallel to an existing utility the utility shall be exposed by hand digging every 30 5 m 100 feet if parallel within 1 5 m 5 feet of the excavation 6 3 Utilities with Concrete Slabs Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier decks bridges and the like are extremely difficult to identify The location must be c
475. rtmental Type Self Cooled Three Phase Distribution Transformers with High Voltage Bushings 2500 kVA and Smaller High Voltage 34 500 Grdy 19 920 Volts and Below Low Voltage 480 Volts and Below NEMA C57 12 26 1993 Pad Mounted Compartmental Type Self Cooled Three Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High Voltage Connectors High Voltage 34 500 Grd Y 19 920 Volts and Below 2500 kVA and Smaller NEMA C57 12 28 1999 Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity Revision of ANSI C57 12 28 88 NEMA C57 12 29 1999 Errata 2000 Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2003 Acceptance Testing Specifications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 467 1993 R 2001 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods and Section 26 08 00 Apparatus Inspection and Testing apply to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein 143 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES As an exception to this paragraph transformers manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City MO by Cooper Power Systems in Waukesha WI by GE in Shreveport LA or by Howard Industries in Laurel MS need not meet
476. ry trained representative shall be provided for 2 days The representative shall advise on the following SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 a Hermetic machines 1 Testing hermetic water chilling unit under pressure for refrigerant leaks evacuation and dehydration of machine to an absolute pressure of not over 300 microns 2 Charging the machine with refrigerant 3 Starting the machine 3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING Equipment shall be wiped clean with all traces of oil dust dirt or paint spots removed Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction and new filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building System shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer Belts shall be tightened to proper tension Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions Testing adjusting and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 1 General Requirements Before each refrigeration system is accepted tests to demonstrate the general operating char
477. s d In accordance with station regulations substitute materials as necessary to reduce the generation of HW and include a statement to that effect in the Environmental Plan e Contact Contracting Officer for conditions in the area of the project which may be subject to special environmental procedures Include this information in the Preconstruction Survey Describe in the Environmental Protection Plan any permits required prior to working the area and contingency plans in case an unexpected environmental condition is discovered f Obtain permits for handling HW and deliver completed documents to Contracting Officer for review File the documents with the appropriate agency and complete disposal with the approval of SECTION 01 57 19 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Contracting Officer Deliver correspondence with the State concerning the environmental permits and completed permits to Contracting Officer 1 6 2 Environmental Protection Plan Format The Environmental Protection Plan shall follow the following format ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN Contractor Organization Address and Phone Numbers 1 Hazardous materials to be brought onto the station 2 MSDS package 3 Employee training documentation 4 storage plan 5 HW to be generated 6 Preconstruction survey results 7 Permitting requirements identified 1 6 3 Environmental Plan Review Fourteen days after the environmental protection meeting
478. s ASME B30 5 2000 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes ASME B30 8 2000 Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks ASME B30 22 2000 Articulating Boom Cranes NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 10 2002 Potable Fire Extinguishers NFPA 241 2004 Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operations NFPA 51B 2003 Fire Prevention During Welding Cutting and Other Hot Work NFPA 70 2005 National Electrical Code U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USACE EM 385 1 1 2003 Safety and Health Requirements Manual U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 20 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910 146 Permit required Confined Spaces SECTION 01 35 29 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp 245 05080050 29 CER 1910 94 Ventilation 29 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard Employment 29 CFR 1919 Gear Certification 29 CER 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 29 CFR 1926 500 Fall Protection 1 2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan APP Activity Hazard Analysis AHA Crane Critical Lift Plan Crane Work Plan Proof of qualifications for Crane Operators SD 06 Test Reports Reports Submit reports as their incidence occurs in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled
479. s Water and steam flow rates Duct outlet and inlet sizes Pipe and valve sizes and locations Terminal units Balancing stations Handling Unit Test Reports For air handling units with coils the following Unit Data Include the following Unit identification Location Make and type Model number and unit size Manufacturer s serial number Unit arrangement and class Discharge arrangement Sheave make size in inches and bore Sheave dimensions center to center and amount of adjustments in inches PAUP TQ Number of belts make and size Number of filters type and size Motor Data Include the following Make and frame type and size Horsepower and rpm Volts phase and hertz Full load amperage and service factor Sheave make size in inches and bore Sheave dimensions center to center and amount of adjustments in hes Test Data Include design and actual values for the following Total airflow rate in cfm Total system static pressure in inches wg Fan rpm Discharge static pressure in inches wg Filter static pressure differential in inches wg Preheat coil static pressure differential in inches wg Cooling coil static pressure differential in inches wg Outside airflow in cfm Return airflow in cfm Outside air damper position Return air damper position Vortex damper position SECTION 23 05 93 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 G
480. s Gate Air Release Hydrant ball e Size f Size Units Ground Elevation Valve Elevation Size Unit SECTION 01 77 00 Page 21 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 j Manhole ID k X Coordinates 1 Y Coordinates m Contract Number Drawing Type o Drawing Number p Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing HH Water Fitting LEJEUNE water fitting point 1 Georeference and collect the following attributes a Date Acquired Year b Disposition c Type Tee Cap Bend etc d Material e Size f Size Units g Contract Number h Drawing Type i Drawing Number j Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing II Water Well LEJEUNE water well point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Well ID Facility Number b Use potable non potable Well Status d Station ID Building Number e Date Acquired Year f Disposition g X Coordinates h Y Coordinates i Tank ID Water Tank Facility Number j Contract Number k Drawing Type 1 Drawing Number m Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing JJ Water Manhole LEJEUNE water junction point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Subtype b Use Material e Number Valves f Number Pi
481. s When employees are working overhead all tools and equipment shall be secured so that they will not fall When using guardrail as falling object protection all openings shall be small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects End of Section SECTION 01 35 29 Page 25 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL Ls 1 REFERENCES Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work These references are identified in each section by document number date and title The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization e g ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings However when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes 42 ORDERING INFORMATION The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization that information is also provided Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGE
482. s after rainfall Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer s instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system indicating the location of the rod and grounding System Include the test method and test setup i e pin location used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made Follow Up Verification Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests the Contractor shall show SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 13 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing End of Section SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL L 3l REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM
483. s as defined in paragraph CHILLER COMPONENTS a Refrigerant and oil b Structural base Chiller refrigerant circuit d Controls package e Scroll reciprocating or rotary screw compressor SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 2 f Compressor driver electric motor g Compressor driver connection h Liquid cooler evaporator i Air cooled condenser coil j Tools D CHILLER COMPONENTS 1 Refrigerant and Oil Refrigerants shall be R 134A or R 410A only Refrigerants shall have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with ASHRAE 34 Refrigerants shall meet the requirements of ARI 700 as a minimum Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential ODP of less than or equal to 0 05 5 amp 2 Structural Base Chiller and individual chiller components shall be provided with a factory mounted structural steel base welded or bolted or support legs Chiller and individual chiller components shall be isolated from the building structure by means of molded neoprene isolation pads 5 3 Chiller Refrigerant Circuit Chiller refrigerant circuit shall be completely piped and factory leak tested For multicompressor units not less than 2 independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided Circuit shall include as a minimum a combination filter and drier combination sight glass and moisture indicator liquid line solenoid valve for reciprocating an
484. s of Chapter 1 shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer Replace damaged or defective items SECTION 23 03 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Le 5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Furnish motors controllers disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment Motors controllers disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION RE
485. s or in approved laminated plastic Post instructions where directed For operating instructions exposed to the weather provide weather resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling 1 8 NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each panelboard equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style l9 WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations pad mounted transformers pad mounted switches generators and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts a When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with NEMA C57 12 28 such as for pad mounted transformers provide self adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door s Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the lege
486. s responsible for correcting all associated ground loop problems d Wiring in panel enclosures shall be run in covered wire track 2122 Digital Controllers a Do not divide control of a single mechanical system such as an air handling unit heat exchanger or terminal equipment between two or more controllers A single controller shall manage control functions for a single mechanical system It is permissible however to manage more than one mechanical system with a single controller b Provide digital control cabinets that protect digital controller electronics from dust at locations shown on the drawings 1 3 Temperature Sensors Provide temperature sensors in locations to sense the appropriate condition Provide sensor where they are easy to access and service without special tools Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified In no case will sensors designed for one application be installed for another application 143 Room Temperature Sensors Provide on interior walls to sense average room temperature conditions Avoid locations near heat sources or which may be covered by office furniture Room temperature sensors should not be mounted on exterior walls when other locations are available Mount center of sensor at 5 feet above finished floor 3 143 2 Duct Temperature Sensors a Provide sensors in ductwork in general locations as indicated Select specific sensor location within duct to accurately sense appropriate air t
487. s shall be as shown and unless otherwise indicated all motors of 1 horsepower and above with open dripproof totally enclosed or explosion proof fan cooled enclosures shall be high efficiency type Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Each motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 and NEMA MG 2 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor Motors shall be continuous duty with the enclosure specified Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated Motors shall be furnished with a magnetic across the line or reduced voltage type starter as required by the manufacturer Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop Motors shall be sized for the applicable loads Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified but not shown shall be provided 2 4 SELF CONTAINED LIQUID C
488. s stated otherwise in the specification sections perform sampling and testing required under this Contract siket Testing Laboratory Requirements Provide an independent testing laboratory or establish a laboratory quali fied to perform sampling and tests required by this Contract When the proposed testing laboratory is not accredited by an acceptable accreditation program as described by the paragraph entitled Accredited Laboratories submit to the Contracting Officer for approval certified statements signed by an official of the testing laboratory attesting that the proposed laboratory meets or conforms to the following requirements a Sampling and testing shall be under the technical direction of a Registered Professional Engineer P E with at least 5 years of experience in construction material testing b Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077 c Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666 d Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock as used in engineering design and construction shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740 e Laboratories engaged in inspection and testing of steel stainless steel and related alloys will be evaluated according to ASTM A 880 Laboratories shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329 f Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing NDT shall m
489. safety requirements Trailers shall be roadworthy and comply with all appropriate state and local vehicle requirements Failure to maintain storage trailers or buildings to these standards shall result in the removal of non complying units at the Contractor s expense A sign not smaller than 24 by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed on the trailer depicting the company name business phone number and emergency phone number Trailers shall be anchored to resist high winds and must meet applicable state of local standards for anchoring mobile trailers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 AE Backflow Preventers Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements AWWA C511 Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged cast iron bronze brass mounted gate valve and strainer stainless steel or bronze internal parts The particular make model design and size of backflow preventers to be installed shall be included in the latest edition of the List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR USC and shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR USC PART 3 EXECUTION 3 221 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Provide an approved reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly at each location where the Contractor taps into the Government potable water supply A certified tester s shall perform testing of backflow preventer s for proper installation and operation
490. se and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition the insulation will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces Insulation jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings 2 2 Firestopping Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls fire partitions above grade floors and fire rated chase walls the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Sections 1 3 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive Insulation with pre applied adhesive is not permitted Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 200 degrees F Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as
491. ses heat output as temperature increases at each point along the length of tape Provide voltage as indicated Provide heat tape complete with fittings adapters and fittings adapters and other devices to connect tape to standard rigid Steel conduit junction boxes switches or other devices as indicated Provide tape sealants and jumper connectors up to 5 inches in length for connecting multiple runs Provide a thermostat that activates the heat tape on drop of outside air temperature at 38 F Thermostat shall have maximum tolerance of plus or minus 5 degrees F and maximum operating differential of 6 degrees F within temperature operating range Wattage per foot of pipe at 50 F shall be as follows This wattage may be achieved by spiraling the tape around the pipe Pipe Diameter Inches 1 2 3 4 1 1 25 125 2 3 4 And Larger Pumps Watt Foot 2 2 2 45 245 3 3 5 4 6 6 1 Pressure Temperature Test Ports Plugs Provide solid brass test plugs where indicated Test plug shall be capable of receiving a pressure or temperature probe 1 8 inch o d Dual seal core shall be rated zero leakage from vacuum to 200 psig and 0 F to 220 F Each plug shall be extended through pipe insulation and be capped Provide 2 each pressure gauge adapters with 1 8 inch o d probe 5 inch stem pocket testing thermometers for 25 F to 125 F and O F to 220 F af ACCESS DOORS FOR VALVES Provide factory prefabricated and primed flush face steel access doors i
492. shall be measured at the panel midpoint SECTION 23 73 33 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Di The casing leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure 0025 m3 s per square meter of cabinet area at 1 24 kPa static pressure E Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on site labor and meet indoor air quality standards F Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano type hinges latch and full size handle assembly Access doors shall swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure Access doors on positive pressure sections shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access G A 8 inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural rigidity and condensate trapping The base rail shall be constructed with 12 gauge nominal for unit sizes 003 035 and 10 gauge nominal for unit sizes 040 090 The following calculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for adequate drainage Use the largest pressure to determine base rail height Negative Positive static pressure in 2 4 required baser
493. sional utility locator to scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered Verify the elevations of existing piping utilities and any type of underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be removed but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping ducts and other work to be installed Verify elevations before installing new work closer than SECTION 01 11 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made 1 3 1 Notification Prior to Excavation Notify the Contracting Officer 48 hours prior to starting excavation work Obtain station digging permits prior to starting excavation work PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 11 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 12 00 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 CUTTING Shall be done by sawing along straight lines The amount cut out shall be the minimum necessary to accommodate the new work No flame cutting will be permitted without written permission of the Officer in Charge of Construction 2 HOLES Shall be rotary drilled The size shall be the minimum necessary to accommodate the new work ES PATCHING Shall be done with materials which match
494. sistant seal It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any Hot Work done at this activity The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit a Oil painting materials paint brushes empty paint cans etc and all flammable liquids shall be removed from the facility at quitting time All painting materials and flammable liquids shall be stored outside in a suitable metal locker or box and will require re submittal with non hazardous materials b Accumulation of trays paper shavings sawdust boxes and other packing materials shall be removed from the facility at the close of each workday and such material disposed of in the proper containers located away from the facility SECTION 01 35 29 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 c The storage of combustible supplies shall be a safe distance from structures d Area outside the facility undergoing work shall be cleaned of trash paper or other discarded combustibles at the close of each workday e All portable electric devices saws sanders compressors extension chord lights etc shall be disconnected at the close of each workday When possible the main electric switch in the facility shall be deactivated f When starting work in the facility Contractors shall require their personnel to familiarize themselves with t
495. son and firm senior person preparing the APP the Contractor the on site superintendent the designated site safety and health officer and any designated CSP and or CIH Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP The Contracting Officer reviews and comments on the Contractor s submitted APP and accepts it when it meets the requirements of the contract provisions Once accepted by the Contracting Officer the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work at the discretion of the Contracting Officer until the matter has been rectified Once work begins changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer project Superintendent SSHO and quality control manager Should any unforeseen hazard become evident during the performance of work the project superintendent shall inform the Contracting Officer both verbally and in writing for resolution as soon as possible In the interim all necessary action shall be taken by the Contractor to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel visitors the public and the environment Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the resident engineer s office a
496. status of I O and virtual points shall be displayed on command SECTION 23 09 54 Page 18 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Points shall be associated into functional groups such as all the I O and virtual points associated with control of a single air handling unit and displayed as a group so the status of a single mechanical system can be readily checked A group shall be selectable from a menu of groups having meaningful names such as AHU 4 Second Floor Chiller System and other such names 3 13 Diagnostics Each controller shall perform self diagnostic routines and provide messages to an operator when errors are detected The DDC system shall be capable of recognizing a non responsive module on a LAN The remaining responsive modules on a LAN shall not operate in a degraded mode 239 4 4 Power Loss During a power outage each controller shall assume a disabled status and outputs shall go to a user definable state Upon restoration of power DDC System shall perform an orderly restart with sequencing of outputs 23515 Program Transfer Provide software for download of control programs and database from a computer to controllers and upload of same to computer from controllers Every digital controller in the DDC system shall be capable of being downloaded and uploaded to through a single controller on the highest level LAN 3 16 Password Protection Provide at least three levels of password protection to the DDC
497. stem shall be provided Tools shall be mounted on a tool board in the equipment room or contained in a toolbox as directed by the Contracting Officer 2 6 ACCESSORIES 2 6 1 Refrigerant Relief Valve Rupture Disc Assembly The assembly shall be a combination pressure relief valve and rupture disc designed for refrigerant usage The assembly shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and ASHRAE 15 The assembly shall be provided with a pressure gauge assembly which will provide local indication if a rupture disc is broken Rupture disc shall be the non fragmenting type 2 6 2 Refrigerant Signs Refrigerant signs shall be a medium weight aluminum type with a baked enamel finish Signs shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service Signs shall have a white background with red letters not less than 0 5 inches in height 2 6 2 1 Installation Identification Each new refrigerating system shall be provided with a refrigerant sign which indicates the following as a minimum a Contractor s name b Refrigerant number and amount of refrigerant The lubricant identity and amount d Field test pressure applied 2 6 2 2 Controls and Piping Identification Refrigerant systems containing more than 110 lb of refrigerant shall be provided with refrigerant signs which designate the following as a minimum a Valves or switches for controlling the refrigerant flow and the refrigerant compressor s b Pressure limiting device s SEC
498. stible wastes such as ashes and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work leaves and tree trimmings 3 6 Chemical Wastes This includes salts acids alkalies herbicides pesticides and organic chemicals 3 7 Garbage Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation cooking dispensing and consumption of food 3 8 Hazardous Waste Hazardous substances as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and local regulations 3 9 Hazardous Materials Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172 22322100 Landscape Features Trees plants shrubs and ground cover SECTION 01 57 19 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 i 3411 Lead Acid Battery Electrolyte The electrolyte substance liquid medium within a battery cell 3 12 Oily Waste Petroleum products and bituminous materials 23213 Class I Ozone Depleting Substance ODS Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Sections 602 a and b of The Clean Air Act 4 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental protection plan Preconstruction survey report SD 11 Closeout Submittals Solid waste disposal permit Disposal permit for hazardous waste Environmental training documentation Permit to transport hazardous waste Hazardous waste certification Environmental Plan Review A
499. struction Submittals Certificates of insurance Surety bonds List of proposed subcontractors List of proposed products Construction Progress Schedule Submittal schedule Schedule of values Health and safety plan Work plan Quality control plan Environmental protection plan SD 02 Shop Drawings Drawings diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated SD 03 Product Data Catalog cuts illustrations schedules diagrams performance charts instructions and brochures illustrating size physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment for some portion of the work Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties SD 04 Samples Physical examples of materials equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged SECTION 01 33 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Color samples from the manufacturer s standard line or custom color samples if specified to be used in selecting or approving colors for the proje
500. sulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Thermal insulation shall be replaced with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics idis 2 Data and Communication Cabling Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re enterable firestopping products that do not cure over time Firestopping shall be modular devices containing built in self sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves adds or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials 53 INSPECTION For Navy projects install one of each type of penetration and have it inspected and accepted by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer prior to the installation of the remainder of the penetrations At this inspection the manufacturer s technical representative of the firestopping material shall be present For all projects the remainder of the firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved by the manufacturer s technical representative The manufacturer s representative shall inspect the applications initially to ensure adequate preparations clean surfaces Suitable for application etc and periodically during the work to assure that the completed work has been accomplished according to the manufacturer s written instructions and the specified requirements The Contractor shall submit written
501. sure at two opposite places using 4 0 copper Exothermically weld joints 3 4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Install and connect pad mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings the approved shop drawings and as specified herein 3 5 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Mount transformer on concrete slab Unless otherwise indicated the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick reinforced with a 6 by 6 W2 9 by W2 9 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick well compacted gravel base Top of concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage Edges above grade shall have 1 2 inch chamfer Slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment Stub up conduits with bushings 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas 3 5 1 Cast In Place Concrete Cast in place concrete work shall conform to the requirements as specified on the drawings 3 5 2 Sealing When the installation is complete the Contractor shall seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents insects or other foreign matter 3 6 FIELD Q
502. switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm h Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors i Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits fire reporting system features Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output j Alarm supervisory and or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to a UL listed central station k Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions l The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard Programmed information shall be stored in non volatile memory m The system shall be capable of operating supervising and or monitoring both addressable and non addressable alarm and supervisory devices n There shall be no limit other than maximum system capacity as to the number of addressable devices that may be in alarm simultaneously o Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device p An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Transmission of an alarm signal to a UL listed central station 2 Visual indication of the device operated on the
503. switches indicated 11 2 Wiring and Conduit Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies the conduit and wiring connecting such centers assemblies or other power sources to equipment under Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Power wiring and conduit shall conform to Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Control wiring and conduit shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment 1 11 3 Modifications to Existing Systems Where existing mechanical systems and motor operated equipment require modifications provide electrical components under Division 16 SECTION 26 00 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 1 High Efficiency Motors 11 4 1 High Efficiency Single Phase Motors Unless otherwise specified single phase fractional horsepower alternating current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11 11 4 2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors Unless otherwise specified polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10 Additionally polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors
504. system permitting different levels of access to the system The lowest level allows monitoring only The highest level allows full control of all functions including setting new passwords 2310 Network Variable Instance Chart The Network Variable Instance Chart is a graphical listing of all the points and how they are seen electronically by their respective networks The two Network Variable Instance Charts below are examples of the type of information required for each point The first chart is for the Bacnet Protocol SAMPLE CHART POINT POINT Object Instance BacNet NAME DESCRIPTION Type Network BAC ChillWtrSYS Chilled Water Device 1000 95 System Controller BAC CrsOvrLpFlw Cross Over Loop Analog 1001 95 Chill Wtr Flow Input BAC CrsOvrLpTmp Cross Over Loop Analog 1002 95 Chill Wt Temp Input BAC FL1 DA11 Flri Zone 1 Analog 1006 95 Discharge Air T Input SECTION 23 09 54 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SAMPLE CHART POINT POINT Object Instance BacNet NAME DESCRIPTION Type Network BAC FL1 DA12 Flrl Zone 2 Analog 1007 95 Discharge Air T Input BAC FL1 DA2 Flrl Zone 3 Analog 1008 95 Discharge Air T Input BAC L1 DA3 Flrl1 Zone 4 Analog 1009 95 Discharge Air T Input BAC LL1 RA Lower Levi Analog 1010 95 Return Air Temp Input BAC LL1 RHUM Lower Lev1 Ret Analog 1011 95 Air Humidity Input BAC LL1 RS Lower Levl Ret Analog 1012 95 Static Pressure Input BAC LL1RLOAD Lower
505. t submittals are in compliance with contract requirements The Contracting Officer is the approving authority for all submittals 1 25 2 Constraints a Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this section unless explicitly stated otherwise b Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work components of definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time c When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions items or materials included in separate subsequent submittals submittal will be returned without review d Approval of a separate material product or component does not imply approval of assembly in which item functions 1 5 3 Scheduling a Coordinate scheduling sequencing preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing Allow for potential requirements to resubmit b Except as specified otherwise allow review period beginning with receipt by approving authority that includes at least 15 working days for submittals for QC manager approval and 20 working days for submittals for contracting officer approval Period of review for submittals with contracting officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organization Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal c For submittals requiring review by fire prote
506. tal having round or beveled edges For SECTION 26 20 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 nonmetallic boxes and fittings other suitable plates may be provided Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan minimum 0 03 inch wall thickness Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted Screws shall be machine type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate Sectional type device plates will not be permitted Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for wet locations 2 8 SWITCHES 2 8 1 Toggle Switches NEMA WD 1 UL 20 single pole and three way totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic and or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw Handles shall be ivory thermoplastic Wiring terminals shall be Screw type side wired Contacts shall be silver cadmium and contact arm shall be one piece copper alloy Switches shall be rated quiet type ac only 120 277 volts with current rating and number of poles indicated 24842 Disconnect Switches NEMA KS 1 Provide heavy duty type switches where indicated where Switches are rated higher than 240 volts and for double throw switches Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses unless indicated otherwise Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated Provide switches in NEMA 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 2 9 RECEPTACLES Grounding ty
507. tallation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications 1 8 ACCESSIBILITY Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install concealed valves expansion joints controls dampers and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible through access doors l9 EOUIPMENT INVENTORY UPDATE Submit information for each piece of equipment removed and supplied for use of Camp Lejeune to update the Maximo equipment inventory For the purposes of this paragraph inventoried equipment is defined as equipment listed on the Maximo Equipment Inventory Update form 1 9 1 Requirements The contractor shall prepare and submit one Maximo Equipment I
508. tasks Sections A H will result in non acceptance of data deliverable 1 2 2 3 Submittals A Geospatial Data Software Format Geographic data must be provided SECTION 01 77 00 Page 23 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 in a form that does not require translation preprocessing or post processing before being used in the IGIR System Digital geographic maps and the related data sets shall be delivered in one of the following software formats Any maps drawings figures sketches databases spreadsheets or text files prepared for this contract shall be provided in both hard copy and digital form The contractor shall deliver hard copy paper ANSI E Maps of digital data with structure identifications or numbers road names and other relevant information displayed and or labeled in ArcMap and Adobe Portable Document Format PDF of final data 1 PREFERRED In a personal geodatabase format Access database file using ArcGIS 9 1 The personal geodatabase must be importable to an Oracle 10g multi user geodatabase using ArcSDE 9 1 2 ALTERNATIVE 1 In double precision standard ESRI shapefile format 1 2 2 4 Geographic Data Review 1 The digital geographic maps GPS and related data and text documents shall be included for review in the draft and final contract submittals 2 For each review of digital geospatial data deliverables the Contractor shall provide a technical consultant to meet on site at Camp Lejeune with the
509. tate test voltage levels 3 Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of digitized waveforms with test report d Lifting and moving devices Basically the same design requirement for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with NEMA C57 12 22 SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 9 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 e Pressure Basically the same design for the pressure test means a pad mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified 6 3 Routine and Other Tests IEEE C57 12 00 Routine and other tests shall be performed by the manufacturer on the actual transformer s prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production Submit test reports by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows a Cold resistance measurements provide reference temperature b Phase relation c Ratio d No load losses NLL and excitation current e Load losses LL and impedance voltage f Dielectric 1 Impulse 2 Applied voltage 3 Induced voltage g Leak PART 3 EXECUTION 3 aL INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to requirements specified herein
510. tating that he she is responsible for managing and implementing the QC program as described in this contract Include in this letter the QC Manager s authority to direct the removal and replacement of non conforming work g Procedures for reviewing approving and managing submittals Provide the names of the persons in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval h Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled Accredited Laboratories or Testing Laboratory Requirements as applicable i A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test the frequency and the person responsible for each test j Procedures to identify record track and complete rework items k Documentation procedures including proposed report formats 1 A list of the definable features of work A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires separate control requirements As a minimum if approved by the Contracting Officer consider each Section of the Specifications as a definable feature of work However at times there may be more than one definable feature of work in each Section of the Specifications m A personnel matrix showing for each section of the specification who will perform and document the three phases of control and who SECTION 01 45 10 Page 4 HVAC REPAI
511. td 48 1996 High Voltage Alternating Current Cable Terminations NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA RN 1 1989 Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit To 2 1998 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Tubing and Conduit TO 3 1999 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing WC 8 1993 Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the SECTION 33 71 02 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 NETA ATS NFPA 70 NFPA 70B UL 467 UL 486A LL BID UL 514A UL 514B UL 651 UL 1242 Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA 2003 Acceptance Testing Specifications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA 2005 National Electrical Code 1998 Electrical Equipment Maintenance UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 2000 Bul 2001 2002 Rigid Metal Conduit Steel 1998 R 2001 Bul 2002 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 1993 R 2001 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 1997 R 2001 Bul 2002 2003 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 1994 R 1998 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 1996 R 2001 Bul 2002 Metallic Outlet Boxes 1997 R 2002 Bul 2002 Fittings for Cable and Conduit 1995 R 2002 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit 1996 R 1998
512. teNet Interface Port Provide one additional communications port in each DDC system permitting remote communications via the Site Building controller 2 1 13 Digital Controller Cabinet Each indoor digital controller cabinet shall protect the controller from dust and shall be rated NEMA 1 unless specified otherwise Cabinets located in the central energy plant building and on the exterior wall of the central energy plant shall be NEMA 4X Each outdoor digital controller cabinet shall protect the controller from all outside conditions and shall be rated NEMA 4X Cabinets for high level controllers shall be hinged door lockable and have offset removable metal back plate 2 1 14 Main Power Switch Each controller on the highest level LAN or each control cabinet shall have a main external power switch for isolation of the controller from AC power The switch shall be located in the DDC cabinet SECTION 23 09 54 Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 21515 Site Building Controller SBC Provide a Site Building Controller The SBC shall be a NAE 55 by Johnson Controls Provide all necessary drivers to communicate between SBC and provided DDC upper level controller 2 2 TERMINAL CONTROL UNITS a The same company as the digital controllers shall manufacture TCUs b TCUs shall automatically start up on return of power after a failure and previous operating parameters shall exist or shall be automatically downloaded f
513. ted Do not run tubing and electrical power conductors in the same conduit 21 9 Control Drawings a Post laminated copies of as built control system drawings in each mechanical room b Provide 3 sets of as built control drawings to the Contracting Officer 2 TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT Controls contractor will coordinate with and provide full time on site technical support to test and balance TAB personnel specified under Section 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING or any other documents in the project specification This support shall include a On site operation of control systems for proper operating modes during all phases of balancing and testing b Control setpoint adjustments for proper balancing of all relevant mechanical systems including VAV boxes C Setting all control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB personnel 22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL S31 General a Demonstrate compliance of the heating ventilating and air conditioning control system with the contract documents Furnish personnel equipment instrumentation and supplies necessary to perform calibration and site testing Ensure that test personnel are regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems b Testing will include the field tests and the performance verification tests Field tests shall demonstrate proper calibration of input and output devices and the operation of Specific equipment Perfor
514. ted and sized for a minimum of 5 degrees F subcooling and full pumpdown capacity Coil shall be factory leak and pressure tested after assembly in accordance with ASHRAE 15 5 9 Receivers Liquid receivers not already specified herein as an integral factory mounted part of a package shall be designed fitted and rated in accordance with the recommendations of ARI 495 except as modified herein Receiver shall bear a stamp certifying compliance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 SECTION 23 64 00 00 10 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 and shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 Inner surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved means Each receiver shall have a storage capacity not less than 20 percent in excess of that required for the fully charged system Each receiver shall be equipped with inlet outlet drop pipe drain plug purging valve relief valves of capacity and setting required by ASHRAE 15 and two bull s eye liquid level sight glasses Sight glasses shall be in the same vertical plane 90 degrees apart perpendicular to the axis of the receiver and not over 3 inches horizontally from the drop pipe measured along the axis of the receiver In lieu of bull s eye sight glass external gauge glass with metal glass guard and automatic closing stop valves may be provided 2 5 10 Tools One complete set of special tools as recommended by the manufacturer for field maintenance of the sy
515. tem operating pressure whichever is greater Valve leakage rating shall be 0 01 percent of rated Cv Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class 150 steel or stainless steel valves shall conform to ASME ANSI B16 5 as a minimum Cast iron valve components shall conform to ASTM A 126 Class B or C as a minimum ede 2 2 Butterfly Valve Assembly Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead end service and for modulation to the fully closed position with noncorrosive discs stainless steel shafts supported by bearing and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F Valves shall have a manual means of operation independent of the actuator 2 23 Two Way Valves Two way modulating valves shall have equal percentage characteristics 7 224 Three Way Valves Three way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics Pal 2s5 Duct Coil and Terminal Unit Coil Valves Provide control valves with either flare type or solder type ends provided for duct or terminal unit coils Provide flare nuts for each flare type end valve 245174246 Valves for Chilled Water Service a Bodies for valves 1 1 2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze with threaded or union ends Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass bronze or iron SECTION 23 09 54 Page 24 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends Bodies
516. th AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws Wet moldy or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected 222 2 Planting Dates Planting Season Planting Dates Season 1 AUGUST 15 MARCH 15 Season 2 MARCH 15 AUGUST 15 Temporary Seeding ALL YEAR SECTION 32 92 19 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 123 Seed Purity Min Min Percent Max Botanical Common Percent Germination Percent Name Name Pure Seed and Hard Seed Weed Seed Pennisetum Browntop 98 85 5 Glaucum Millet Cynoden Bermuda Grass 98 85 5 Dactylon Lolium Domestic 98 85 5 Multiflorum Italian Rye 2 1 4 Seed Mixture by Weight Per 1 000 SF Planting Season Variety by Weight Season 1 Unhulled Bermuda 3 4 lb Rye Grain 1 1 2 lb Fertilizer 8 lb Season 2 Hulled Bermuda 3 4 lb Brown Top Millet 6 oz Rye Grass Brown Top Millet 5 lb Fertilizer 8 lb Wood Fiber 35 lb Tac Material Mixed with Water 1 gal Proportion seed mixtures by weight Temporary seeding must later be replaced by Season 1 or Season 2 plantings for a permanent stand of grass The same requirements of turf establishment for Season 1 and Season 2 apply for temporary seeding 2 2 TOPSOIL 2 2 1 On Site Topsoil Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site Topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site in accordance with Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL 24 2 2 Composition Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter Maximum particle s
517. the submittal requirements of this contract Instead the following shall be submitted SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a A certification from the manufacturer that the technical requirements of this specification shall be met b An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item a c ANSI nameplate data of the transformer paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item b d Manufacturer s published time current curves on full size logarithmic paper of the transformer high side fuses paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item e e Routine and other tests in PART 2 see paragraph entitled Routine and Other Tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by the government in Part 2 see paragraph entitled Source Quality Control Provide transformer test schedule required by submittal item SD 11 Closeout Submittals Provide certified copies of the tests f Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item SD 06 Test Reports g Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data SD 02 Shop Drawings Pad mounted transformer drawings SD 03 Product Data Pad mounted transformers SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests SD 07 Certificates Transformer losses SD 09 Manufacturer s Fiel
518. the existing in color quality and surface texture when finished PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used End of Section SECTION 01 12 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL Js dl ls 1 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES 1 1 Station Regulations Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Station become familiar with and obey Station regulations Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress as directed Do not enter restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry Wear hard hats in designated areas Do not enter any restricted aras unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry The Contractor s equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification 4122 Working Hours Regular working hours shall consist of an eight and one half hour period established by the Contracting Officer Monday through Friday excluding Government holidays 1 3 Work Outside Regular Hours Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval Provide written request at least 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress During periods of darkness the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer 1 4 Occupied and Existing
519. the manufacturer Where gaps occur the section shall be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling All Staples including those used to repair factory self seal lap systems shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape All seams except those on factory self seal systems shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it with adhesive stapling and coating with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape The patch shall extend not less than 1 1 2 inches past the break At penetrations such as thermometers the voids in the insulation shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing Alternately whenever possible slide un slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing All seams
520. they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning J Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations K Examine 3 way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows L Examine heat transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins M Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls N Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following 1 Dampers valves and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller 2 Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller 3 Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions This includes dampers in variable air volume terminals 4 Automatic modulating and shutoff valves including 3 way mixing and diverting valves are properly connected 5 Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight drafts and cold walls 6 Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions 7 Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents 8 Controller set points are set at design values Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions Record default set points if different from design values 9 Interlocked systems are operating 0 Report deficiencies d
521. tification appliance circuits are prohibited Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70 2 4 Conductor Terminations Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets FACP and remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor connection Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation Each terminal cabinet FACP SECTION 28 31 76 Page 24 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor its label circuit and terminal The laminated drawing shall be neat using 12 point lettering minimum size and mounted within each cabinet panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment 3 3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM Existing fire alarm equipment shall be maintained fully operational until the new equipment has been tested and accepted by the Contracting Officer As new equipment is installed it shall be labeled NOT IN SERVICE until the new equipment is accepted Once the new system is completed tested and accepted by the Government it shall be placed in service and connected to the station fire alarm system New e
522. ting adjusting and balancing strategies and step by step procedures as specified in Part 3 Preparation Article below Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project D Certified Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Submit 2 copies of reports prepared as specified in this Section on approved forms certified SECTION 23 05 93 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 by the testing adjusting and balancing Agent E Warranty Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the Warranty Article below 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Agent Qualifications Engage a testing adjusting and balancing agent certified by AABC C Certification of Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Certify the testing adjusting and balancing field data reports This certification includes the following 1 Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing adjusting and balancing reports 2 Certify that the testing adjusting and balancing team complied with the approved testing adjusting and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification D Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Use standard forms from AABC s National Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing E Instrumentation Type Quantity and Accuracy As described in AABC national standards F Instrumentation Calibration Calibrate instruments at least
523. tion Health and Safety Technician CHST Provide an Associate Safety Professional ASP Certified Safety Trained Supervisor STS and or Construction Health amp Safety Technician CHST at the work site to perform safety management surveillance inspections and safety enforcement for the Contractor to meet the designated safety level in paragraph 1 6 1 The ASP STS and or CHST shall be the safety and occupational health competent person as defined by USACE EM 385 1 1 The ASP STS and or CHST shall be at the work site at all times whenever work or testing is being performed and shall conduct and document daily safety inspections The ASP STS and or CHST shall have no other duties other than safety and occupational health management inspections and enforcement on this contract 1 7 1 4 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry Provide a competent person meeting the requirements of EM 385 1 1 who is assigned in writing by the Designated Authority to assess confined spaces and who possesses demonstrated knowledge skill and ability to a Identify the structure location and designation of confined and SECTION 01 35 29 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 1 permit required confined spaces where work is done b Calibrate and use testing equipment including but not limited to oxygen indicators combustible gas indicators carbon monoxide indicators and carbon dioxide indicators and to interpret accur
524. tion and a complete points list SECTION 23 09 54 Page 11 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 b Controls Drawings Provide drawings as specified in submittal paragraph Control Program Listings Provide listing of all control programs including terminal equipment controller setup pages if used d Current Operating Parameters Provide printouts of input and output setup information database setups This section provides information such as point addresses slopes and offsets for all points database of points etc e Design Information Provide tab but leave this section blank f Control Equipment Technical Data Sheets Provide technical data sheets for all controller hardware and accessories 1 7 10 Software delivered to the Owner In addition to software loaded into the controllers provide on separate CDs and loaded into the laptop workstation a One registered copy of all software used to program control Sequences in direct digital controllers LAN controllers and field configurable smart controllers b One un compiled copy in editable format of the final version of all operating software installed on all direct digital controllers c One compiled copy of the final version of all operating software installed on all direct digital controllers Additionally d Where specially programmed factory configured smart controllers are used in the system provide the minimum factory programming tools and speci
525. tion and jacket shall be carried over Apply insulation with joints tightly butted Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors SECTION 23 07 00 Page 20 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 c Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners self locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over d Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of tape Tape seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating e Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating f At jacket penetrations such as hangers thermometers and damper operating rods the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating g Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un insulated surface 2 inches Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions h Oval and round ducts flexible type shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of
526. tion org NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA 1300 North 17th Street Suite 1752 Rosslyn VA 22209 Ph 703 841 3200 Fax 703 841 5900 E mail webmasterGnema org Internet http www nema org NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02169 7471 Ph 617 770 3000 Fax 617 770 0700 E mail webmaster nfpa org Internet http www nfpa org SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA 4201 Lafayette Center Drive Chantilly VA 20151 1209 Ph 703 803 2980 Fax 703 803 3732 E mail info smacna org Internet http www smacna org UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook IL 60062 2096 Ph 847 272 8800 Fax 847 272 8129 E mail customerexperiencecenter us ul com Internet http www ul com U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USACE Order CRD C DOCUMENTS from U S Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station ATTN Technical Report Distribution Section Services SECTION 01 42 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Branch TIC 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180 6199 Ph 601 634 2664 Fax 601 634 2388 E mail mtc info erdc usace army mil Internet http www wes army mil SL MTC handbook htm Order Other Documents from USACE Publications Depot Attn CEHEC IM PD 2803 52nd Avenue Hyattsville MD 20781 1102 Ph 301 394 0081 Fax 301 394 0084 E mail pubs army usa
527. tion shall conform to ASTM C 1136 Type 1 and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material 3u2 14 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe pipes larger than 12 inches the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1 3 of the pipe Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation SECTION 23 07 00 Page 12 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 20155 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness TABLE 1 Insulation Material For Piping F Service Material Spec Type Class Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier Required Chilled Water Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No Supply amp Flex Elast Cell r ASTM C 534 T No Return Dual Temperature Piping 40 F Mineral Fiber with ASTM C 547 I Yes nominal Heating Hot Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No Water Supply amp Calcium Silicate ASTM 533 I No Return Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No Cold Domestic Water Piping
528. tions Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and Specific equipment 3 1 5 Emergency Operations Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire explosion spills or other foreseeable contingencies Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled 3 1 6 Operator Service Requirements Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication adjustment inspection and recording gage readings SECTION 01 78 23 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 L3 7 Environmental Conditions Include a list of Environmental Conditions temperature humidity and other relevant data that are best suited for the operation of each product component or system Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run 12322 Preventive Maintenance Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air qualit
529. tionsta the bes of my except 15 a AUTHORIZED QC MANAGER AT SITE DATE GOVERNMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORT QUALITY ASSURANCE REPRESENTATIVE S REMARKS AND OR EXCEPTIONS THE REPORT COVERNMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE MANAGER COMBINED FORM 01450 1 7 96 nner OF SECTION 01 45 10 PAGE 14 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT CONTINUATION SHEET ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY PHASE BLANK NOT APPLICABLE a PLANS AND SPECS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED THE SUEMITTALS HAVE MATERIALS WITH IDENTIFY SPECIFICATION SECTION DEFINABLE FEATURE OF WORK LOCATION AND LST PERSONNEL PRESENT MATERIALS STORED PROPERLY PRELIMINARY WORK WAS DONE CORRECTLY TESTING PLAN HAS BEEN Diu REVIEWED WORK METHOD AND SAFETY HAZARD Oo ANALYSIS ADDRESSED PREPARATORY PRELIMINARY WORK WAS DONE CORRECTLY SAMPLE HAS SEEN PREPARED APPROVED WORKMANSHID 15 SATISFACTORY TEST RESULTS ARE EE WORK IS IN COMAANCE WORK COMPLIES WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS TESTING PERFORMED amp WHO PERFORMED TEST COMBINED FORM 01450 2 7 98 SECTION 01 45 10 PAGE 15 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT CONTINUATION SHEET IP ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY MEM WORK COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT AS APPROVED EE INITIAL PHASE WORK COMPLIES WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOLLOW UP COMBIN
530. tire surface of the removable section shall be finished as specified e Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles f On equipment with ribs such as boiler flue gas connection draft fans and fly ash or soot collectors insulation shall be applied over 6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place or if approved by the Contracting Officer spot welded to the equipment over the ribs Insulation shall be Secured to the fabric with J hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or Shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch maximum centers g On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F insulation shall be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered h Upon completion of installation of insulation penetrations shall be caulked Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation including removable sections with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1 16 inch Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation 3 4 4 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media Below and above 60 degrees F equipment handling dual temperature media Shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment 3 4 5 Equipment Exposed to Weather 3 4 5 1 Installation Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in parag
531. tly identify unsheathed tubing at each end Fittings shall be compression or barbed push on type Extruded seamless polyethylene tubing shall conform to the following a Minimum Burst Pressure Requirements 100 psig at 75 degrees F to 25 psig at 150 degrees F b Stress Crack Resistance ASTM D 1693 200 hours minimum c Tensile Strength Minimum ASTM D 638 1100 psi d Flow Rate Average ASTM D 1238 0 30 decigram per minute and e Density Average ASTM D 792 920 kg m3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Perform installation under supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation of DDC systems SECTION 23 09 54 Page 29 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 35 Wiring Criteria a Input output identification Permanently label each field wire cable or pneumatic tube at each end with unique descriptive identification b Rigid or flexible conduit shall be terminated at all sensors and output devices c Surge Protection Install surge protection per manufacturer s specification d Grounding Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground Ground controller to a ground in accordance with Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Grounding of the green ac ground wire at the breaker panel alone is not adequate Run metal conduit from controller panels to adequate building grounds Ground sensor drain wire shields at controller end e Contractor i
532. tones 1 sec on 1 2 second off 1 second on 1 2 second off 1 second on Alert This is the Mass Notification System There is an emergency situation DO NOT evacuate the building Stay in your current location SECTION 28 31 76 Page 17 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Stay tuned for further instructions repeat message 2 times 4 1000 Hz tones 1 sec on 1 2 second off 1 second on 1 2 second off 1 second on Alert This is the Mass Notification System There is a chemical gas emergency Turn off all HVAC equipment seal all doors and windows with wet fabric Don protective gear DO NOT evacuate the building Act now Listen to the MNS system for further instructions repeat message 2 times 5 1000 Hz tones 1 sec on 1 2 second off 1 second on 1 2 second off 1 second on Alert this is the Mass Notification System There is a explosive blast risk along the South wall of your building Quietly move towards the north side of the building and exit from the north stairs Move away from the building heading north to the north parking area repeat message 2 times a The Remote Microphone station shall incorporate a Push To Talk PTT microphone redundant controls and system status indicators of for the system The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel The housing shall contain a
533. tor present in the work area while work is being performed The intermittent observation periods shall be at times of significant work shall be recurrent over the complete work period and shall total at least 25 percent of the total work time Perodic special inspection shall be performed where specified for items as shown on the drawings PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3d PERFORMANCE OF INSPECTIONS Special Inspections shall be performed for the following where designated on the drawings Mechanical and Electrical Components Special inspection of the mechanical and electrical components shall assure that the methods of anchoring and fastening indicated on the drawings are being complied with at the onset of construction of the component and that the specified or shown number spacing and types of fasteners were actually installed Special inspection for mechanical and electrical SECTION 01 45 35 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 components shall be as follows a Periodic special inspection during the anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems b Periodic special inspection during the installation of anchorage of all other electrical equipment c Periodic special inspection during installation for flammable combustible or highly toxic piping systems and their associated mechanical units d Periodic special inspection during the installation of HV
534. tors Terminal Cabinets Digital alarm communicator transmitter DACT SD 05 Design Data System Operation SECTION 28 31 76 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a 1 Provide a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings Battery power Provide battery calculations as required in paragraph Battery Power Calculations SD 06 Test Reports Field Quality Control test reports Testing Procedures Smoke sensor testing procedures SD 07 Certificates Installer Qualifications SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Mass Notification System Include the control panel and a unique identifier with an indication of test results and signature of the factory trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer The Contractor shall include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form with the appropriate test reports SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance O amp M Instructions Six copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions indexed and in booklet form shall be submitted The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package Manuals shall be approved prior to training Original and backup copies of all software delivered for this project shall be provided on each type of CD DVD media utilized Instruction of Government E
535. trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal including downed timber snags brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work Trees stumps roots brush and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off a minimum of 18 below the original ground surface except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing 343 TREE REMOVAL Where indicated or directed trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and SECTION 31 11 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 grubbing This work shall include the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 3 4 GRUBBING Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps roots larger than 3 inches in diameter and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas Material to be grubbed together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes shall be removed to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as constr
536. trial Wipes Brown Papers and Coarse Papers Corrugated boxes refer to boxes made of corrugated paperboard which in turn is made from a fluted corrugating medium pasted to two flat sheets of paperboard linerboard Fiber or fiberboard boxes refer to boxes made from containerboard either solid fiber or corrugated paperboard general term or boxes made from solid paperboard of the same material throughout This item refers to a paperboard suitable for the manufacture of folding cartons This item is considered self explanatory however if questions arise refer to 40 CFR 250 4 for definitions of any of these items This item is considered self explanatory however if questions arise refer to 40 CFR 250 4 for definitions of any of these items Brown papers refer to papers usually made from unbleached kraft pulp and used for bags sacks wrapping paper and so forth Coarse papers refer to papers used for industrial purposes as distinguished from those used for cultural or sanitary purposes Any other type of paper not included in any of the above categories End of Section SECTION 01 57 19 APPENDIX A Page 16 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL L 1 PROJECT SIGN Within 15 days after the commencement of work provide one project identification sign at the location designated Construct the
537. ts and personnel for making the tests a test location and other necessary facilities 4 2 Radio Transmitter Restrictions Conform to the restrictions and procedures for the use of radio transmitting equipment as directed Do not use transmitters without prior approval 5 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES Pick up solid wastes and place in covered containers which are regularly emptied Do not prepare or cook food on the project site Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes At project completion leave the areas clean SECTION 01 57 19 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 5 1 Disposal of Metal Paint Cans All metal paint cans shall be taken to Building 962 for recycling The cans shall be empty and completely dry The cans shall be triple rinsed and stenciled Triple Rinsed prior to turn in The Contractor shall give the Government 72 hours advance notice prior to turn in Contractor is responsible for rinsing stenciling crushing and deposting in Government owned receptable located at Building 962 5 2 Disposal of Rubbish and Debris Rubbish and debris except metals shall be taken to the Government landfill site indicated or specified Conform to Regulations of Base Sanitary Landfill as set forth in Base Order 11350 2C Metals shall be taken to the DRMO disposal area at Lot 201 as specified SECTION 01 57 19 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP
538. ts identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise specified Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop drawings settings of adjustable devices and other information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance of any final testing Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14 days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing organization Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable equipment and systems specified in the following sections a Section 26 12 19 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS b Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion of acceptance tests and inspections MC PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when SECTION 26 08 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in service End of Section SECTION 26 08 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 12 19 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 04 04 PART 1 GENERAL Iy 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form
539. ttery Power Calculations a Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements 1 Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm alert and supervisory power requirements Ampere hour requirements for each System component and each panel component and the battery recharging period shall be included 2 Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm alert and supervisory power requirements Ampere hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations SECTION 28 31 76 Page 14 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 3 A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries b For battery calculations use the following assumptions Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries Calculate the required Amp Hours for the specified standby time and then calculate the required Amp Hours for the specified alarm time Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and or appliances remote from the power sources 9 2 Battery Chargers Provide a solid state fully automatic variable charging rate battery charger The charger shall be capab
540. turn or reversing type Provide proportioning actuators capable of stopping at all points in the cycle and starting in either direction from any point Provide reversing and proportioning actuators with limit switches to limit travel in either direction unless operator is stall type Actuators shall have a simple switch for reversing direction and a button to disengage clutch for manual adjustments Provide reversible shaded pole split capacitor synchronous or stepper type electric motors PA 3 2 Pneumatic Actuators Provide piston or diaphragm type actuator with full range or split range springs to provide required sequence specified and fail safe operation 2 7 4 Output Signal Conversion 247544T Electronic to Pneumatic Transducer Electronic to pneumatic transducer shall convert 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC digital controller output signal to a proportional 0 to 20 psig pressure signal operator scaleable Accuracy shall be 1 0 percent or better Linearity shall be 0 1 percent Transducer shall have feedback circuit that converts pneumatic signal to a proportional 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal 2 ud Pneumatic to Electronic Pressure Transducer Pneumatic to electronic transducer shall convert 0 to 20 psig signal to a proportional 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal operator scaleable Supply voltage shall be 24 VDC Accuracy shall be 1 0 percent or better Linearity shall be 0 1 percent 2 7 5 Output Switches 2 7 5 1 Contro
541. ty on the air cooled chiller compressor s This warranty shall be directly from the chiller manufacturer to the Government and shall be in addition to the standard one year warranty of construction The manufacturer s warranty shall provide for the repair or replacement of the chiller compressor s that become inoperative as a result of defects in material or workmanship within 5 years after the date of final acceptance When the manufacturer determines that a compressor requires replacement the manufacturer shall furnish new compressor s at no additional cost to the Government Upon notification that a chiller compressor has failed under the terms of the warranty the manufacturer shall respond in no more than 24 hours Response shall mean having a manufacturer qualified technician onsite to evaluate the extent of the needed repairs The warranty period shall begin on the same date as final acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period 46 1 Local Service Representative The Contractor shall furnish with each manufacturer s multi year warranty the name address and telephone number day night weekend and holiday of the service representative nearest to the location where the equipment is installed Upon a request for service under the multi year warranty the service representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the SECTION 23 64 0
542. uble wall zinc coated steel construction gasketed airtight with continuous hinges and cam latches Insulate access doors with one inch thick rigid insulation Provide 12 inch by 12 inch door except where larger sizes are indicated or provide 12 inches by height of duct when duct is less than 12 inches high Provide keyed alike 90 degree turn cam locks on each access door in sleeping rooms furnish three keys 2 3 6 Fire Dampers UL 555 and NFPA 90A Dampers shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir Dampers when open shall not protrude into the ducts 2 9 7 Flexible Round Ducts UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory applied insulation vapor barrier and end connections Fire hazard rating of duct assembly shall not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed Provide ducts designed for working pressures of 2 inches W G positive and 1 5 inches W G negative Flexible round duct length shall not exceed 5 feet Secure connections by applying adhesive for 2 inches over rigid duct apply flexible duct 2 inches over rigid duct apply metal clamp and provide minimum of three No 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and rigid duct a Inner duct core Flexible core shall be interlocking spiral or helically corrugated and constructed of zinc coated steel aluminum or stainless steel or shall be constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring steel wire helix fused to continuous fire retardant flexible vapor barrier film inner duct
543. uction areas under this contract such as areas for buildings and areas to be paved Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground 3 25 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 26 22 Saleable Timber 1 All timber on the project site noted for clearing and grubbing shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site and disposed of off stations 3 5 2 Nonsaleable Materials Logs stumps roots brush rotten wood and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government controlled land at the Contractor s responsibility End of Section SECTION 31 11 00 Page 2 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA AWWA C600 2005 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C 136 2006 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D 1140 2000 Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No 200 75 micrometer Sieve ASTM D 1556 2000 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sa
544. uired to be in accordance with manufacturer s instructions submit printed copies of those instructions prior to installation Installation of the item shall not proceed until manufacturer s instructions are received Failure to submit manufacturer s instructions shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material 1 5 4 Certificates Submit manufacturer s certifications as required for products materials finishes and equipment as specified in the technical sections Certificates from material suppliers are not acceptable Preprinted certifications and copies of previously submitted documents will not be acceptable The manufacturer s certifications shall name the appropriate products equipment or materials and the publication specified as controlling the quality of that item Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does not meet requirements specified such as as good as achieve the same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced publications or equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified material Certifications shall simply state that the item conforms to the requirements specified Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer s letterhead and shall be signed by the manufacturer s official authorized to sign certificates of compliance 1 5 4 1 Reference Standard Compliance Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to ind
545. upervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists 2 11 9 Instructions Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire alarm control unit The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions normal alarm supervisory and trouble The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted 2l1li 10 Walk Test Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature When using this feature operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer but no other outputs occur 2 21 History Logging In addition to the required printer output the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log These events shall be stored in a battery protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory 212 AMPLIFIERS PREAMPLIFIERS TONE GENERATORS Any amplifiers preamplifiers tone generators digitalized voice generators and other hardware necessary for a complete operational t
546. uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material While the excavation is open the water level shall be maintained continuously at least 2 feet below the working level 321 2 Underground Utilities Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction The Contractor shall contract with a Camp Lejeune approved third party locating Service to locate base owned utilities and contact North Carolina One Call SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 to locate all other utilities 3 1 3 Machinery and Equipment Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor s risk Repair or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged 3 2 SURFACE PREPARATION 3221 Clearing Grubbing Unless indicated otherwise remove trees stumps logs shrubs brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction operations within the clearing limits Remove stumps entirely Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below ex
547. ures except for positive displacement pumps 1 Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump Read pressure differential across the pump Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights Note the point on the manufacturer s pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size 2 Check system resistance With all valves open read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer s head capacity curve Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved 3 Verify pump motor brake horsepower Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer s performance data Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage 4 Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design B Set calibrated balancing valves if installed at calculated presettings C Measure flow at all stations and adjust where necessary to obtain first balance 1 System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow pressure drop relationship may be used as a flow indicating device D Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to SECTION 23 05 93 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050
548. urvey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing Z Pump Stations LEJEUNE wastewater pump point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes Pump Station ID Facility Number Date Acquired Year Use Air Chemicals Sanitation Sewage etc Type Submersible Turbine Vertical Lift Centrifugal etc e Cooling Method f Rated Outflow Volume g Flow Unit Measure Code h X Coordinates i Y Coordinates j Number of Pumps k Contract Number 1 Drawing Type m Drawing Number n Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing AA Oil Water Separators LEJEUNE wstewat oil wat separatr point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Oil Water Separator ID Facility Number b Date Acquired Year Separator Process e Separator Volume f Volume Units of Measure g Grit Chamber Yes No h Flow Capacity i Flow Units j X Coordinates k Y Coordinates 1 Contract Number m Drawing Type n Drawing Number Date Source Survey Grade GPS Located in Field Sub Meter GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing BB Grease Trap LEJEUNE wastewater grease trap point 1 Locate GPS and collect the following attributes a Trap Identification Nearest Facility use Number b Type of Trap Material d Capacity e Capacity Units SECTION O1 77 00 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS
549. used containing recovered materials plus quantity used not containing recovered materials Ft3 cubic feet Ft2 square feet m3 cubic meters yd3 cubic yards box number of boxes used Amt dollar value of material used Includes but is not limited to cellulose fiber mineral fibers fiberglass and rock wool vermiculite and perlite Includes but is not limited to mineral fibers fiberglass and rock wool This category refers to sheathing roof decking and wood panel insulation It includes but is not limited to cellulose fiber fiberboard perlite composite board polyurethane polyisocyanurate polystyrene phenolics and composites Includes but is not limited to foam in place polyurethane and polyisocyanurate and spray on cellulose This item refers to any grade of paper Suitable for copying by the xerographic method This item refers to paper designed for printing other than newsprint such as offset or book paper and paper suitable for pen and ink pencil typewriter or printing SECTION 01 57 19 APPENDIX A Page 15 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 Page 3 of 3 MATERIAL DEFINITION Corrugated amp Fiberboard Boxes Folding Boxes and Cartons Stationery Office Papers Envelopes and Manifold Business Forms Toilet Tissue Paper Towels Facial Tissue Paper Napkins Doilies and Indus
550. ustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 24 hours Cease all normal activities until the job site is completely prepared for the onslaught of destructive weather The job site should be completely free of debris rubbish and scrap materials The facility being worked on should be made weather tight All scaffolding planking shall be removed 11 formwork and free standing structural steel shall be braced 11 machinery tools equipment and materials shall be properly secured or removed from the job site Expend every effort to clear all missiles hazards and loose equipment from the job site When the contractor secures for the day the job site should be left in a condition that is ready for the storm and the contractor should assume that they will not be allowed to return to their job site until after the storm passes and the base is reopened Contact ROICC for additional updates and upon completion of required actions e Condition ONE Sustained winds of 74 mph or greater expected within 12 hours If still on the job site the contractor will be required to immediately leave the base until the storm passes and the base is reopened 1 6 STATION OPERATION AFFECT ON CONTRACTOR OPERATIONS 1 6 1 Restricted Access Areas The Government will monitor work inside Building 24 Notify Contracting SECTION 01 50 00 Page 4 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to starting work in t
551. ustry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute ANSI American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA Underwriters Laboratories UL and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AEIC submit proof of such compliance The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance 1 5 4 2 Independent Testing Organization Certificate In lieu of the label or listing submit a certificate from an independent testing organization competent to perform testing and approved by the Contracting Officer The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization s test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization s reference standard 1 5 5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Comply with the requirements of Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data and the technical sections 1 5 5 Operating Instructions Submit text of posted operating instructions for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections SECTION 26 00 00 Page 3 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 s i 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 43 Material and Equipment Qualifications Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are
552. vault as specified including each splice Install cable tags over the fireproofing if any and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes handholes and vaults End of Section SECTION 26 00 00 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 SECTION 26 05 48 00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ds 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION AISC AISC 325 2005 e13 Steel Construction Manual U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD UFC 3 310 03A 2005 Seismic Design for Buildings 2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Equipment Requirements Detail drawings along with catalog cuts templates and erection and installation details as appropriate for the items listed Submittals shall be complete in detail shall indicate thickness type grade class of metal and dimensions and shall show construction details reinforcement anchorage and installation with relation to the building construction SD 03 Product Data Equipment Requirements Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings Calculations shall be stamped by a registered eng
553. vey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing M Playground LEJEUNE playground_area Ls Qon GPS and collect the following attributes Pool ID Facility Number Feature Description Drawing Number Drawing Type Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing N Swimming Pool LEJEUNE swimming pool area I GPS and collect the following attributes a Play Ground ID Facility Number b Feature Description recreation training c Drawing Number d Drawing Type e Contract Number Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing O Athletic Court LEJEUNE athletic court area 12 GPS and collect the following attributes SECTION 01 77 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 a Court ID Facility Number b Court Type Tennis Court Basketball Court Baseball Field Football Field etc Court Name d Date Acquired e Drawing Type f Drawing Number g Contract Number h Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Georeferenced Drawing AutoCAD Drawing P Athletic Field LEJEUNE athletic field area 1 GPS Structures and collect the following attributes a Field ID Facility Number b Field Description SOFTBALL FIELD OBSTACLE TRAINING PT FIELD etc Date Acquired Year d Field Type e Drawing Type f Contract Number g Drawing Number h Data Source Sub Meter GPS Survey Grade GPS Geore
554. vices required for control of supply air enthalpy and temperature controller shall modulate chilled water and hot water control valves as required Provide air flow measurement stations integral to make up air unit to measure supply and exhaust air flow rates 1 5 and communicate the data to the building and management control system Controller shall have BACH MS TP interface suitable for communicating data to the Johnson Controls Building Management and control system 1 3 Hot Water Converters T E Package Provide factory assembled U tube units constructed for minimum of 125 psig working pressure with steam in the shell and water in the tubes Construct in accordance with ASME BPV I 1 4 Pumps a In Line pumps Provide pumps constructed of manufacturer s standard materials suitable for chilled water and hot water heating systems Pumps shall have mechanical seals and drip proof electric motors Pumps located outdoors shall have TEFC motors b End suction water pumps Pumps shall be single stage centrifugal with mechanical seals and drip proof electric motors and TEFC motors on outdoor pumps Impeller shall be bronze Other pump parts shall be manufacturer s standard materials provided with bronze impeller pump Provide threaded suction and discharge pressure gage tapping with square head plugs Provide flexible coupling with steel cover guard on base mounted pumps Base mounted pump coupling guard and motor shall each be bolted
555. wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0 016 inch aluminum matching jacket material Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3 4 by 0 020 inch thick stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced tape The jacket may at the option of the Contractor be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburg or Z type longitudinal joint When the Z joint is used the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place 2 1 9 Vapor Retarder Required 2 1 9 1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket ASJ Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot cold pipes ducts or equipment Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing 222922 Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings a The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed greater than 3 plys standard grade silver white black and embossed white jacket for use on hot cold pipes Less than 0 0000 permeability when tested per ASTM E 96 E 96M Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements UV resistant b The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service Color SECTION 23 07 00 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 shall be
556. with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12 10 of NEMA MG 1 AL Three Phase Motor Protection Provide controllers for motors rated 1 hp and above with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay 12 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL Where specified in the technical sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment including pertinent safety requirements as required Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the cont
557. with data mode V 90 utilizing Hayes compatible command codes The modem shall be capable of Auto dialing a preset number based on preprogrammed events The modem shall auto answer and provide a secure password protection system 2 14 2 RS 232 RS 485 The panel shall support a direct connect via RS 232 or RS 485 connections 2 15 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS 221051 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter DACT Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm supervisory and trouble conditions via a single transmitter Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72 Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits in accordance with NFPA 72 2 15 2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station SECTION 28 31 76 Page 22 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 2 a Manual pull stations b Smoke detectors c Duct smoke detectors d Heat detectors 16 NAMEPLATES Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer s name address type or style model or serial number catalog number date of installation installing Contractor s name and address and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipme
558. work Erection shall be performed under the supervision of a designated person as defined in ASME B30 5 11 testing shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer s recommended procedures d The Contractor shall comply with ASME B30 5 for mobile and locomotive cranes ASME B30 22 for articulating boom cranes ASME B30 3 for construction tower cranes and ASME B30 8 for floating cranes and floating derricks e The presence of Government personnel does not relieve the Contractor of an obligation to comply with all applicable safety regulations The Government will investigate all complaints of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions received in writing from contractor employees federal civilian employees or military personnel f Each load shall be rigged attached independently to the hook master link in such a fashion that the load cannot slide or otherwise become detached Christmas tree lifting multiple rigged materials is not allowed g Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90 of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration h When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and shall follow the requirements of USACE EM 385 1 1 section 11 and ASME B30 5 or ASME B30 22 as applicable i Crane suspended personnel work platforms baskets shall not be used unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the
559. xcept in States where workers compensation may not be written by private carriers Others as required by State law 1 3 ELECTRONIC MAIL EMAIL as The Contractor is required to establish and maintain electronic mail email capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments in Microsoft Adobe Acrobat and other similar formats Within 10 days after contract award the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer a single only one email address for the ROICC office to send communications related to this contract correspondence The ROICC office may also use email to notify the Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant such as hurricanes terrorist threats etc Multiple email addresses are not authorized It is the Contractor s responsibility to make timely distribution of all ROICC email within its own organization including field office s SECTION 01 30 00 Page 1 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 e The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer in writing of any changes to their email address CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS l 4 1 Subcontractors and Personnel Furnish a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an emergency As changes occur and additional information becomes available correct and change the information contained in previous
560. xcluded from penetrating to the ground surface 352 4 Watering Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of Soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off During the germination SECTION 32 92 19 Page 5 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 process seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out 343 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS Immediately after turfing protect area against traffic and other use End of Section SECTION 32 92 19 Page 6 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 PART 1 Iy SECTION 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 01 07 GENERAL 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AEIC ANSI ASTM ASTM ASTM IEEE NEMA NEMA NEMA NEMA ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES AEIC CS6 1987 R 1989 Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Shielded Power Cable Rated 5 Through 69 kV AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST 1997 National Electrical Safety Code ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM B 1 2001 Hard Drawn Copper Wire B 8 1999 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium Hard or Soft C 260 2001 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE S
561. y UL Specific breaker placement is required in panelboards to SECTION 26 20 00 Page 7 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings Use of Subfeed Breakers is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise Main breaker shall be separately mounted above or below branch breakers Where space only is indicated make provisions for future installation of breakers Panelboard locks shall be keyed same Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard e g Panel PA served from Panel MDP Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use 2 10 1 Panelboard Buses Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining drilling or tapping Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors bond to steel cabinet 2 10 2 Circuit Breakers UL 489 thermal magnetic type having a minimum short circuit current rating equal to the short circuit current
562. y impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials Lubrication Data Include preventative maintenance lubrication data in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled Operator Service Requirements a A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications b Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points recommended types and grades of lubricants and capacities c A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency 14342 2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule Include manufacturer s schedule for routine preventive maintenance inspections tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance Provide manufacturer s projection of preventive maintenance work hours on a daily weekly monthly and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft For periodic calibrations provide manufacturer s specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation 1222223 Cleaning Recommendations Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E 1971 1 3 3 Corrective Maintenance Repair Include manufacturer s recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features of each system Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts
563. y where variations occur Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions 5 Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer Make required adjustments to pulley sizes motor sizes and electrical connections to accommodate fan speed changes 6 Do not make fan speed adjustments that result in motor overload Consult equipment manufacturers about fan speed safety factors Modulate dampers and measure fan motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur Measure amperage in full cooling full heating and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower C Adjust volume dampers for main duct submain ducts and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances 1 Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved a Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot tube traverse measurements measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone 2 Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances D Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments 1 Measure terminal outlets using a direct reading hood or the outlet manufacturer s written instructions and calculat
564. ype duct hangers SECTION 23 07 00 Page 19 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 e Where mechanical fasteners are used self locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over f Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal Staples tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape g Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape h At jacket penetrations such as hangers thermometers and damper operating rods voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape i Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush
565. ysis fertilizer at 25 pounds per 1000 square feet Provide commercial agricultural limestone of 94 80 14 analysis at 70 pounds per 1000 square feet Provide mulch and water to establish an acceptable stand of grass SECTION 31 23 00 00 20 Page 8 HVAC REPAIRS HP 235 amp HP 245 05080050 3 0853 Protection of Surfaces Protect newly backfilled graded and topsoiled areas from traffic erosion and settlements that may occur Repair or reestablish damaged grades elevations or slopes 29 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling and brush refuse stumps roots and timber 250 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 10 1 Sampling Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests 10 2 Testing Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used Provide additional tests for each source change 02222 Fill and Backfill Material Testing Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable 10 262 Density Tests Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 When ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests are used verify d
566. ystem A system where alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected through individual dedicated conductors to a central control panel without the use of analog addressable circuits or devices Interface Device An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog addressable system d Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel FACP FMCP A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected The panel has central processing memory input and output terminals r Terminal Cabinet A steel cabinet with locking hinge mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted 5 OUALITY ASSURANCE 5 1 Qualifications Installer The installing Contractor shall provide the following Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience shall be utilized to assist in the installation and terminate fire alarm mass notification devices cabinets and panels The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation adjustment testing and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings 5 1 2 Test Personnel The installing Contractor shall provide the following Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience shall be utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire ala
567. ystem shall be a complete supervised noncoded analog addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72 UL 864 Ninth Edition and UL 2017 The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and restored to normal The system may be placed in the alert mode by local micrphones or remotely from authorized locations users 2d Alarm Initiating Devices Alarm initiating devices shall be connected to initiating device circuits IDC Style B and installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Alarm notification appliances shall be connected to notification appliance circuits NAC Style Z in accordance with NFPA 72 The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device s are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal Audible and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72 Fire alarm system mass notification system components requiring power except for the control panel power supply shall operate on 24 Volts dc 2 2 Functions and Operating Features The system shall provide the following functions and operating features a The FACP FMCP shall provide power annunciation supervision and control for the system

CONTRACT N40085-08-B-0050 NAVFAC SPECIFICATION NO. 05

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents